exv4waq






Exhibit (aq)



SUPPLY CONTRACT




BETWEEN




WÄRTSILÄ FINLAND OY




AND




LIHIR GOLD LIMITED




REGARDING




SUPPLY AND DELIVERY OF A FLOATING POWER PLANT BARGE




AND




RELATED SERVICES




Page 2









 








TABLE OF CONTENTS




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	CLAUSE 1

	 	DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION
	 	 	5	 
	 
	CLAUSE 2

	 	SCOPE OF THE CONTRACT
	 	 	8	 
	 
	CLAUSE 3

	 	PRICE
	 	 	9	 
	 
	CLAUSE 4

	 	PAYMENT TERMS
	 	 	10	 
	 
	CLAUSE 5

	 	DELIVERY DATE
	 	 	12	 
	 
	CLAUSE 6

	 	PRE-COMMISSIONING, INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
ASSISTANCE
	 	 	13	 
	 
	CLAUSE 7

	 	PERFORMANCE TESTS
	 	 	15	 
	 
	CLAUSE 8

	 	GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
	 	 	16	 
	 
	CLAUSE 9

	 	TOTAL AMOUNT OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
	 	 	17	 
	 
	CLAUSE 10

	 	BUYER’S OBLIGATIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES
	 	 	17	 
	 
	CLAUSE 11

	 	SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION
	 	 	18	 
	 
	CLAUSE 12

	 	CONFIDENTIALITY AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
	 	 	20	 
	 
	CLAUSE 13

	 	INSPECTION AND TESTS AND SUPPLIER REPORTING
	 	 	21	 
	 
	CLAUSE 14

	 	DELIVERY OF PRELIMINARY DESIGN DRAWINGS
	 	 	22	 
	 
	CLAUSE 15

	 	WARRANTY
	 	 	22	 
	 
	CLAUSE 16


CLAUSE 17


CLAUSE 18


CLAUSE 19


CLAUSE 20


CLAUSE 21


CLAUSE 22


CLAUSE 23


CLAUSE 24


CLAUSE 25

	 	LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY, GENERAL INDEMNITY


ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES AND SAFETY


IMPORT AND EXPORT RESTRICTIONS


FORCE MAJEURE


APPLICABLE LAW


ARBITRATION


FINAL PROVISIONS


CHANGE ORDERS


CORPORATE WARRANTIES


NOTICES
	 	

















	24


25


25


26


26


26


27


28


30


31	























Page 3









 





TABLE OF EXHIBITS




Exhibit




	 	 	 
	Exhibit A

	 	Technical Specifications and Scope of Supply
	 

	 	1 Scope of Supply
	 

	 	2 Technical Specifications
	 

	 	3 Data Sheets
	 

	 	4 Main Flow Diagrams
	 

	 	5 List of Suppliers
	 

	 	6 Lay out drawings
	 
	 	 
	Exhibit B

	 	Performance Figures/Guarantees
	 

	 	1 Appendix B — performance guarantees
	 

	 	2 Emission statement (DBAA992527)
	 
	 	 
	Exhibit C

	 	Performance Test Guidelines
	 

	 	1 Power and heat rate tests (WDAAA245063)
	 

	 	2 Lubricating oil consumption test (DAAB184367)
	 

	 	3 Stack emissions test (DAAB195899)
	 
	 	 
	Exhibit D

	 	Model Advance Payment Guarantee
	 
	 	 
	Exhibit E

	 	Model Performance Guarantee
	 
	 	 
	Exhibit F

	 	Model Payment Guarantee
	 
	 	 
	Exhibit G

	 	Draft Quality Assurance Plan
	 
	 	 
	Exhibit H

	 	Draft Delivery Schedule and Milestone Certificate
	 
	 	 
	Exhibit I

	 	Performance Test Completion Certificate
	 
	 	 
	Exhibit J

	 	Substantial Completion Certificate






Page 4









 






SUPPLY CONTRACT



This SUPPLY CONTRACT (the “Contract”) is made on this 26th day of August, 2009, between Lihir Gold
Limited, a limited liability company incorporated and existing under the laws of Papua New Guinea,
whose registered office is 7th Floor Pacific Place, Cnr Champion Parade and Musgrave Street (PO Box
789), Port Moresby NCD 121, Papua New Guinea (the “Buyer”),



and



Wärtsilä Finland Oy, a limited liability company incorporated under the laws of Finland, with
offices at Tarhaajantie 2, Vaasa, Finland (the “Supplier”),



Singularly referred to as the “Party” and collectively referred to as “Parties”.




RECITALS



WHEREAS, the Buyer wishes to buy and have delivered a floating power plant barge consisting of 8 x
20V32 generating sets and related auxiliary units for its Lihir Gold mine project at Lihir Island,
New Ireland Province, Papua New Guinea;



WHEREAS, the Supplier is in the business of manufacturing
and supplying oil fired diesel engines and providing certain design, engineering, construction
start-up and testing services in connection with such power plant supply;



WHEREAS, the Buyer wishes
to contract with the Supplier for the design, construction of the floating power plant barge and
the related engineering, start-up, testing and training services in connection therewith as
specified in this Contract;



WHEREAS, the Supplier agrees to provide the floating power plant barge
including equipment and services specified herein and the Buyer agrees to take delivery of and pay
for such a floating power plant barge including equipment and services on the terms and conditions
set out in this Contract.




THEREFORE THE PARTIES AGREE AS FOLLOWS:




CLAUSE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION





	1.1	 	For the purposes of this Contract, the following words and terms shall have the meanings
specified below:
	 
	 	 	Affiliate means a person or entity who, with respect to a specified person or entity,
directly or indirectly through one or more intermediaries controls, or is controlled by,
or is under common control with, the person or entity specified.
	 
	 	 	Change of Law means (a) the enactment, adoption, promulgation, modification or repeal,
after the signing of this Contract, of any Governmental Rule; or (b) any interpretation of
any Governmental Rule imposed by tribunal decision or by any other Governmental Unit,
which differs from the interpretation of such Governmental Rule at the date this Contract
was signed; or (c) the imposition of any material condition on the issuance or renewal of
any Governmental Approval after the signing of this contract; or (d) the failure to issue
or renew any Governmental Approval, which, in any such case, establishes or modifies
requirements materially affecting the design, engineering, procurement or supply of the
Plant making completion of the work with respect to the Plant and Services materially more
burdensome than the requirements expressly specified in this Contract.




Page 5









 






	 	 	Change Order means a written order to the Supplier pursuant to clause 23 hereof
authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Equipment, the Plant and/or
Services, any change to the Contract Price, and/or any adjustment to the Delivery date,
or any scheduled dates of Delivery as well as to estimated project schedule.
	 
	 	 	Commissioning shall be carried out in accordance with the Supplier’s standard
guidelines and procedures at the Site and shall mean any functional tests that have not
been carried out during Pre-Commissioning in the Shipyard and the Performance Test.
	 
	 	 	Contract means this supply contract, including all exhibits attached hereto, as
amended from time to time as provided herein.
	 
	 	 	Contract Price shall have the meaning set out in clause 3.
	 
	 	 	Delivery means the delivery of the Plant, as set forth in clause 5.
	 
	 	 	Electrical Energy means the electrical energy measured in kJ or kWh at the Electrical
Power Guarantee Point during an Electrical Power Test.
	 
	 	 	Electrical Power means the electrical power calculated as the Electrical Energy divided
by the time determined in Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees) of the Contract
during an Electrical Power Test, and measured in kW.
	 
	 	 	Electrical Power Test means a test conducted in accordance with Exhibit C (Performance
Test Guidelines) of the Contract to determine Electrical Power.
	 
	 	 	Electrical Power Guarantee means the guarantee that the Electrical Power measured during the Electrical
Power Test shall be no lower than the value stated in Exhibit B (Performance
Figures/Guarantees) of the Contract as recalculated for Site Conditions in accordance
with Exhibit C (Performance Test Guidelines).
	 
	 	 	Electrical Power Guarantee Point means the point specified in Exhibit B
(Performance Figures/Guarantees) where the electrical energy is measured during the
Electrical Power Test.
	 
	 	 	Equipment means the engines and auxiliary equipment specified in Exhibit A
(Technical Specifications and Scope of Supply) to be delivered by the Supplier.
	 
	 	 	Facility means the facility at Site in which the Plant will be installed by the
Buyer including the necessary works, systems, foundations, mooring facility, power
evacuation, fuel supply and other systems, equipment and works required for the
proper installation and function of the Plant.
	 
	 	 	Factory Testing shall have the meaning set out in clause 13.1.
	 
	 	 	Governmental Approval means any authorisation, consent, approval, license, lease,
ruling, permit, certification, exemption, or registration, by or with any Governmental
Unit.
	 
	 	 	Governmental Rule means any statute, law, regulation, ordinance, rule, judgement,
order, decree, directive, or requirement, or any similar form of decision of or
determination by, or any interpretation or administration of, any of the foregoing, by
any Governmental Unit.
	 
	 	 	Governmental Unit means any national, provincial, state or local government, any
political subdivision thereof, or any governmental, quasi-governmental, judicial, public
or statutory instrumentality, administrative agency, authority, body or other entity
having jurisdiction, in whole or in part, over the performance of the work with respect
to the Equipment, the Plant and/or Services, the Facility or its operations, transmission
of electricity to the Buyer, or the health, safety or environmental conditions of the
Plant, Facility or the Site or otherwise over the parties hereto.




Page 6









 






	 	 	Heat Rate means the average ratio of the Total Fuel Energy consumed over the
Electrical Energy, given as kJ / kWh.
	 
	 	 	Heat Rate Guarantee means the guarantee that the Heat Rate during a Heat Rate Test shall
not exceed the value stated in Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees) as
recalculated for Site Conditions in accordance with Exhibit C (Performance Test
Guidelines).
	 
	 	 	Heat Rate Test means a test conducted in accordance with Exhibit C (Performance Test
Guidelines) to determine the Heat Rate.
	 
	 	 	Lubricating Oil Consumption Guarantee means the guarantee that the specific lube oil
consumption measured during a lube oil consumption test shall not exceed the value stated
in Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees).
	 
	 	 	Luise Harbour means the landward side of the straight line between the following two
coordinates [3o 05’ 44.7” S, 152o 38’ 15.9” E] and [3o 07’ 15.4” S, 152o 39’ 23.8” E] in
Lihir (Niolam) Island, New Ireland Province, Papua New Guinea.
	 
	 	 	Maximum Heat Rate Guarantee means the maximum heat rate as stated in Exhibit B
(Performance Figures/Guarantees) which the Plant may not exceed in order to be accepted
hereunder.
	 
	 	 	Milestone Certificate means the certificate in the form set forth in Exhibit H issued by
the Supplier to the Buyer, certifying that a portion of the works in the Shipyard has
been completed entitling Supplier to a milestone payment in accordance with the
provisions of clause 4.3 c).
	 
	 	 	Minimum Electrical Power Guarantee means the minimum electrical power stated in Exhibit B
(Performance Figures/Guarantees) which the Plant has to achieve to be accepted hereunder.
	 
	 	 	Minimum Performance Requirements means the Minimum Electrical Power Guarantee
and the Maximum Heat Rate Guarantee.
	 
	 	 	Performance Tests shall have the meaning set out in clause 7.1.
	 
	 	 	Performance Tests Advisor means a Supplier authorised and approved (at the Suppliers
discretion) contractor engaged to carry out and/or have an advisory role during the
Commissioning and Performance Tests (which shall be the subject of a separate
contract).
	 
	 	 	Performance Test Completion Certificate shall have the meaning set out in clause 8.1.4.
	 
	 	 	Plant means the floating power plant barge to be constructed by the Supplier,
consisting, inter alia, of the Equipment.
	 
	 	 	Pre-Commissioning means those steps and processes, functional and safety tests which can
as far as practically possible be carried out in the Shipyard and in accordance with the
Supplier’s standard guidelines and the Technical Specification or Inspection and Test
Program in Exhibit G. Pre-Commissioning shall, to the extent possible in the Shipyard,
include start-up of the 20V32 generating sets (without synchronisation and loading).
	 
	 	 	Services means any services the Supplier has agreed to perform pursuant to the Contract
by way of Pre-Commissioning, repairing or replacing the Plant, or by way of performing
or re-performing the Services under the warranty or otherwise.
	 
	 	 	Shipyard means the shipyard where the Supplier will have the Plant constructed.




Page 7









 






	 	 	Site means the location on Lihir Island, New Ireland Province, Papua New Guinea
where the Plant is to be installed by the Buyer and where the Commissioning and
Performance Tests shall be conducted.
	 
	 	 	Site Conditions means the conditions at the Site, stipulated in Exhibit B (Performance
Figures/Guarantees), for purposes of the Plant design and calculation of the Performance
Test results.
	 
	 	 	Subcontractor means any person or entity having a contract with the Supplier or any
other subcontractor to perform any part of the Supplier’s obligations under the
Contract.
	 
	 	 	Substantial Completion means the point in time when the Plant is ready for the
conduct of the Commissioning and the Supplier has so notified the Buyer.
	 
	 	 	Substantial Completion Certificate means the certificate in the form set forth as Exhibit J
(Substantial Completion Certificate) issued by the Supplier as provided in clause
6.3 evidencing that Substantial Completion with respect to the Plant has occurred
and the Plant is ready for Commissioning.
	 
	 	 	Supplier’s Workshop means any workshop of the Supplier, any workshop of a company
belonging to the Wärtsilä Group, any workshop of a Subcontractor, any workshop of a
manufacturer of the Equipment and/or the Plant, or any other suitable place decided by
the Supplier in its sole discretion.
	 
	 	 	Technical Specifications and Scope of Supply means Exhibit A.






	1.2	 	The headings contained herein are included solely for the convenience of the Parties and are
not to be used as a basis for interpreting the various sections of this Contract.
	 
	1.3	 	The term “day” as used in this Contract means a calendar day.
	 
	1.4	 	Documents, drawings, schedules, manuals and other technical documents under this Contract
will be written in the English language.





CLAUSE 2 SCOPE OF THE CONTRACT





	2.1	 	The Supplier sells and undertakes to deliver and the Buyer buys and undertakes to accept
delivery of the Plant in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Contract, including all
Exhibits which form an integral part of this Contract and which are attached hereto as set out in
the TABLE OF EXHIBITS above. In case of any discrepancy or inconsistency between the terms herein
and those specified in any Exhibits hereto, the Contract text shall take precedence over the
Exhibit. The Exhibits shall be interpreted in the order shown in the Table of Exhibits above.
	 
	2.2	 	Not used
	 
	2.3	 	The Plant and manufacture thereof, shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth in
Exhibit A (Technical Specifications and Scope of Supply) only. The Parties agree that for the
purpose of complying with any governmental or other rules, regulations, standards or codes, the
Plant shall be deemed in compliance therewith if the Plant meets the stack emissions levels stated
in Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees). If any other standards or codes are found to be
mandatory applicable, they shall be treated as a Change of Law under this Contract. All
modifications, documentation, approvals, and any procedures, which are required due to any
applicable laws or regulations outside the country of manufacture of the Equipment and/or the
Plant, shall be the responsibility of and arranged and paid entirely by the Buyer. As a result of
continuous technical development the Supplier may seek approval in writing from the Buyer to make
improvements to the Plant and Services not yet delivered and such approval shall not be
unreasonably withheld by the Buyer.




Page 8









 







	2.4	 	Subject to the previous clause, no variation of the Plant, Services and/or the Contract
shall be effective unless it and its consequences are confirmed in writing by the Parties and
a Change Order is signed by duly authorised representatives of both Parties in accordance
with the procedure set out in clause 23.
	 
	2.5	 	Any illustrations, catalogues, drawings and dimensions which are either provided by the
Supplier or are otherwise acquired by the Buyer otherwise than in accordance with this
Contract and which relate to the Equipment, Services and/or the Plant are for information
purposes only and are not to be relied upon by the Buyer as containing any representations,
warranties or indemnities, save and to the extent that the contents of any such document are
expressly incorporated in writing into the Contract (including clear references to such
illustrations, catalogues, drawings and dimensions) or the obligation to give such a document
is stipulated in the Contract.
	 
	2.6	 	The Buyer declares and guarantees that the Buyer has, in due time prior to entering into the
Contract, fully informed the Supplier of the standards, codes and regulations applicable to
the Plant and its operation. The standards, codes and regulations applicable to the design
and/or manufacture of the Plant are as set forth in the Technical Specification and Scope of
Supply. If any other standards, codes or regulations are found to be mandatory applicable,
they shall be treated in the same manner as stipulated in clause 2.4 above.





CLAUSE 3 PRICE





	3.1	 	The total price for the Plant and the Services hereunder is
(such
amount, as it may from time to time be adjusted pursuant to the terms of this Contract is the “Contract Price”).

	 
	 	 	The above price is further broken down into following main sections:






	 	a)	 	Equipment and material (including engineering, project management etc) that
will be delivered, by the Supplier, to the Shipyard is priced
	 
	 	b)	 	Barge hull construction, installation and other works and services carried
out in the Shipyard by Subcontractors is priced at 
	 
	 	c)	 	Services carried out by Supplier in the Shipyard is priced at 
	 
	 	d)	 	Shipment of Plant from the Shipyard to DES Luise Harbour, Lihir Island, PNG
priced at 






	 	 	The Contract Price is based on delivery DES Luise Harbour, Lihir Island (Incoterms
2000). The total Contract Price includes the costs of normal standard export packing, which
shall under normal transport conditions prevent damage or deterioration of the Equipment
before it reaches the point of destination.
	 
	3.2	 	The Contract Price does not include any present or future taxes, VAT, stamp duty, duties,
imposts, deductions, withholdings, other charges and liabilities (all together, “Taxes”)
imposed by any authorities, whether national or local outside the country of manufacture of
the Equipment and/or Plant and associated with the Plant, the Equipment, the Services, the
Supplier’s performance hereunder and/or this Contract.
The Buyer shall bear, and where applicable reimburse the Supplier for such Taxes.
	 
	3.3	 	If, at any time, an adjustment event arises in respect of any supply made by a Party under this
Contract, a corresponding adjustment must be made between the parties.
Payments to give effect to the adjustment must be made between the parties and the Supplier
must issue a valid adjustment note in relation to the adjustment event.




Page 9









 











CLAUSE 4 PAYMENT TERMS





	4.1	 	Payment of the Contract Price shall be made by the Buyer to the Supplier’s bank account
designated by the Supplier in accordance with the timeframes set out below in clause 4.3.
Banking charges incurred inside Finland or the country in which the Shipyard is situated
shall be for the account of the Supplier while those incurred outside those countries shall
be borne by the Buyer.
	 
	4.2	 	All sums invoiced by the Supplier shall be paid by the Buyer into the Supplier’s bank
account in Finland without any set off, counterclaim or deduction and are not subject to any
settlement discount or other special terms of payment.
	 
	 	 	Notwithstanding the above, the Buyer may deduct from any amount due or becoming due to the
Supplier under this Contract all undisputed debts and amounts due from the Supplier to the Buyer
under or in connection with this Contract, provided it gives the Supplier no less than 10 days
notice in writing of its intention to do so.
	 
	4.3	 	The Buyer agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Supplier in the following manner:






	 	a)	 	of the Contract Price as an advance payment not later than seven
(7) days after the date of signing of this Contract provided the
Supplier gives the Buyer:



(i) an invoice; and


(ii) an advance payment guarantee of equal value issued by a first class
international bank nominated by the Supplier and acceptable to the Buyer (S&P rating of at
least A-) in form and substance set forth in Exhibit D (Model Advance Payment Guarantee)
to be maintained until a minimum of 60 days following the scheduled date of Delivery as
set forth in clause 5.2(a) or as specified in Exhibit H (Draft Delivery Schedule and
Milestones).
	 
	 	b)	 	of the Contract Price upon shipment of the last Wärtsilä
20V32 generating set out of the eight (8) 20V32 generating sets to be delivered by the Supplier
under this Contract, not later than seven (7) days after receipt of the following documents
from the Supplier:






	 	1)	 	commercial invoice;
	 
	 	2)	 	copy of clean on board bill(s) of lading giving evidence that all 8 generating sets of 20V32
type have been shipped from Finland to the country of the Shipyard;
	 
	 	3)	 	packing list; and
	 
	 	4)	 	performance guarantee in an amount of of the Contract Price issued by
a first class international bank nominated by the Supplier and acceptable to the Buyer (S&P
rating of at least A-) in form and substance set forth in Exhibit E (Model Performance
Guarantee). The Model Performance Guarantee shall be maintained until 12 months following issue
of Performance Test Completion Certificate.






	 	c)	 	of the Contract Price divided into the five (5) milestone events as
defined in below milestone payment schedule, not later than seven (7) days after receipt of the
following documents from the Supplier;






	 	1)	 	commercial invoice; and
	 
	 	2)	 	a Milestone Certificate corresponding to the achieved milestone event ;




Page 10









 












	 	 	 	Milestone payments schedule:





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Milestone	 	 	 	Milestone
	No.	 	event	 	Milestone Certificate	 	payment amount
	1

	 	Keel laying
	 	Milestone Certificate signed by the
Supplier and the Shipyard
evidencing that the barge hull keel
has been laid
	 	
	 	 
	2

	 	Launching of the
barge hull
	 	Milestone Certificate signed by the
Supplier and the Shipyard
evidencing that the barge hull has
been launched into the water
	 	
	 	 
	3

	 	Placing of
generating sets
	 	Milestone Certificate signed by the
Supplier and the Shipyard (or
applicable installation party)
evidencing that all 8 generating
sets of 20V32 type have been
placed on the barge hull
	 	 
	 	 
	4

	 	Installation of
radiators
	 	Milestone Certificate signed by the
Supplier and the Shipyard (or
applicable installation party)
evidencing that the cooling
radiators of all 8 generating sets of
20V32 type have been installed on
the power house roof
	 	
	 	 
	5

	 	First smoke
	 	Milestone Certificate signed by the
Supplier and the Shipyard (or
applicable installation party)
evidencing that the first generating
set out of the 8 generating sets of
20V32 type has been started
	 	







	 	d)	 	of the Contract Price upon completion of the construction and
installation works and Pre-Commissioning in the Shipyard not later than seven (7) days after
receipt of the following documents from the Supplier:






	 	1)	 	commercial invoice;
	 
	 	2)	 	copy of Substantial Completion Certificate; and
	 
	 	3)	 	bill of lading for the Plant confirming that the Plant has been placed upon
the semi-submersible transport vessel from the Shipyard.






	4.4	 	In order to secure the Buyer’s payment obligations under this Contract, the Buyer shall within
thirty (30) days after the date of signing of this Contract, deliver to the Supplier a payment
guarantee (the “Payment Guarantee”) in an amount of of the Contract Price and
issued by a first class international bank nominated by the Buyer and acceptable to the Supplier
(S&P rating of at least A-) in form and substance set forth in Exhibit F (Model Payment Guarantee)
to be maintained until a minimum of 30 days following receipt of the Substantial Completion
Certificate.






Page 11












 






	 	 	Upon payment of the milestone in 4.3(b) above:






	 	(a)	 	the Buyer shall within seven (7) days, deliver to the Supplier a replacement payment
guarantee (the “Replacement Payment Guarantee”) in an amount equal to the difference between the
aggregate of all sums paid by the Buyer to the Supplier under the Contract and the Contract Price and issued by a first class international bank nominated by the Buyer and
acceptable to the Supplier (S&P rating of at least A-) in form and substance set forth in Exhibit F
(Model Payment Guarantee) to be maintained until a minimum of 30 days following receipt of the
Substantial Completion Certificate; and
	 
	 	(b)	 	upon receipt of the Replacement Payment Guarantee, the
Supplier must promptly return the Payment Guarantee to the Buyer.






	 	 	The Buyer is entitled to progressively decrease the value of the Replacement Payment
Guarantee in an amount equal to any further payments of any percentage of the Contract Price until
such times as the Replacement Payment Guarantee is reduced to zero at which point, the Supplier
must return it to the Buyer.
	 
	4.5	 	Amounts not paid by either Party to the other when due under this Contract shall bear
interest from the date payment was due to the date of payment in full at a rate per annum equal to
 over the one (1) month’s Euro Inter Bank Offered Rate (EURIBOR) of
the due date.
	 
	 	 	The overdue interest shall be paid forthwith against an invoice on the date specified therein
(not to be less than 14 days).
	 
	4.6	 	At the conclusion of validity of any payment or performance guarantee issued under this
Contract by one party to the other, the recipient of the guarantee must return that guarantee to
the party who provided the guarantee within 14 days. The party who provides a guarantee to the
other party can request the early return of that guarantee but only when all obligations secured
by that guarantee have been discharged in full (to be determined in the sole discretion of the
recipient of the guarantee, acting reasonably).





CLAUSE 5 DELIVERY DATE





	5.1	 	The Plant must be delivered DES Luise Harbour, Lihir Island (Incoterms 2000). The delivery is
to occur at a suitable discharging location to be nominated by the Supplier or the Suppliers
transport provider (provided it is within Luise Harbour).
	 
	5.2	 	References to “Delivery” in this Contract shall be to the following dates:






	 	(a)	 	Unless the schedule is varied in accordance with this Contract, the Plant must be placed
on the semi-submersible delivery vessel at a suitable loading location near the Shipyard by no
later than 1 March 2011, such date to be evidenced by a bill of lading for the Plant. The Buyer
agrees that no liquidated damages for delay will accrue for a period of seven (7) days from 1
March 2011.
	 
	 	(b)	 	The Plant shall be delivered at a suitable discharging location DES Luise Harbour, Lihir
Island by no later than 21 March 2011. For the removal of doubt, because the parties acknowledge
that delays during the shipment of the Plant are beyond their control, liquidated damages of per day of delay shall be payable by the Supplier to the Buyer. The Buyer shall be responsible
for any delays (including but not limited to demurrage costs) caused by its failure to discharge
the Plant from the delivery vessel at the discharging location.






	5.3	 	If the Supplier fails to deliver the Plant from the Shipyard in accordance with clause 5.2(a)
due to reasons attributable to the Supplier, the Buyer shall be entitled to receive liquidated
damages calculated at the rate of of the Contract Price per week of delay (pro
rata based) .




Page 12









 






	 	 	The total amount of liquidated damages to be paid by the Supplier for the Supplier’s delay in
Delivery shall in no case exceed of the Contract Price.
	 
	5.4	 	In case the Plant cannot be loaded onto the transport vessel from the Shipyard on or after 1
March 2011 for reasons attributable to the Buyer:






	 	a)	 	the Buyer shall arrange for storage and insurance of the Plant. The storage and
insurance shall be at the Buyer’s risk and expense.
	 
	 	b)	 	Delivery shall be deemed to be completed and the Buyer shall proceed to pay in
accordance with clause 4.3(d).






	5.5	 	If the Delivery is delayed because of force majeure or because of an act or omission of the
Buyer or due to reasons within the control of the Buyer, or due to reasons not being at the
Supplier’s risk (such as Change of Law outside the country of the manufacture of the Equipment
and/or the Plant), or if the Buyer is late in providing technical documentation or
equipment/material for inclusion in the Plant, the Supplier shall be granted an extension of time
for the Delivery which will be equal to the additional period of time caused by such delay. The
Buyer shall pay all reasonable expenses related to these delays, including, but not limited to, the
storage of the Equipment and/or the Plant, subject to limitation of liability set forth in this
Contract.
	 
	5.6	 	The Supplier shall maintain possession of title and ownership of the Plant which shall
automatically pass to the Buyer only when payment in full of the total Contract Price has been
received by the Supplier. If the applicable law of the Contract does not allow the Supplier such a
retention of title or ownership of the Plant, the Supplier shall be entitled to such other similar
or corresponding rights as the applicable law allows it to retain. The Buyer shall take all
measures to ensure that the title of the Supplier is in no way prejudiced.
	 
	 	 	Notwithstanding the above, upon payment in full of the amounts in clauses 4.3(a) and 4.3(b)
by the Buyer to the Supplier, title to eight (8) generating sets of 20V32 type shall pass to the
Buyer.
	 
	 	 	Risk of loss or damage to the Equipment and the Plant shall pass in accordance with the
relevant Incoterm (2000).
	 
	5.7	 	The Buyer shall have no right to reject or refuse the Delivery or acceptance of the Plant by
reason of minor defects which do not prevent the normal operation of the Plant, provided that the
Supplier agrees to remedy such defects after the Delivery of the Plant in compliance with the
Contract.





CLAUSE 6 PRE-COMMISSIONING, INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING ASSISTANCE





	6.1	 	The Buyer will prepare the Facility in which the Plant will be installed by the Buyer,
including as necessary the construction of all roads and other required civil works and the
required mooring facilities, so that the Site and the Facility are timely ready before the
Commissioning of the Plant. Furthermore, the Buyer shall be responsible for the supply and setting
up of all utilities’ services, fuel storage facilities and the interconnection of the Plant to the
electricity grid.
	 
	6.2	 	Following the delivery of the Equipment to the Shipyard the installation of the Equipment and
the Pre-Commissioning of the Plant shall be carried out by the Supplier in accordance with the
Technical Specification and Scope of Supply and the Supplier’s standard guidelines and procedures.
	 
	6.3	 	Substantial Completion
	 
	6.3.1	 	On the date that the Supplier believes that it has achieved Substantial Completion and the
Plant is ready for Commissioning, the Supplier shall deliver to the Buyer a Substantial Completion
Certificate. Within five (5) days of receipt of the Substantial




Page 13









 






	 	 	Completion Certificate, the Buyer shall deliver its acceptance of the Substantial
Completion Certificate or a notice to the Supplier rejecting the Substantial Completion
Certificate. The Buyer shall not unreasonably withhold acceptance of the Substantial
Completion Certificate and shall specifically identify its reasons for rejection of the
Substantial Completion Certificate. If the Supplier accepts the reasons for such
rejection, it shall take corrective action and submit a new Substantial Completion
Certificate to the Buyer for action in accordance with the procedures set forth in this
clause. If the Supplier disagrees with the reasons for the rejection or if the Owner
fails to act upon the Substantial Completion Certificate within the time period provided
for herein (or such longer period as the Parties may mutually agree upon), the Supplier
may refer the dispute to Fast Track Arbitration in accordance with clause 21.3.
	 
	 	 	The Plant shall be considered ready for Commissioning as soon as the Owner has accepted and
counter signed the Substantial Completion Certificate. The Substantial Completion certificate
indicates that: 1) the Plant is in conformity with the Technical Specifications and Scope of
Supply (subject to minor defects which will be the subject of a punch list); 2) the Plant is
constructed according to the Supplier’s instructions and guidelines; and 3) the Plant can be
started safely.






	6.3.2	 	By declaring Substantial Completion, the Supplier declares that the Plant is ready for
Commissioning. Commissioning shall be carried out at the Site by the Buyer with the technical
assistance of the Performance Tests Advisor, such services to be the subject of a separate
contract.
	 
	6.4	 	Not Used.
	 
	6.5	 	The Supplier shall provide a monthly report containing the following headings:






	 	•	 	Progress reported against the project schedule
	 
	 	•	 	Safety and Security at Shipyard;
	 
	 	•	 	Progress during the month and total progress;
	 
	 	•	 	Purchasing / Subcontracts; 
	 
	 	•	 	Financial;
	 
	 	•	 	Customer Relations; 
	 
	 	•	 	Resource management;
	 
	 	•	 	Main Obstacles/Project Risks;
	 
	 	•	 	Site Meetings;
	 
	 	•	 	Letters to/from Client;
	 
	 	•	 	Quality Assurance/Technical Feedback from Supervisors and LGL representative;
	 
	 	•	 	Others; and
	 
	 	•	 	Photos.






	6.6	 	N/A
	 
	6.7	 	The Commissioning of the Plant cannot be started before the issuance of the Substantial
Completion Certificate. The Supplier reserves the right to stop the Commissioning procedure in
order to make necessary adjustments. Under no circumstances shall the Buyer be authorised to carry
out the Commissioning without the assistance of the Performance Tests Advisor.




Page 14









 






	6.8	 	The Supplier shall provide free of charge any power, water, lubricants, chemicals, fuel and
lubricating oil required for Pre-Commissioning of the Plant at the Shipyard.






	6.9	 	If Commissioning cannot be carried out due to reasons attributable to the Buyer within three
(3) months from the Delivery of the Plant as specified in clause 5.2(a), the Plant and the Services
shall be deemed to be accepted by the Buyer and the Performance Test Completion Certificate shall
be issued and the performance of the Plant shall in all respects be deemed to have been in
accordance with this Contract.





CLAUSE 7 PERFORMANCE TESTS





	7.1	 	Performance tests shall be performed and the performance of the Plant shall be measured and
calculated in accordance with the Exhibit C (Performance Test Guidelines) and the Supplier’s
standard procedures to determine whether the Plant meets the performance guarantees specified in
Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees) (the “Performance Tests”). The methods for
measurements, tolerances and calibration requirements used are described in Exhibit C (Performance
Test Guidelines). The timing for the Performance Tests is to be agreed between the Buyer and the
Supplier but shall be no earlier than 4 weeks after the issuance of the Substantial Completion
Certificate and no later than as is required under clause 7.2.2 below.
	 
	7.2.1	 	The Performance Tests shall be carried out at the Site in accordance with Exhibit C
(Performance Test Guidelines), the Supplier’s standard procedures and Exhibit A
(Technical Specifications and Scope of Supply). The Performance Tests shall be carried
out by the Buyer with assistance and technical advisory services provided by the
Performance Tests Advisor, promptly following: (a) the receipt and acknowledgement by the
Buyer of the Substantial Completion Certificate from the Supplier confirming the proper
installation and readiness of the Plant for the Commissioning. The fuel for the
Performance Tests as specified in Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees) or better
shall be provided by the Buyer. Prior to the testing, both Parties shall designate one
official witness to the Performance Tests who shall have definitive authority in reaching
agreement, before and during the Performance Tests, on the test procedure and the
results. Such witness shall also have the right to represent the Buyer for all purposes
in the event the Buyer is absent from the Performance Tests. Upon completion of the
Performance Tests, the Performance Test Completion Certificate shall be issued in
accordance with clause 8.
	 
	7.2.2	 	If the Buyer fails to commence carrying out the Performance Tests after having been notified
by the Supplier or the Performance Tests Advisor and thereby preventing the Performance Tests from
being completed or if the Performance Tests at the Site have not been carried out within three (3)
months after from the Delivery of the Plant as specified in clause 5.2(a) and such failure is due
to reasons not attributable to the Supplier or the Performance Tests Advisor then:






	 	(a)	 	the Performance Tests shall be deemed to have been properly carried out;
	 
	 	(b)	 	the Performance Test Completion Certificate shall be issued upon expiry of the
aforementioned three (3) months’ period and no claims whatsoever arising under that
certificate may be presented; and
	 
	 	(c)	 	the Services shall be considered rendered and accepted.






	7.3	 	If a Performance Test fails due to reasons attributable to the Supplier or the Performance
Tests Advisor, the Supplier shall be given a reasonable period of time to make necessary
adjustments and repairs to the Plant. After this adjustment period, a new Performance Test shall
be conducted. If during this second Performance Test any performance guarantee/figure set forth in
Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees) cannot be reached, the Parties shall jointly make an
investigation so as to find out the reason (to be concluded in no more than 21 days). If it is due
to




Page 15









 






	 	 	reasons for which the Supplier or the Performance Tests Advisor is responsible for, the
Supplier or the Performance Tests Advisor shall make necessary repairs, replacement
and/or modifications to the Plant as soon as possible. After making the modifications new
Performance Tests shall be carried out as soon as practically possible.
	 
	7.4	 	The Buyer shall not be entitled to use the Plant (or any part thereof) for commercial purposes
before the conclusion of the Performance Tests. If the Buyer does so without the consent of the
Supplier (which shall not be unreasonably withheld), then (i) the Buyer shall be regarded as
having thereby accepted the Plant; (ii) the Substantial Completion Certificate (unless already
issued) and the Performance Test Completion Certificate shall be issued; (iii) the Services shall
be considered rendered and accepted as a whole in accordance with this Contract.





CLAUSE 8 GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES





	8.1	 	The performance guarantees given by the Supplier for the Plant are set forth in this clause 8
and Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees). The performance of the Plant and its compliance
with the Performance Figures/Guarantees shall be determined in the Performance Tests.
	 
	8.1.1	 	If the Plant fails to achieve the Minimum Electrical Power Guarantee or the Maximum Heat
Rate Guarantee during the Performance Tests, the Supplier shall take appropriate corrective
measures and the relevant Performance Test shall be re-performed until the achievement of the
Minimum Performance Requirements.
	 
	8.1.2	 	If the Plant achieves the Minimum Electrical Power Guarantee and the Maximum Heat Rate
Guarantee but not the Electrical Power Guarantee and/or the Heat Rate Guarantee, the Supplier may
declare the Performance Tests to be completed and pay liquidated damages according to clause 8.2,
or may take appropriate corrective actions and have the relevant Performance Test re-performed
until the achievement of the Electrical Power Guarantee and the Heat Rate Guarantee.
	 
	8.1.3	 	The determination whether the Plant has achieved both the Minimum Electrical Power Guarantee
and the Maximum Heat Rate Guarantee must be based on the results of the same Performance Test. The
determination whether the Plant has achieved both the Electrical Power Guarantee and the Heat Rate
Guarantee must be based on the results of the same Performance Test.
	 
	8.1.4	 	Upon the completion of the last Performance Test, whether upon the achievement of the
Electrical Power Guarantee and the Heat Rate Guarantee or otherwise in accordance with the
provisions of clause 8.2, the Supplier shall issue to the Buyer a performance test completion
certificate in the form of Exhibit I (the “Performance Test Completion Certificate”) setting forth
the Electrical Power and Heat Rate achieved. Within five (5) days from the receipt thereof, the
Buyer shall deliver its acceptance of the Performance Test Completion Certificate or a notice of
rejection to the Supplier setting forth the specific reasons for such rejection. If the Supplier
accepts such rejections (acting in a reasonable manner), it shall take corrective action and
submit a new Performance Test Completion Certificate. The Buyer shall not be obligated to accept
the Performance Test Completion Certificate unless the Minimum Performance Requirements as stated
in Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees) have been achieved. Under no circumstances shall the
issuance of this Performance Test Completion Certificate
be delayed due to minor deficiencies that do not affect the use of the Plant.
	 
	8.2	 	Liquidated Damages




Page 16









 






	8.2.1	 	Electrical Power Guarantee
	 
	 	 	If after the repairs and adjustments as deemed necessary by the Supplier have been completed,
the Electrical Power Guarantee specified in Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees) as measured
in accordance with Exhibit C (Performance Test Guidelines) is not achieved during the final
performance test run due to reasons attributable to the Supplier or the Performance Tests Advisor,
the Supplier shall be liable for liquidated damages calculated at the
rate of of the Contract
Price for every  in average short of
the Electrical Power Guarantee.
	 
	8.2.2	 	Heat Rate Guarantee
	 
	 	 	If after the repairs and adjustments as deemed necessary by the Supplier have been completed,
the Heat Rate Guarantee for the generator sets, excluding emission control systems, specified in
Exhibit B (Performance Figures/Guarantees) as measured in accordance with Exhibit C (Performance
Test Guidelines) is not achieved during the final performance test run due to reasons attributable
to the Supplier or the Performance Tests Advisor, taking into consideration the average of all the
generator sets supplied hereunder, the Supplier shall be liable for liquidated damages calculated
at the rate of of the Contract Price for every  of excess average heat rate.
	 
	8.2.3	 	Lubricating Oil Consumption Guarantee
	 
	 	 	If after the repairs and adjustments as deemed necessary by the Supplier have been completed,
the Lubricating Oil Consumption Guarantee specified in Exhibit B
(Performance Figures/Guarantees) as measured in accordance with Exhibit C (Performance
Test Guidelines) cannot be met due to reasons attributable to the Supplier or the
Performance Tests Advisor, taking into consideration the average of all engines supplied
hereunder, the Supplier shall be liable for liquidated damages at the
rate of of the Contract Price per of excess average consumption.
	 
	8.3	 	Maximum Performance Liquidated Damages
	 
	 	 	Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this clause 8, the liquidated damages payable by
the Supplier for the Plant’s failure to meet any Performance
Figure/Guarantee set forth in Exhibit B shall in no case exceed  of the Contract Price and the aggregate of any and
all liquidated damages payable by the Supplier for the Plant’s failure to meet the Performance
Figures/Guarantees shall in no case exceed  of the Contract Price.





CLAUSE 9 TOTAL AMOUNT OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES





	9.1	 	The total aggregate amount of liquidated damages payable by the Supplier under this Contract
whether for performance or for delay shall in no case exceed of the Contract
Price. The liquidated damages shall be the Buyer’s only remedy for delay in delivery and for any
deviations in the Plant and the Performance Figures/Guarantees and shall constitute the Supplier’s
only liability in these respects.





CLAUSE 10 BUYER’S OBLIGATIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES





	10.1	 	The Buyer shall be responsible for obtaining all permits, approvals, authorizations,
consents and licenses from all relevant authorities for the Plant, the engineering, delivery,
Commissioning and operation of the Plant, and any Services to be provided under this Contract,
except in the country of manufacturing of the Equipment and the Plant.




Page 17









 






	10.2	 	The Buyer shall be responsible: (i) for providing the Supplier promptly within the time
required by the Supplier all necessary information and data on the Site the correctness, accuracy
and sufficiency of which are hereby warranted by the Buyer; and (ii) for providing timely access
to the Facility and Site to the Supplier’s personnel for the performance of the Services.
	 
	10.3	 	Nothing in this Contract shall operate so as to lessen the Buyer’s responsibility toward the
Supplier even in the event the Buyer has contracted a part of the work in respect of the Plant,
Site and/or Facility to a third party. Any delays, inactions or actions of such third party
contractor of the Buyer which have an impact on the performance of the Supplier shall be
considered delays, inactions or actions on the part of the Buyer for purposes of this Contract.
	 
	10.4	 	Nothing in this Contract shall operate so as to lessen the Supplier’s responsibility toward
the Buyer even in the event the Supplier has contracted a part of the work in respect of the
Plant to a third party. Any delays, inactions or actions of such third party contractor of the
Supplier which have an impact on the performance of the Buyer shall be considered delays,
inactions or actions on the part of the Supplier for purposes of this Contract.





CLAUSE 11 SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION





	11.1	 	It is expressly agreed that, upon giving 5 days written notice to the Buyer, the Supplier
shall have the right to change the delivery schedule and/or suspend its performance if: (i) it has
not received the advance payment; or (ii) the Buyer has not opened the Payment Guarantee as set
forth in this Contract. The Buyer shall compensate the Supplier for all reasonable direct costs as
a result of or in connection with any of the foregoing events.
	 
	 	 	In case the advance payment or the receipt of the Payment Guarantee is delayed the Supplier
shall be granted an extension of time for the Delivery which will be no more than the additional
period of time caused by such delay (taking into consideration the effects the delay for not being
able to commit to the supplies from the Subcontractors), however for any other delayed payments
the Delivery date may only be extended with the number of days equal to the days of delay of any
contractual payment.
	 
	 	 	Without prejudice to any other right or remedy available, either Party shall reserve the
right to suspend its performance of this Contract on the occasion of, and for a period
equal to, any default by the other Party in payment of any sum due and payable to the
other hereunder, provided it has given no less than 10 days notice of its intention to do
so to the other party.
	 
	 	 	If the Buyer is in breach of any of its payment obligations or of its obligation to open
the Payment Guarantee and this breach continues longer than three months, the Supplier
shall be entitled by notice in writing to the Buyer and without requiring the consent of
any court to terminate this Contract with immediate effect.






	11.2	 	Remedying breaches






(a) If a Party is in breach of any of a material obligation under this Contract and such
failure is not cured by the defaulting Party within thirty (30) days from the receipt of a written
notice from the non-defaulting Party demanding such cure, the non-defaulting Party shall be
entitled to terminate this Contract by giving a further fourteen (14) days written notice to the
defaulting Party.




(b) If a Party is in breach of an obligation and if such failure is not cured by the
defaulting Party within thirty (30) days from the receipt of a written notice from the
non-defaulting Party demanding such cure, the non-defaulting Party may elect to refer the matter
to dispute resolution in accordance with clause 21.



Page 18









 






	11.3	 	If a Party is in material breach of a clause of the Contract, the other Party may, by giving
ten (10) days notice in writing to the defaulting Party, suspend performance of any of its
obligations under this Contract or any part thereof. The suspension right does not prevent a Party
from using its right to exercise all remedies available to it under the Contract or at law.
	 
	11.4	 	Upon termination of this Contract due to the Buyer’s breach of its contractual obligations
the Supplier is entitled to: (i) be remunerated by the Buyer for all the work already performed
under this contract; and (ii) to all other remedies available under the Contract and applicable
law, all subject to limitations of liability set forth in this Contract.
	 
	11.5	 	Upon termination of this Contract due to the Supplier’s breach of its contractual obligations
the Buyer is entitled to such remedies available under the Contract and applicable law, all
subject to limitations of liability set forth in this Contract.
	 
	11.6	 	If the Buyer, taking into full consideration the extension of time for Delivery by reason of
permissible delays, has become entitled to the maximum amount of liquidated damages provided in
clause 5.3, and the Supplier has been in delay for at least three (3) months, then in such event,
the Buyer may at its discretion as an alternative and to the exclusion of any other remedy either:
(i) accept the Delivery and shall receive or retain, whichever is applicable, the above mentioned
liquidated damages; or (ii) cancel this Contract and be entitled, as a sole and exclusive remedy,
to a refund of all payments made by the Buyer to the Supplier under this Contract and interest
thereon calculated at the rate stipulated in clause 4.5 above from the date of actual receipt of
payment to the date of actual repayment.
	 
	11.7	 	In the event either Party is declared bankrupt, insolvent, requests (temporary) moratorium,
or proceeds with the liquidation of its business, the other Party has the right to immediately
cancel this Contract in whole or in part reserving any rights with respect to compensation for
costs, damages and interest.
	 
	11.8	 	The Buyer has the right to cancel the Contract at its sole discretion, with the consequence
that the Supplier’s obligation to perform its obligations shall immediately cease.
	 
	 	 	Following such cancellation, the Buyer shall pay the Supplier in accordance with the
cancellation payment schedule set out in clause 11.8.1.
	 
	 	 	The cancellation charges are the sole and exclusive remedy for Buyer’s cancellation for
convenience.
	 
	 	 	All the payments already paid by the buyer to the Supplier under this Contract prior to
cancellation for convenience shall be deducted from the applicable cancellation charges.
	 
	 	 	Payment of the cancellation charges shall be made by the Buyer to the Supplier within thirty
(30) days after receipt of the Supplier’s invoice therefore. Upon such payment, title to, and risk
of loss of or damage to, any Equipment and/or portion of the Plant delivered or capable of being
transferred or ready for delivery by the Supplier or Subcontractor shall transfer to the Buyer.




Page 19









 






	11.8.1	 	Cancellation payment schedule:





	 	 	 
	Number of days elapsed from the	 	 
	signing date of Contract	 	Payment in EUR
	0 – 30 days

	 	
	31 – 90 days

	 	
	91 – 150 days

	 	
	151 – 200 days

	 	
	201 – 300 days

	 	
	301 – 400 days

	 	
	401 or more days

	 	






CLAUSE 12 CONFIDENTIALITY AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY





	12.1	 	Neither Party shall copy or disclose to a third party any document or data provided by the
other Party (“Confidential Information”) without the prior written consent of the other Party or
use Confidential Information for purposes other than those for which they were provided. The
obligations under this clause 12.1 shall not apply to the extent that the receiving Party can
prove, that:






	 	a)	 	information which, at the time of disclosure, was in public domain, without violation of
confidence by the Receiving Party; or
	 
	 	b)	 	information which, after such disclosure by the disclosing Party, becomes part of public
domain by publication or otherwise, without violation of confidence by the receiving Party; or
	 
	 	c)	 	information which the receiving Party can demonstrate by clear and convincing evidence, was
in its possession at the time of such disclosure by the disclosing Party; or
	 
	 	d)	 	information which is lawfully obtained by the receiving Party from a third party without an
obligation of confidentiality, provided that third party is not, to the receiving Party’s best
knowledge, in breach of any obligation of confidentiality to the disclosing Party relating to that
information; or
	 
	 	e)	 	information which is developed by the receiving Party independent without resort to the
disclosed confidential Information.
	 
	 	f)	 	the information is required to be disclosed by law or the rules of a stock exchange on
which the Party’s securities are listed






	12.2	 	All intellectual property rights (“IP Rights”) associated with
the Plant and the Services or any document or data provided by the Supplier in
connection therewith shall remain the Supplier’s property. The Supplier hereby grants to the Buyer
a royalty-free, non-exclusive, non-transferable and irrevocable right to use the IP Rights and the
Plant for the intended purpose.
	 
	12.3	 	The Buyer shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Supplier against all third party
claims, losses and damages, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from
any reuse, modification, reproduction or publication of the Supplier’s intellectual property
documents or data caused by the Buyer, provided that: i) the Supplier promptly notifies the Buyer
in writing of any such claims; and ii) the Supplier provides full disclosure and necessary
assistance in respect of such claims made against the Supplier.






	12.4	 	The Supplier shall defend the Buyer against claims made against the Buyer by any third party
unrelated to the Buyer for infringement or alleged infringement of a patent or similar registered
intellectual property right in respect of the manufacture or sale of the Plant and the Services,
provided that: i) the Buyer promptly notifies the Supplier in




Page 20









 






	 	 	writing of any such claims; ii) the Buyer provides full disclosure and necessary
assistance in respect of such claims made against the Buyer; and iii) the Buyer does not
take any position adverse to the Supplier with respect to such claims and gives the
Supplier sole authority, at the expense of the Supplier, to settle and defend such
claims. The Supplier’s sole obligation will be at its discretion, to either procure the
right for the Buyer to continue use of the Plant and the Services, or to modify or
replace the Plant and the Services in whole or in part avoiding any such infringements.
	 
	12.5	 	Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in clause 12.4, the Supplier shall not
have any liability to the Buyer to the extent that any infringement or claim thereof is based
upon: (i) use of the Plant and the Services in combination with equipment or software not supplied
by the Supplier where the Plant and the Services would not itself be infringing; (ii) compliance
with the Buyer’s designs or specifications; (iii) use of the Plant and the Services in an
application or environment for which it was not designed; or (iv) modifications of the Plant and
the Services by anyone other than the Supplier without the Supplier’s prior written approval.





CLAUSE 13 INSPECTION AND TESTS AND SUPPLIER REPORTING





	13.1	 	The Buyer, its representative or an internationally recognised inspection service may inspect
materials and/or components used and witness the tests following the assembly of the Equipment
and/or the Plant. The factory testing shall take place in the respective manufacturer’s factory in
accordance with the relevant manufacturer’s standard testing procedures (“Factory Testing”). The
date and time of the inspection and tests shall be communicated to the Buyer in advance. Inspection
and testing shall be performed at the factory of the Supplier or Subcontractor during normal
working hours. The Supplier shall bear the expenses of inspection and tests carried out at its
factory, excluding the expenses (including travel and lodging) of the Buyer’s authorized
representatives. If the Buyer is not represented at the tests, the test report shall be
communicated to and deemed to be accepted as accurate by the Buyer.
	 
	13.2	 	If the results of the Supplier’s or Subcontractor’s standard acceptance test procedures
(including Factory Testing) confirm that any materials or components are found to be defective or
not in accordance with Exhibit A (Technical Specifications and Scope of Supply), the Supplier shall
correct the defect as soon as possible at its cost.
	 
	13.3	 	Not used
	 
	13.4	 	The Buyer shall cooperate without delay in any inspection or test agreed upon. If the Buyer
prevents the test from being performed or fails to contribute to it according to the Contract, the
results of such inspection or test will be deemed to have been done in accordance with the Contract
and deemed approved by the Buyer in all respects, subject only to the Supplier’s warranty as
provided here below. Where the results of such inspection or test are not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract, the Supplier shall take all appropriate steps to remedy such failure
and make arrangements to re-test accordingly at its cost.
	 
	13.5	 	At the Buyer’s request, the Supplier will investigate whether parts of the Equipment and/or
the Plant or systems are defective or non-conforming. The Buyer shall pay such investigative costs
unless the parts of the Equipment and/or the Plant or systems are deemed by the Supplier to be
defective or non-confirming.
	 
	13.6	 	The Buyer and the Supplier must attend regular meetings (at a minimum, bi-weekly) to discuss
progress under this Contract. Such meetings shall initially be by bi-weekly teleconference at a
mutually acceptable time. When the Supplier is in the Shipyard phase of manufacture, meetings are
to be held at the Shipyard.






Page 21












 





CLAUSE 14 DELIVERY OF PRELIMINARY DESIGN DRAWINGS





	14.1	 	At the appropriate time during the design and manufacture of the Plant, the Supplier shall
deliver the Buyer preliminary design drawings, as specified in Exhibit A (Technical
Specifications and Scope of Supply) whereof the following shall be subject to the Buyer’s
review and approval:






	 	a)	 	Plant layout and general arrangement drawings (section and plan views);
	 
	 	b)	 	Barge hull layout drawings (section and plan views);
	 
	 	c)	 	Electrical single-line drawing; and
	 
	 	d)	 	Process Main flow diagrams (P&ID).






	14.2.	 	The Buyer shall provide its approval or comments thereon to the Supplier within seven (7)
days of receipt of the drawings.
	 
	14.3	 	The Supplier shall promptly revise the drawings with the approved amendments and shall
promptly deliver to the Buyer the revised drawings. The Buyer shall provide its approval or
comments thereon to the Supplier within seven (7) days of receipt of the revised drawings.
	 
	14.4	 	Any such approval or comments (under the preceding paragraphs) shall not relieve the
Supplier from any obligation or responsibility.
	 
	14.5	 	The Supplier shall provide operation and maintenance manuals as specified in Exhibit A
(Technical Specifications and Scope of Supply) to the Buyer within thirty (30) days after
Substantial Completion.
	 
	14.6	 	The Supplier will update the preliminary quality assurance plan furnished under Exhibit G
with preliminary timetables for the inspection and testing plan and preliminary drawing list
and schedule within ten (10) weeks of the start of the Contract.





CLAUSE 15 WARRANTY





	15.1	 	The Supplier shall repair or replace, at its sole discretion, any defect in the Plant which
appears during the warranty period (defined in clause 15.3 below) as a result of defective
material or manufacturing provided, always when required by the Supplier, that any defective
parts of the Plant shall be returned to the Supplier, at the Supplier’s cost, to the place
instructed by the Supplier. The Supplier shall repair or re-perform, in whole or in part, at
its sole discretion, any defective Services which appear during the warranty period. The
Buyer shall immediately take appropriate steps to prevent any defect from becoming more
serious and to enable the Supplier to rectify the aforesaid defect.
	 
	 	 	In order to receive this remedy, any warranty claims or requests with respect to this
warranty must be made in writing without delay and not later than fourteen (14) days
following i) discovery of such defect during the warranty period, or ii) the day when such
defect should have been discovered by the Buyer (exercising reasonable operations and
maintenance practices) during the warranty period. The Buyer shall have the responsibility
to establish that its claim is covered by this warranty.
	 
	 	 	The Supplier agrees that it will wherever possible seek to minimise disruption to the
ongoing operation of the Plant and the Buyer’s operations at the Site whenever the
Supplier is carrying out its obligations under this warranty.




Page 22









 












	15.2	 	Replaced parts of the Plant shall become the Supplier’s property. The Supplier shall bear
only the costs of repairing or replacing the defective parts of the Plant at the Supplier’s
Workshop (in accordance with clause 15.5 below), as well as the costs occasioned by the
transport of the defective and of the repaired or replacement parts of the Plant between the
Supplier’s Workshop and the place of Delivery (in accordance with clause 5.2(b)) as originally
agreed in the delivery terms of the Contract. The Supplier shall not be responsible for
removal or replacement of systems, structures of or other products at the facility of the
Buyer or its customer in order to access the defective part of the Plant.
	 
	15.3	 	The warranty period with respect to the Plant begins at the Delivery (in accordance with
clause 5.2(a)) and ends twelve (12) months from the date of the Performance Test Completion
Certificate or fifteen (15) months from the date of the Delivery (in accordance with clause
5.2(a)), whichever first occurs. The warranty period for the Services shall be six (6) months
from the performance of the Service.
	 
	15.4	 	The warranty period in respect of the Plant and the Services which have been repaired,
replaced or re-performed under the warranty shall be six (6) months from the date of repair,
replacement or re-performance, or until the expiration date of the original (contracted)
warranty period of the Plant and the Services, whichever occurs later, under the same terms,
conditions and limitations of liability, as those applicable to the Plant and the Services.
However, in case were a part is replaced due to faulty design the warranty shall be twelve
(12) months for the replaced part from the date of replacement. Under no circumstances shall
the warranty period of any part of the Plant exceed twenty-four (24) months, and with respect
to the Services twelve (12) months, from the date of commencement of the original warranty
period as stipulated in sub clause
15.3.
	 
	15.5	 	Services to be performed under the warranty shall be based on a normal working week and shall
be for the account of the Supplier. A normal working week at the Supplier’s Workshop comprises
of forty (40) hours spread over five (5) working days and not exceeding eight (8) hours per
day. A normal working week at the Site comprises of fifty (50) hours spread over five (5)
working days and not exceeding ten (10) hours per day. Services agreed to be performed outside
the normal working week limits shall be charged to the Buyer as overtime. Any waiting time,
for which the Supplier is not responsible, shall be charged to the Buyer as normal working
time.
	 
	15.6	 	This warranty does not cover any defects due to or connected with: 1) materials, components,
tools, software or design provided by the Buyer or on behalf of the Buyer; 2) negligence or
wilful misconduct or other improper acts or omissions of the Buyer, its employees or agents or
other third parties; 3) other than original Spare Parts, accessories or attachments supplied
by the Supplier; 4) improper installation, service work or alterations carried out by the
Buyer ; 5) normal wear and tear; 6) use of unsuitable material consumables; 7) extreme ambient
conditions not communicated by the Buyer to the Supplier before the signature of the Contract,
8) fluctuations in the grid; 9) any use, maintenance, service or operation of the Plant or any
part thereof which is not in conformity with the Supplier’s or any Subcontractor’s manuals,
instructions or specifications or which is otherwise not in accordance with normal industry
practice. The Supplier’s warranty obligation (elsewhere than at the Supplier’s Workshop) does
not include any cranage, electricity, scaffolding, docking, diving, sub-sea work, towage
costs, demounting or mounting costs in order to access the defective parts of the Plant and
all such reasonable costs and expenses shall be reimbursed by the Buyer to the Supplier when
applicable. If after the Supplier’s warranty investigation it is found that the Buyer does
not have a warranty claim within the scope of this Contract, then the Buyer shall be
responsible for all applicable costs and expenses for such inspection, repaired or replaced
parts of the Plant and Services or any other service work performed or re-performed by the
Supplier.




Page 23









 












	15.7	 	The Buyer shall provide the Supplier or Supplier’s representative access during the warranty
period to take samples of fuels, lube oils, cooling liquids and other chemicals and
materials, as need may be, used for the operation of the Plant. The Supplier reserves the
right to perform simulations and tests to the Buyer’s equipment and attached systems in order
to identify the cause of the failure in the operation of the Plant. The Supplier’s rights
under this clause are subject to complying with the Buyer’s Site specific health, safety and
security requirements and must be undertaken without undue disruption to the Buyer’s mining
operations.






	15.8	 	OTHER THAN THE CORPORATE WARRANTIES IN CLAUSE 24, THIS CLAUSE 15 SETS FORTH THE ONLY
WARRANTIES APPLICABLE TO THE PLANT AND THE SERVICES AND IS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES,
GUARANTEES, OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES,
OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES AGAINST NONCONFORMITY OR DEFECTS (HIDDEN OR OTHERWISE). THE BUYER
HEREBY WAIVES ALL OTHER REMEDIES, WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES AND LIABILITIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
ARISING BY LAW OR OTHERWISE (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FITNESS FOR PURPOSE,
MERCHANTABILITY OR SATISFACTORY QUALITY).





CLAUSE 16 LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY, GENERAL INDEMNITY





	16.1	 	OTHER THAN LIQUIDATED DAMAGES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS CONTRACT, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
SUPPLIER BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, CONTINGENT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED OR ARISING (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION) FOR ANY LOSS OF ACTUAL OR
ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR REVENUE OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS, PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, OR
REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL OR REINSTALLATION SERVICE WORK NOT ARISING FROM THE WARRANTY PROVIDED
HEREIN, TOWAGE CHARGES (AFTER DELIVERY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CLAUSE 5.2(b)), COSTS OF DOCKING
(AFTER DELIVERY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CLAUSE 5.2(b)), DIVING OR SUB-SEA WORK, DAMAGE TO ANY
VESSEL, ENGINE ROOM OR POWER PLANT SITE, COSTS FOR ANY ADDITIONAL TESTS (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, SEA TRIALS), DEBRIS REMOVAL, OR FOR LOSS OF TIME OR USE OF ANY EQUIPMENT, THE
PLANT AND SERVICES DELIVERED HEREUNDER. THIS LIMITATION ON THE SUPPLIER’S LIABILITY SHALL
APPLY TO ANY LIABILITY FOR BREACH OF THE SUPPLIER’S OBLIGATIONS UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE CONTRACT, WHETHER BASED ON WARRANTY, FAILURE OF OR DELAY IN DELIVERY OR OTHERWISE.
	 
	 	 	IN NO EVENT SHALL THE BUYER BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, CONTINGENT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED OR ARISING (INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION) FOR ANY LOSS OF ACTUAL OR ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR REVENUE OR ANTICIPATED
SAVINGS, PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES.
	 
	 	 	The limitations of liability set out in this clause 16, however, do not apply to
wilful misconduct, unlawful intent or gross negligence on the part of the Parties. The
limitations of liability do not apply to the extent that it is contrary to any applicable
mandatory law.
	 
	16.2	 	Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract, the Supplier’s total aggregate
liability on all claims of any kind whether in contract, warranty, indemnity, tort (including
negligence), strict liability, or otherwise, arising out of the performance or breach of the
Contract shall not exceed




Page 24









 












	16.3	 	Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract, the Buyer’s total aggregate liability
(excluding the Buyer’s liability to pay the Contract Price) for all claims of any kind
whether in contract, warranty, indemnity, tort (including negligence), strict liability, or
otherwise, arising out of the performance or breach of the Contract shall not exceed 
	 
	16.4	 	Not used.
	 
	16.5	 	Each Party shall indemnify and hold the other Party harmless from any claims by a third
party for loss of or damage to property or death or personal injury arising out of or
connected with that Party’s negligence while engaged in its activities under the Contract. In
the event such damage or injury is caused by the joint or concurrent negligence of the
Supplier and the Buyer, the loss shall be borne by each Party in proportion to its
negligence.
	 
	16.6	 	The Party who claims a breach of contract shall be required to take all reasonable measures
to mitigate the loss which has occurred.
	 
	16.7	 	The Supplier shall not be liable for any work carried out by the Buyer or for any equipment
or material supplied by the Buyer for the installation or incorporation into the Plant.





CLAUSE 17 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES AND SAFETY





	17.1	 	With respect to the environmental requirements and regulations (e.g. noise and emissions)
the Plant shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth in the Technical
Specifications and Scope of Supply. All additional safety and environmental devices required
for the operation of the Plant must be compatible with the Plant and shall be provided by and
at the exclusive responsibility of the Buyer.
	 
	17.2	 	The Supplier shall be fully responsible for affixing warning labels or plates on the
Equipment in accordance with the applicable EU directives. The Buyer shall be fully
responsible for affixing any additionally required warning labels or plates containing
warnings or safety and operation procedures and instructions as required by law or safe
working practice to the Plant. The Buyer shall also be responsible for ensuring that any
persons using the Plant are aware of all the necessary safety instructions and that these are
followed at all times.





CLAUSE 18 IMPORT AND EXPORT RESTRICTIONS





	18.1	 	The Parties agree the Plant and the Services shall be delivered subject to all applicable
export controls or restrictions imposed on technology and products by any country or
organization which are enforceable in the jurisdiction of the Supplier, its affiliates or
parent company, including the Supplier’s country, the United Nations, the European Union and
the United States of America. The Buyer acknowledges that the Plant and the Services and all
related technical information, documents and materials may not be imported or exported,
re-exported, trans-shipped, diverted or transferred, directly or indirectly, contrary to such
controls or restrictions.
	 
	18.2	 	The Buyer confirms that the Plant and the Services will be used solely for the intended
peaceful purposes. The Buyer further confirms that the Plant and the Services will not be
used in connection with any chemical, biological, nuclear weapons or missiles or any other
vehicles or vessels capable of delivering such weapons, or in support of any terrorist
activity or any other military end use. Nor will the Plant and the Services or any part
thereof be re-sold if it is known or suspected by the Buyer that they are intended to be used
for such purposes. Upon request by the Supplier, the Buyer shall furnish the Supplier with
all relevant certificates relating to export control laws, regulations and restrictions, such
as, but not limited to, end-user certificates, in form and substance specified by the
Supplier.




Page 25









 











CLAUSE 19 FORCE MAJEURE





	19.1	 	Neither Party shall be liable for any failure or delay in performing its obligations
hereunder (other than an obligation to pay money), or for any loss or damage resulting there
from, caused by or arising from an event of force majeure (“Force Majeure”) which includes
without limitation: acts of God, wars, riots, embargos, hostilities, public disorder,
strikes, lockouts or other industrial disputes, epidemics, fires, accidents, governmental
restrictions and actions, acts of civil or military authorities, winding up or loss of
workmen, unusually severe weather conditions or any other circumstances beyond the control of
a party or its subcontractor but only to the extent that the Force Majeure event causes that
failure or delay.
	 
	19.2	 	Once a Party is aware that its performance under this Contract is likely to be affected by
an event of Force Majeure, the affected Party shall, without any delay and in any event
within 10 days, give written notice to the other Party setting out all relevant details
relating to the delay.
	 
	19.3	 	The affected Party shall consider with the other Party action to be taken to overcome the
circumstances of force majeure and shall use its reasonable endeavours to overcome such
circumstances, provided that, if the performance of the Contract is prevented for more than
six (6) months because due to such circumstances, either Party may terminate the Contract by
giving fourteen (14) days prior written notice to the other Party.
	 
	19.4	 	Any termination as a result of Force Majeure shall not affect obligations and respective
consideration due which have already been performed or provided at the time when the
termination notice is given, nor does it affect the Supplier’s right to receive payment of
any amounts due under the Contract in respect of obligations and work already performed. The
title to any part of the Equipment and/or the Plant (at their current stage upon termination)
paid by the Buyer shall be transferred to the Buyer.





CLAUSE 20 APPLICABLE LAW





	20.1	 	The Contract shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws in force in
Singapore, excluding the conflict of law rules applicable in such jurisdiction.





CLAUSE 21 ARBITRATION





	21.1	 	Negotiation of Disputes and Disagreements
	 
	21.1.1	 	In the event of any dispute or disagreement arising out of or relating to the
implementation or performance of this Contract (other than a dispute which is referable
either to Fast Track Arbitration for resolution pursuant to clause 21.3 or directly to
arbitration under the terms of this Contract), which the Parties hereto have been unable to
settle or agree upon within a period of thirty (30) days after the dispute or disagreement
arises, each Party shall nominate a senior officer of its management to meet at a mutually
agreed time and place not later than forty-five (45) days after the dispute or disagreement
has arisen to attempt to resolve such dispute or disagreement.
	 
	21.1.2	 	Should a resolution of such dispute or disagreement not be obtained within fifteen (15)
days after nomination of senior officers for such purpose, either Party may then by notice to
the other submit the dispute to arbitration in accordance with the provisions of clause 21.2.
	 
	21.2	 	Arbitration Resolution
	 
	21.2.1	 	After following the procedure in clause 21.1, any claim, dispute or controversy arising




Page 26









 





	 	 	out of or relating to this Contract (other than a dispute to which the Fast Track
Arbitration provisions of clause 21.3 apply) shall be submitted to binding arbitration
under the Rules of Conciliation and Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce.
The Parties shall cooperate in good faith in providing to the Arbitrator any information
reasonably needed to resolve the dispute. No discovery proceedings shall be allowed.
	 
	21.2.2	 	The arbitration shall be held in Singapore and shall be conducted in the English language.
If the amount of any asserted claim or counterclaim does not exceed the arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator in
accordance with the expedited procedures and rules of the Rules of Conciliation and
Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce. In all other cases unless otherwise
agreed, there shall be three arbitrators, with each Party selecting one; the third
arbitrator, who shall be the chairman of the panel, shall be selected by the two
Party-appointed arbitrators. The claimant shall name its arbitrator in the demand for
arbitration and the responding party shall name its arbitrator within ten (10) days after
receipt of the demand for arbitration. The third arbitrator shall be named within ten (10)
days after the appointment of the second arbitrator.
	 
	21.2.3	 	The award rendered by the arbitration shall be final and binding upon the Parties without
the right of appeal to the courts and judgement thereon may be entered and enforced by any
court having jurisdiction thereof.
	 
	21.3	 	Fast Track Arbitration
	 
	21.3.1	 	The Buyer and the Supplier shall decide upon an independent third party mutually acceptable
to both Parties (the “Fast Track Arbitrator”) and an alternate third party (the “Alternate”)
to decide disputes referable by the Parties for Fast Track Arbitration in accordance with
this Contract.
	 
	21.3.2	 	If the Buyer and the Supplier do not agree on a Fast Track Arbitrator, then the Dispute
Board Centre of the International Chamber of Commerce shall be requested to select the Fast
Track Arbitrator and the Alternate. The Fast Track Arbitrator and the Alternate each must
have experience in diesel engine powered generation facilities.


	 
	21.3.3	 	Either Party may refer
any dispute arising out of the application of the provisions of clauses 6, 7 and 8 to the Fast
Track Arbitrator as provided in said clause by written notice to the Fast Track Arbitrator and
the other Party.
	 
	21.3.4	 	If a Party has given written notice of its intent to refer such a dispute, the other Party
shall be bound to Fast Track Arbitration as provided in this clause and may not resort to the
procedures of clause 21.2.
	 
	21.3.5	 	In the event that the Fast Track Arbitrator is unavailable to resolve the dispute within
the time period stated in this clause, the dispute shall be referred to the Alternate. The
Fast Track Arbitrator or the Alternate, as the case may be (the “Arbitrator”), shall be
directed to resolve the dispute within fifteen (15) days of referral. The Parties shall
cooperate in good faith in providing to the Arbitrator any information reasonably needed to
resolve the dispute.
	 
	21.3.6	 	The decision of the Arbitrator shall be final, binding and non-appealable on both Parties
unless either of the Parties has, within thirty (30) days from the receipt of the said
decision, submitted the dispute into the arbitration procedure set forth in clause 21.2.





CLAUSE 22 FINAL PROVISIONS





	22.1	 	Subject to any separate commissioning services contracts between the Parties or its
Affiliate this Contract represents the entire agreement between the Parties hereto relating
to the subject matter hereof and may be amended or varied only in writing by




Page 27









 






	 	 	duly authorised representatives of the Parties. The Parties expressly waive all
provisions contained in any past agreement or correspondence which negate, limit, extend
or conflict with the provisions herein.
	 
	22.2	 	The Supplier reserves the right to subcontract its obligations under this Contract (or any
part thereof). Any delays, inactions or actions of the Supplier’s sub-contractors which have
an impact on the performance of this Contract shall be considered delays, inactions or
actions on the part of the Supplier for purposes of this Contract. The Supplier shall not be
liable for the performance of subcontractor(s) selected by the Buyer against the
recommendation of the Supplier and any delays, inactions or actions of such third party
contractor of the Supplier which have an impact on the performance of the Buyer shall be
considered delays, inactions or actions on the part of the Supplier for purposes of this
Contract.
	 
	22.3	 	Not used
	 
	22.4	 	Not used
	 
	22.5	 	Not used
	 
	22.6	 	The Contract or any rights and obligations under the Contract may be assigned to an
Affiliate of a Party, provided that the assigning Party remains liable for the performance of
the assigned obligations by the assignee under the Contract. In any other case the Contract
or any rights and obligations under the Contract may not be transferred, delegated or
assigned by a Party without the prior written consent of the other Party (such approval not
to be unreasonably withheld). In the event the Contract or any rights and obligations under
the Contract are so transferred, delegated or assigned, the Contract shall be binding upon
and shall inure to the benefit of the assignee.
	 
	22.7	 	Each Party shall obtain a comprehensive insurance coverage for its own personnel, its own
property and its own scope of activities, including in the case of the Supplier, such
insurances as set out in Exhibit A. Such policies are to note the interests of the Buyer in
the Equipment (or part thereof) and the Plant.
	 
	22.8	 	The provisions of the Contract are severable and if any provision is held to be invalid or
unenforceable by any court of competent jurisdiction then such invalidity or unenforceability
shall not affect the remaining provisions of the Contract.
	 
	22.9	 	This Contract shall become binding in its entirety on the date first written above when the
duly authorised representatives of the Parties have signed the Contract.
	 
	22.10	 	In carrying out their obligations under this Contract and in providing instructions,
procedures and requirements under this Contract and in considering any change order proposal
and agreeing any change order, the Parties will act in accordance with the principles of good
faith and fair dealing.
	 
	22.11	 	The provisions of this Contract shall be interpreted in good faith.
	 
	22.12	 	This Contract may be executed in counterparts by the parties.





CLAUSE 23 CHANGE ORDERS





	23.1	 	Buyer Requested Change Orders.
	 
	 	 	If the Buyer desires to make any change to the Plant and/or Services including,
without limitation, upgrading materials or equipment or reducing the scope of works
required to be performed by the Supplier, the Buyer shall advise the Supplier, and the
Buyer and the Supplier shall, within 5 days, consult concerning the estimated cost and
impact on the Delivery schedule and the Contract Price. Thereafter, the Buyer may request,
and the Supplier shall, upon receipt of such request and within 14 days




Page 28









 






	 	 	(unless otherwise agreed), prepare a detailed estimate of the cost of such change taking
into account the effect of such change on the Plant and/or Services and other agreed upon
and contemplated Change Orders. The Buyer shall review the Supplier’s estimate, and if
the Buyer accepts or the Parties otherwise agree upon the Change Order (to be evidenced
by a Change Order notice signed by both Parties), the Parties shall promptly adjust the
scheduled dates of Delivery, Contract Price and any of the Exhibits to this Contract
requiring adjustment to reflect such Change Order.
	 
	23.2	 	Supplier Requested Change Order
	 
	 	 	If the Supplier determines that a condition or the occurrence of an event requires a
change in the Plant and/or Services, the Contract Price and/or in date of Delivery due to
reasons not specified elsewhere in this Contract, the Supplier shall prepare and deliver
to the Buyer a notice for a Change Order, which shall describe such condition or event in
detail. Thereafter, the Supplier shall, prepare within 14 days (unless otherwise agreed),
a detailed estimate of the cost of such change, taking into account the effect of such
change on the Plant and/or Services and other agreed upon and contemplated Change Orders.
Within a further 14 days (unless otherwise agreed), the Buyer shall review the Supplier’s
estimate and if the Buyer accepts or the Parties otherwise agree upon the Change Order, it
shall be endorsed by the Buyer and the Parties shall promptly adjust the scheduled dates
of Delivery, Contract Price and any of the Exhibits to this Contract requiring adjustment
to reflect such Change Order.
	 
	23.3	 	Change Orders for Changes of Law
	 
	 	 	If, after the signing of this Contract, there shall be any Change of Law outside the
country of manufacturing of the Equipment and/or the Plant, requiring a change in this
Contract (including, but not limited to the Equipment and/or the Plant), the Supplier
shall prepare a Change Order form. Upon receipt of the Buyer’s written consent, which
shall not unreasonably be withheld, such Change Order shall be implemented. If the
Supplier reasonably determines that proceeding with its obligations under the Contract
without complying with the Change of Law would expose Supplier, its employees,
representatives or Subcontractors to any fine, penalty or other punitive action by any
Governmental Unit, then provided it gives no less than 5 days written notice to the Buyer,
the Supplier shall be entitled to suspend its performance of its obligations under this
Contract until the Buyer has issued an appropriate Change Order or the parties have agreed
on a mutually acceptable way forward. The Buyer shall indemnify and hold Supplier harmless
from and against all claims, costs, damages, fines and expenses, including without
limitation legal fees and disbursements, arising out of or related to Supplier’s failure
to comply with any Change of Law for which Buyer had not issued a Change Order.
	 
	23.4	 	Disputes with respect to Change Orders.
	 
	 	 	If the Parties have not reached agreement with respect to the rejection by the Buyer
of a Change Order or proper adjustment to the Equipment, the Plant and/or the Services or
Contract Price and/or the scheduled dates of Delivery with respect to any event or other
occurrence described in clause 23.2 (other than changes in the Equipment, the Plant and/or
Services proposed by the Supplier and approved by the Buyer) within thirty (30) days of
the Supplier’s notice thereof, the cost or amount, if any, of such adjustment and
extension of the scheduled dates of Delivery, if any, shall be determined pursuant to the
provisions of clause 21 and if the dispute is not settled through friendly consultations
the Parties will follow the procedure set forth in clause 21.3 until the decision in the
dispute is given according to the rules of the procedure. This decision shall be final and
binding on both Parties unless either of the Parties have within thirty (30) days from the
receipt of the said decision has submitted the dispute into the arbitration procedure set
forth in clause 21.2.




Page 29









 






	23.5	 	Change Orders Agreed Rates
	 
	 	 	Without prejudice to what has been stated above, unless otherwise agreed, changes to the
Plant and/or Services pursuant to Change Orders under this Clause 23 shall be delivered,
performed and/or made based on the rates listed below. In the event that no rate has been
specified for an item forming part of the scope of a Change Order the adjustment to the
Contract Price shall be mutually agreed by the Parties pursuant to the provisions of this
Clause.





	 	 	 
	Material, equipment, labour and installation works

	 	Offer received from respective supplier and/or the Shipyard contractor to be submitted to the Buyer. Cost of this portion shall be based on: Offer received from respective supplier and/or the Shipyard contractor (to
be submitted to the Buyer) plus administration fee of  plus an agreed profit margin of 
	 
	 	 
	Transport, where and if applicable

	 	Based on actual cost plus administration fee of plus an agreed profit margin of  Estimation will be given for a
budgetary purpose prior to confirmed Change Order.
	 
	 	 
	Engineering cost

	 	per each engineering hour
	 
	 	 
	Additional advisory services at the Shipyard, where and if applicable

	 	Mechanical advisor; per each day

Electrical advisor;  per each day


PLC programmer;  per each day.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Above rates include board, lodging, local
transportation, profits and administration fees.






CLAUSE 24 CORPORATE WARRANTIES





	 	 	The Parties represent and warrant individually that:






	 	(1)	 	it is a company duly incorporated and validly existing under the laws of
its place of incorporation;
	 
	 	(2)	 	it has taken all necessary action to authorize the execution, delivery and
performance of this Contract, in accordance with its terms;
	 
	 	(3)	 	it has power to enter into and perform its obligations under this Contract
and to carry out the transactions contemplated by this Contract;
	 
	 	(4)	 	its obligations under this Contract are valid and binding and are
enforceable against it in accordance with respective terms subject to any necessary
stamping and registration, the availability of equitable remedies and laws relating
to the enforcement of creditor’s rights;
	 
	 	(5)	 	it has the corporate power to own its own assets and to carry on its
business as it is now being conducted;
	 
	 	(6)	 	it is not the responsible entity of any trust;




Page 30









 






	 	(7)	 	the execution, delivery and performance of this Contract and the
transactions under it do not:






	 	(A)	 	breach its constitution or other constituent documents; or
	 
	 	(B)	 	breach any law or decree of any court or official directive which is binding on
it;
	 
	 	(C)	 	cause a limitation on its powers or the powers of its directors or other
officers to be exceeded;






	 	(8)	 	no litigation, arbitration, tax claim, dispute or administrative or other
proceeding (which has not been disclosed to the other Party in writing) has been
commenced, is pending or, to its knowledge, threatened in writing aga¡nst it which is
likely to have a material adverse effect upon it or its ability to perform its
financial or other obligations under this Contract; and




THE PARTIES ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE OTHER PARTY IS RELYING ON THE REPRESENTATIONS AND
WARRANTIES MADE TO IT IN CONNECTION WITH THIS CONTRACT. CLAUSE 25 NOTICES





	25.1	 	Any and all notices pursuant to this Contract shall be in the English language
and can be validly given by either registered mail or courier service to the
addresses provided below. Alterations to any address must be conveyed to the
other Party in writing in order to become effective.





	 	 	 
	The Buyer
	 	 
	 
	 	 
	Lihir Gold Limited
	 	 
	Attn: Executive General Manager
	 	Telephone: +675-321-7711
	7th Floor Pacific Place
	 	Telefax: +675-321-4705
	Cnr. Champion Parade & Musgrave Street
	 	 
	P.O. Box 789
	 	 
	Port Moresby NCD 121
	 	 
	Papua New Guinea
	 	 
	 
	 	 
	The Supplier
	 	 
	 
	 	 
	Wärtsilä Finland Oy
	 	 
	Attn: Project Manager
	 	Telephone: +358-10-7090000
	Tarhaajantie 2
	 	Telefax: +358-6-356 9133
	P.O. Box 252
	 	 
	Fl-65101 Vaasa, Finland
	 	 





IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto, the Buyer and the Supplier, have caused
their duly authorised representatives to execute this Contract on the day and year
first written above.




	 	 	 
	On Behalf of the Buyer

	 	On Behalf of the Supplier
	 
	 	 
	LIHIR GOLD LIMITED

	 	WÄRTSILÄ FINLAND OY
	 
	 	 
	/s/ Gary Moore

	 	/s/ Raymond Vinton
	 

	 	 
	Signature

	 	Signature






Page 31









 






	 	 	 
	Garry Moore

	 	Raymond Vinton
	 

	 	 
	Name (in full)

	 	Name (in full)
	 
	 	 
	Project Manager, — MOPU

	 	General Manager
	 

	 	 
	Title

	 	Title
	 
	 	 
	/s/
Daniel Otaegui

	 	/s/ Goran Richardsson
	 

	 	 
	Witness Signature

	 	Witness Signature
	 
	 	 
	Daniel Otaegui

	 	Goran Richardsson
	 

	 	 
	Witness Name (in full)

	 	Witness Name (in full)
	 
	 	 
	Senior Geothermal Eng.

	 	Area Sales Manager
	 

	 	 
	Witness Title

	 	Witness Title







Page 32











 





EXHIBIT A – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND SCOPE OF SUPPLY





	1.	 	Scope of supply
	 
	2.	 	Technical specification Q0900869 & fire protection specification DBAB103090
	 
	3.	 	Technical data sheets
	 
	4.	 	Main flow diagrams:

- DBAB070290 – Single line diagram

- DBAB070563 – Fuel oil system

- DBAB070884 – Lube oil system

- DBAB079390 – Compressed air system

- DBAB079391 – Cooling system

- DBAB079392 – Charge air & exhaust gas system

- DBAB079403 – Steam distribution system (inside engine hall)

- DBAB104506 – Steam distribution system (outside engine hall)

- DBAB105117 – Oily water system

- DBAB105118 – Fire fighting system

- DBAB105762 – Water supply system
	 
	5.	 	List of suppliers: WDAAA041238
	 
	6.	 	Lay out drawings

- 1-193-09572 Plan engine hall

- 1-193-09573 Section A-A

- 1-193-09574 Plan roof level

- 1-193-09575 Tank location plan

- 1-193-09578 View from land

- 1-193-09585 View from sea




 









 











EXHIBIT A: SCOPE OF SUPPLY




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Respons	 	Respons
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ibility of	 	ibility of
	Section	 	Description	 	QTY	 	Supplier	 	Buyer
	Total	 	TOTAL
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A	 	POWER GENERATION
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1	 	GENERATING SET
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1.1	 	ENGINE
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Wärtsilä 20V32 engine
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Turbocharger cleaning device
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1.2	 	GENERATOR, 11 kV / 50 Hz
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Generator
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1.3	 	BASE FRAME
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Common base frame
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Fastening equipment (set)
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1.4	 	ELASTIC MOUNTING
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Steel springs (set)
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1.5	 	COUPLING
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Flexible coupling
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1.7	 	CONNECTIONS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Flexible connections between engine and external piping
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Flexible hoses and gaskets (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Cooling water bellows (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Exhaust gas bellows
	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Charge air bellows compensator
	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1.8	 	PLATFORMS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Engine maintenance platform prefabricated
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2	 	MECHANICAL AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.0	 	AUXILIARY MODULES
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Engine auxiliary module with integrated compact booster
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Fuel oil filter
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Fuel booster pump
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Return fuel pump
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Fuel oil cooler
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Return fuel tank
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Pre heating unit
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Thermostatic valve high temperature water system
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Thermostatic valve low temperature water system
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Pressure increasing pump
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Steam heater
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Piping and insulation
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Valves and gauges
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Module control panel
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Exhaust gas module
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Low temperature expansion tank
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Charge air silencer
	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 






 









 






EXHIBIT A: SCOPE OF SUPPLY




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Respons	 	Respons
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ibility of	 	ibility of
	Section	 	Description	 	QTY	 	Supplier	 	Buyer
	 	 	- Exhaust gas branch pipe
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Piping and insulation
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Oil mist separator
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.1	 	FUEL SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.1.1	 	LIGHT FUEL OIL SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Light fuel oil transfer pump unit, on land
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Light fuel oil day tank, integrated in barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Light fuel oil day tank equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Light fuel oil feeder unit
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Light fuel oil flow meter for total fuel consumption measurement
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves light fuel oil system inside engine hall
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves light fuel oil system outside engine hall
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves light fuel oil system outside, on land
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.1.3	 	HEAVY FUEL OIL SYSTEM (designed for a maximum fuel viscosity
of 180 cSt)
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil storage tank, on land
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil transfer pump unit, on land
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil storage tank, integrated in barge hull
	 	 	5	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil storage tank equipment
	 	 	5	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil transfer pump unit, on power barge
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil storage tank suction heater
	 	 	5	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil buffer tank, integrated in barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil buffer tank equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil separator unit
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Separator
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Delivery pump
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Strainer
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Steam heater
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Sludge tank
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Sludge pump
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Steel frame
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Control panel
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil day tank
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil day tank equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil feeder unit
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil flow meter for total fuel consumption measurement
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves heavy fuel oil system inside engine hall
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil trace heating material inside engine hall
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heavy fuel oil pipe insulation inside engine hall
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves heavy fuel oil system outside engine hall
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves heavy fuel oil system, on land
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.2	 	LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lubricating oil separator unit
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lubricating oil unloading pump unit: fresh oil.
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lubricating oil storage tank: fresh oil. Integrated in barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Equipment for lubricating oil storage tank: fresh oil
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lubricating oil service tank. Integrated in barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lubricating oil service tank equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lubricating oil transfer pump unit (mobile)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 






Page: 2 of 10









 






EXHIBIT A: SCOPE OF SUPPLY




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Respons	 	Respons
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ibility of	 	ibility of
	Section	 	Description	 	QTY	 	Supplier	 	Buyer
	 	 	Lubricating oil transfer pump unit (stationary)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lubricating oil storage tank: used oil. Integrated in barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lubricating oil unloading pump unit: used oil
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Equipment for lubricating oil storage tank: used oil
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves lubricating oil system inside engine hall
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Pumps, piping and valves lubricating oil system, on land – if
required
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Automatic lubricating oil top up system inside Power Barge
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.3	 	COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Starting air bottle
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Starting air compressor unit — double
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Instrument air compressor unit
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Instrument air bottle
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves compressed air system (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.4	 	COOLING SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Cooling radiator (set)
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Cooling radiator legs (set)
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Epoxy coated fins & frames (coating for leg structure included
in the building structure).
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Cooling radiator ladder and railings
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Maintenance water tank unit (fresh water). Integrated in barge
hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves maintenance water system (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves cooling system inside engine hall
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves cooling system outside engine hall
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.5	 	CHARGE AIR SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Charge air filter, frame epoxy coated
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Ducting charge air system (set)
	 	 	16	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.6	 	EXHAUST SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Exhaust gas silencer
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Bellows for exhaust gas silencer
	 	 	16	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Ducting exhaust gas system (set)
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Bellows for exhaust gas ducting
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Insulation exhaust gas ducting (set)
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Exhaust gas stack pipe
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.8	 	STATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.8.1	 	OILY WATER SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Oily water transfer pump unit
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Oily water buffer tank. Integrated in barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Oily water feed pump unit
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Oily water treatment unit
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Sludge tank. Integrated in barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Sludge loading pump unit
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves oily water treatment system (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Sludge disposal (at Site)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.8.2	 	WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Fresh water storage tank. Integrated in the barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Raw water storage tank. Integrated in the barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 






Page: 3 of 10









 






EXHIBIT A: SCOPE OF SUPPLY




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Respons	 	Respons
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ibility of	 	ibility of
	Section	 	Description	 	QTY	 	Supplier	 	Buyer
	 	 	Water treatment unit
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Treated water storage tank. Integrated in the barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Water booster unit
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping and valves treated water system (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.8.3	 	FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Fire fighting room pump equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Foam systems for tanks
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Engine’s + Fuel treatment water mist systems
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Hydrants and hose cabinets inside
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	MFU’s
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Hose reels and foam hose reels
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Switchgear room, CO2 extinguishing system
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Office, Canteen, Corridor sprinkler syst.
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Workshop sprinkler syst.
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Parts store sprinkler syst.
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Outside hydrants and hose equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Detection (incl.tanks)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Fire fighting main piping and valves
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Standpipe inside
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Foam piping
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	All extinguishers (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Fireman’s outfits and storage lockers
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	UHF radios
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Fire water tank. Integrated in the barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A3	 	ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A3.1	 	MAIN SWITCHGEAR
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Main busbar
	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Generator cubicle
	 	 	8	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Neutral point cubicle
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Bustie cubicle
	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Outgoing feeder cubicle
	 	 	6	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Station auxiliary transformer feeder cubicle
	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Measuring cubicle
	 	 	4	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Generator cubicle cable (set)
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Generator neutral point cable (set)
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Trailing cable support systems
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Outgoing feeder cubicle cable (set)
	 	 	6	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Cable terminations and cable fittings, each for his own
supply
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A3.2	 	STATION SERVICE SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Station auxiliary transformer
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Blackstart unit
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Diesel generating set
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Light fuel oil tank
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Radiator
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Exhaust gas ducting and silencer
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Interconnecting pipes, valves and flanges (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Electric panel
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Steel frame
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Container
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Low voltage switchboard
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 






Page: 4 of 10









 






EXHIBIT A: SCOPE OF SUPPLY




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Respons	 	Respons
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ibility of	 	ibility of
	Section	 	Description	 	QTY	 	Supplier	 	Buyer
	 	 	Full current isolator switches for electrical motors, if
required (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Frequency converter (for cooling radiator)
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Radiator panels
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Station auxiliary transformer medium voltage cables (set)
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Station auxiliary transformer low voltage cables (set)
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Low voltage cables (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Cable terminations and cable fittings
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A3.3	 	DC SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	DC system power plant control
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A3.5	 	OUTDOOR SWITCHYARD
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Power transformer
	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Common equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Transformer bay
	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Transmission line bay
	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Trailing cable (set)
	 	 	6	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Remote terminal unit (RTU)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Power line carrier (PLC)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A3.6	 	CONNECTION WITH UTILITY
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Overhead distribution line
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Physical connection with the grid
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Tariff metering system
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A3.7	 	CONNECTION WITH LOCAL INDUSTRY
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Local electrical study
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Local interconnect study
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Distribution cable
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Physical connection with local industry
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A4	 	AUTOMATION SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A4.1	 	OPERATOR’S STATION
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	WOIS workstation
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	WISE workstation
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Uninterrupted power supply (UPS)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A4.2	 	CONTROL PANELS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Central common control panel
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Central generating set control panel
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Differential protection relay
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Local generating set control panel
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Automation requirements, hull equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A4.5	 	CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Control and instrumentation cables
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A5	 	HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A5.1	 	STEAM GENERATION SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A5.1.1	 	STEAM GENERATION SYSTEM FOR FUEL HEATING
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Exhaust gas boiler
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 






Page: 5 of 10









 






EXHIBIT A: SCOPE OF SUPPLY




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Respons	 	Respons
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ibility of	 	ibility of
	Section	 	Description	 	QTY	 	Supplier	 	Buyer
	 	 	- Inlet and outlet hoods with inspection doors
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Modulating exhaust gas by-pass damper with actuator
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Manual steam soot blowing equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Shut-off valves
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Blow-down drain
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Safety valve
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Relief valve
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Pressure switches
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Level switches
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Level control device
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Insulation and cladding
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Counter flanges, bots, nuts and gaskets
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Mounting supports
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Boiler service platform
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Bellows for exhaust gas boiler
	 	 	6	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Heat recovery container
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Feed water tank
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Feed water pump
	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Chemical dosing unit
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Blow-down tank
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Local control panel
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Light fuel oil fired boiler for steam generation
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Oil detector
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Steam header
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Condensate tank. Integrated in barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Boiler washing water tank. Integrated in barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Boiler washing water pump
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Piping, valves and insulation for steam generation
system for fuel
heating (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	A7	 	TOOLS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Engine maintenance tools (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Engine hand tools (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Tools for turbocharger (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	HFO separator tools (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lubricating oil separator tools (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A8	 	SPARE PARTS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Commission consumable parts for 8 engines
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A9	 	CONSUMABLES
Initial fillings of lubricating oil (in engines and
other equipment), lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Initial fillings of lubricating oil tanks, lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Initial fillings of grease, chemicals, water etc for
engines and other
equipment, lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Initial fillings of water tanks, fire water tanks,
fuel oil tanks and
other tanks & storage tanks, lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Fuel oil for commissioning at site
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	B	 	CIVIL WORKS:HULL (B1) AND STRUCTURES ON CARGO DECK
(B2)
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B1	 	HULL
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Power barge
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Barge painting
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 






Page: 6 of 10









 






EXHIBIT A: SCOPE OF SUPPLY




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Respons	 	Respons
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ibility of	 	ibility of
	Section	 	Description	 	QTY	 	Supplier	 	Buyer
	 	 	Mooring equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Platforms, stairs and ladders under deck
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Steels for mooring structure
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Transformer area (on shore)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Structures under units
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Manholes
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Zinc anodes
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	ICCP (cathodic protection)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Staging
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Rubber and teflon for mooring
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Bollards (on barge)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Water tight doors
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Electrification installation material
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Towing bracket and Bridle
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Emergency towing line
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Remote readouts, operator, control valves for tanks
below deck
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Level Indicators and alarms for under deck tanks
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Navigation Lights, temporary for transportation
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Overflow tank. Integrated in the barge hull
	 	 	2	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Sewage tank. Integrated in the barge hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B2.1 –2.7	 	SUPERSTRUCTURES ON CARGO DECK
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Power house steel frame and supporting structures
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	External walls
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Internal walls
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Intermediate floor
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Roof
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Doors
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Windows
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Finishing and furnishing
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Sanitary Installations (inside buildings)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Process ventilation, Power plant buildings
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Comfort ventilation and Air conditioning
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Equipment (Cranes)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Unheated Emergency Safety Shower with additional body
spray
and eye wash.
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B2.8	 	AUXILIARY STRUCTURES
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Steel structures for charge air duct support (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Steel structures for auxiliary equipment support (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Railing outside building, Aux Platform and Shim
Plates for engine installation (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Steel structures outside the building (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Superstructures, exhaust gas stack (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Superstructures, boiler support (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B3	 	WORKSHOP & WAREHOUSE
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Complete workshop & warehouse on land, if required
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B5	 	POWER TRANSMISSION AREAS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B5.3	 	SWITCHYARD AREAS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Earthworks and substructures, switchyard
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 






Page: 7 of 10









 






EXHIBIT A: SCOPE OF SUPPLY




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Respons	 	Respons
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ibility of	 	ibility of
	Section	 	Description	 	QTY	 	Supplier	 	Buyer
	 	 	Switchyard surface covering
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Fence, around switchyard
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B6	 	SITE WORKS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Earthworks, soil stabilization (piles, soil reinforcement,
etc.) (if
required)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Existing elements on plot (demolition, protection, cleaning,
top soil
removal, etc.) (if required)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Earth excavation on plot (if required)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Rock excavation on plot (if required)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Filling on plot (if required)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Remedial work for the ground and / or groundwater
contamination
(if required)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Fuel pipes to Plant
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Water pipe to Plant
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Lubricating oil pipe to Plant
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Trailing cables, high voltage (11 kV) and low voltage to/from
Plant
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Sewage pipe from Plant
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Telephone line to Plant
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Access bridges between land and Plant (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C	 	SERVICES
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C1	 	ENGINEERING
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Environmental study / modelling
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Site investigation
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Preliminary soil investigation
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Preliminary engineering
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Basic engineering
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Detailed mechanical engineering for Supplier’s scope of supply
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Detailed mechanical engineering for Buyer’s scope of supply
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Detailed electrical engineering for Supplier’s scope of supply
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Detailed electrical engineering for Buyer’s scope of supply
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Detailed civil engineering for Supplier’s scope of supply
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Detailed civil engineering for Buyer’s scope of supply
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Detailed engineering of Barge Hull
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C2	 	TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C2.1	 	TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE DURING INSTALLATION
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Advisors during construction phase in the shipyard, lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Travel, board and lodging, local transport and temporary
office for
Supplier’s personnel during the construction phase in the
shipyard,
lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Office space for two Buyers personnel, at the Shipyard
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Travel, board and lodging, local transport for Buyer’s
personnel
during the construction phase in the shipyard, lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C3	 	INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION SERVICES AT SHIPYARD
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Installation of mechanical equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Installation of electrical equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Installation of safety earthing system
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Installation of power barge superstructures
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Installation of, by Buyer, supplied electrical equipment for
incorporation into the Plant
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 






Page: 8 of 10









 






EXHIBIT A: SCOPE OF SUPPLY




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Respons	 	Respons
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ibility of	 	ibility of
	Section	 	Description	 	QTY	 	Supplier	 	Buyer
	C4	 	TESTING AND PRE-COMMISSIONING
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C4.1	 	WORKSHOP TESTS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Engine test according to standard program
	 	 	8	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C4.3	 	PRE-COMMISSIONING AT SHIPYARD
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	No load tests
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Advisors for pre-commissioning, lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Travel, board and lodging, local transport and
temporary office for
Supplier’s personnel, lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Office space for two Buyers personnel, at the Shipyard
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Advisor(s) for pre-commissioning of, by Buyer,
delivered electrical
equipment, lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Travel, board and lodging, local transport for Buyer’s
personnel, lot
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C6	 	DOCUMENTS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C6.1	 	PRELIMINARY DESIGN
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	General site layouts
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	General power house layouts
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	General flow diagram drafts
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	General electrical single line diagram drafts
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C6.2	 	BASIC DESIGN
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	General site layouts
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	General power house layouts
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Flow diagram drafts
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Electrical single line diagram drafts
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C6.3	 	DETAILED DESIGN
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Drawings (set)
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Parts lists (set)
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	P&ID’s
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C6.4	 	FINAL DESIGN
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Drawings as built, only updates (set)
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Electronic copy of as built drawings, only updates (set)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	C6.5	 	USER MANUALS
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Station manuals in English
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- As hard copy
	 	 	3	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- On digital media
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	- Installed into Wärtsilä Information System (WISE)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	D	 	TAXES / DUTIES / PERMITS / INSURANCE
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	As per contract
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Construction all risk insurance in shipyard
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Construction all risk insurance at Lihir Site
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	E	 	TRANSPORTATION
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	E1	 	TRANSPORTATION OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY SUPPLIER
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 






Page: 9 of 10









 






EXHIBIT A: SCOPE OF SUPPLY




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Respons	 	Respons
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ibility of	 	ibility of
	Section	 	Description	 	QTY	 	Supplier	 	Buyer
	 	 	Transportation of equipment from and to sub suppliers
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Packing and marking of equipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Loading of equipment at place of manufacturing
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Transportation of equipment from place of manufacturing to
port
of shipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Loading of equipment on ship at port of shipment
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Ocean freight of equipment from port of shipment to port of
destination (shipyard)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Unloading of equipment at port of destination (shipyard)
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Transportation of Plant from shipyard to Luise Harbour, Lihir
Island
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Transportation of Plant from DES Luise Harbour to mooring
location
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 
	 	 	Freight insurance from place of manufacturing to shipyard
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Freight insurance from shipyard to Luise Harbour, Lihir Island
	 	 	1	 	 	 	x	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Freight Insurance from DES Luise Harbour to mooring location
	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	x	 







Page: 10 of 10












 





	 	 	 
	

	 	TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION






Lihir Services Australia Pty Ltd




Project name: Power Supply Upgrade. LGL project




Project number: P0900329




Quotation number: Q0900869




Date: August 25, 2009




Power generation project




Product type: Power Barge




Engine configuration 8 x Wärtsilä 20V32




Wärtsilä Finland Oy




Tarhaajantie 2, FIN-65101 Vaasa, Finland




Enclosure to this technical specification:




“Lihir Power Barge Fire Protection”, doc. id.: DBAB103090





This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä. No distribution or
duplication in any form of any material contained herein is permitted without the prior
approval of Wärtsilä.



 









 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation
date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	TABLE OF CONTENTS	 		 
	0	 	GENERAL
	 	 	5	 
	0.1	 	EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
	 	 	5	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	0.2	 	TYPE OF PRODUCT
	 	 	6	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	0.3	 	MAIN DATA AND CONDITIONS
	 	 	6	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	0.4	 	OPERATION MEDIA
	 	 	6	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	0.5	 	SPECIAL FEATURES
	 	 	11	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	0.6	 	CODES AND STANDARDS
	 	 	13	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A	 	POWER GENERATION
	 	 	15	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A1	 	GENERATING SET
	 	 	15	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A1.1	 	ENGINE
	 	 	15	 
	A1.2	 	GENERATOR
	 	 	19	 
	A1.3	 	BASE FRAME
	 	 	21	 
	A1.4	 	ELASTIC MOUNTING
	 	 	21	 
	A1.5	 	COUPLING
	 	 	21	 
	A1.7	 	CONNECTIONS
	 	 	21	 
	A1.8	 	PLATFORMS
	 	 	22	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A2	 	MECHANICAL AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
	 	 	22	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A2.0	 	AUXILIARY MODULES
	 	 	22	 
	A2.1	 	FUEL SYSTEM
	 	 	25	 
	A2.1.1	 	LIGHT FUEL OIL SYSTEM
	 	 	25	 
	A2.1.3	 	HEAVY FUEL OIL SYSTEM (designed for a maximum fuel viscosity of 180 cSt)
	 	 	25	 
	A2.2	 	LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM
	 	 	27	 
	A2.3	 	COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
	 	 	29	 
	A2.4	 	COOLING SYSTEM
	 	 	31	 
	A2.5	 	CHARGE AIR SYSTEM
	 	 	32	 
	A2.6	 	EXHAUST SYSTEM
	 	 	33	 
	A2.8	 	STATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
	 	 	33	 
	A2.8.1	 	OILY WATER SYSTEM
	 	 	33	 
	A2.8.2	 	WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
	 	 	35	 
	A2.8.3	 	FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
	 	 	36	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A3	 	ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
	 	 	37	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A3.1	 	MAIN SWITCHGEAR
	 	 	37	 
	A3.2	 	STATION SERVICE SYSTEM
	 	 	38	 
	A3.3	 	DC SYSTEM
	 	 	40	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A4	 	AUTOMATION SYSTEM
	 	 	41	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A4.1	 	OPERATOR’S STATION
	 	 	41	 
	A4.2	 	CONTROL PANELS
	 	 	45	 
	A4.5	 	CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
	 	 	49	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A5	 	HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM
	 	 	49	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A5.1	 	STEAM GENERATION SYSTEM
	 	 	49	 
	A5.1.1	 	STEAM GENERATION SYSTEM FOR FUEL HEATING
	 	 	49	 








			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 2 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation
date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	TABLE OF CONTENTS	 	 	 
	A7	 	TOOLS
	 	 	52	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	A8	 	SPARE PARTS
	 	 	52	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	B	 	CIVIL WORKS: HULL (B1) AND STRUCTURES ON CARGO DECK (B2)
	 	 	53	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	B1	 	HULL
	 	 	53	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	B1.0	 	CLASSIFICATION, REGISTRY AND REGULATIONS
	 	 	54	 
	B1.1	 	TANK CAPACITIES, SHORE CONNECTIONS
	 	 	55	 
	B1.2	 	HYDROSTATICS, STABILITY, PRELIMINARY
	 	 	56	 
	B1.3	 	HULL, LARGE HULL FITTINGS, PAINTING AND CORROSION PROTECTION
	 	 	56	 
	B1.3.1	 	CONSTRUCTION PRINCIPLES
	 	 	57	 
	B1.3.2	 	LARGE HULL FITTINGS
	 	 	57	 
	B1.3.3.	 	PAINTING AND GALVANIZING
	 	 	57	 
	B1.3.4.	 	CATHODIC PROTECTION
	 	 	61	 
	B1.3.5.	 	DRAUGHT MARKS, NAME, MARKING OF PAINTING LINES
	 	 	61	 
	B1.3.6.	 	TOWING, BOLLARDS AND MOORING EQUIPMENT — PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
	 	 	61	 
	B1.3.7	 	HULL AND DECK FITTINGS
	 	 	62	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	B.2	 	SUPERSTRUCTURES ON CARGO DECK
	 	 	63	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	B2.1	 	DESIGN DATA FOR ON DECK CARGO (POWER HOUSE, STRUCTURES etc.)
	 	 	63	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	B2.1.1	 	Explanation to abbreviations
	 	 	63	 
	B2.1.2	 	Codes and standards for power barge deck cargo
	 	 	63	 
	B2.1.3	 	Loads
	 	 	64	 
	B2.1.4	 	Other design criteria
	 	 	64	 
	B2.1.5	 	Indoor environment
	 	 	65	 
	B2.2	 	POWER HOUSE — SUPPLY:
	 	 	66	 
	B2.2.1	 	POWER HOUSE STEEL FRAME AND SUPPORTING STRUCTURES
	 	 	66	 
	B2.2.2	 	EXTERNAL WALLS
	 	 	67	 
	B2.2.3	 	INTERNAL WALLS
	 	 	68	 
	B2.2.4	 	SEPARATION WALLS BETWEEN ENGINE 4 AND 5 (ADDITIONALLY PRICED)
	 	 	68	 
	B2.2.5	 	INTERMEDIATE FLOOR
	 	 	69	 
	B2.2.6	 	ROOF
	 	 	69	 
	B2.2.7	 	DOORS
	 	 	70	 
	B2.2.8	 	WINDOWS
	 	 	70	 
	B2.3	 	FINISHING AND FURNISHING
	 	 	70	 
	B2.3.1	 	EXTERNAL WALL FINISHING
	 	 	70	 
	B2.3.2	 	INTERNAL WALL FINISHING
	 	 	70	 
	B.2.3.3	 	FLOOR FINISHING
	 	 	70	 
	B2.3.5	 	TECHNICAL SPACES AND FURNISHING ON MAIN DECK
	 	 	71	 
	B2.4	 	SANITARY INSTALLATIONS AND SAFETY SHOWERS
	 	 	72	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	B2.8	 	AUXILIARY STRUCTURES
	 	 	76	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	B2.8.1	 	CHARGE AIR / EXHAUST GAS DUCTING AND BOILER SUPPORT STRUCTURES
	 	 	76	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	B2.9	 	INTERNAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
	 	 	77	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	C	 	SERVICES
	 	 	78	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	C1	 	ENGINEERING
	 	 	78	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	C2	 	TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
	 	 	78	 






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 3 of 81






 









 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation
date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	TABLE OF CONTENTS	 	 	 
	C2.1	 	TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE DURING INSTALLATION
	 	 	78	 
	C2.2	 	TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE DURING PRE-COMMISSIONING
	 	 	79	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	C3	 	INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
	 	 	79	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	C4	 	TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
	 	 	79	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	C4.1	 	WORKSHOP TESTS
	 	 	79	 
	C4.3	 	PRE-COMMISSIONING AT SHIPYARD
	 	 	79	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	C6	 	DOCUMENTS
	 	 	80	 
	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 
	C6.1	 	PRELIMINARY DESIGN
	 	 	80	 
	C6.2	 	BASIC DESIGN
	 	 	80	 
	C6.3	 	DETAILED DESIGN
	 	 	80	 
	C6.4	 	FINAL DESIGN
	 	 	80	 
	C6.5	 	USER MANUALS
	 	 	81	 






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 4 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation
date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009








	0	 	GENERAL
	 
	0.1	 	EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
	 
	 	 	General
	 
	 	 	This technical specification provides the reader with the basic technical data and
information required for evaluation of the plant’s technical features and performance,
as well as Wärtsilä’s scope of supply.
	 
	 	 	The proposed power barge is designed, engineered and will be delivered by Wärtsilä
Finland Oy in accordance with this technical specification.
	 
	 	 	The technical data stated in this document are for guidance and evaluation purpose
only, any guaranteed performance data is separately stated in the supply contract.
	 
	 	 	Design and construction
	 
	 	 	The essence of the design is simplicity, safety and reliability.
	 
	 	 	The equipment is designed to prevent accidental contact with moving, hot or tensional
parts and to minimise ingress of dust and dirt.
	 
	 	 	The structure and layout design of the Power Barge permits access to all parts for
inspection, maintenance and repair.
	 
	 	 	Wärtsilä quality procedures and test and inspection procedures are applied to ensure
product quality throughout the design and manufacturing process. Special attention is
paid to engine and auxiliary unit testing, as well as inspection and testing of the
final installation.
	 
	 	 	Wärtsilä’s quality and environmental management systems fulfil and are certified
according to ISO 9001:2000 and ISO 14001:2004.
	 
	 	 	Main parts and devices like panels, valves, pumps, etc. are marked with engraved name
plates indicating their item codes used in Wärtsilä documentation and manuals.
	 
	 	 	English is used in all documents, correspondence and
nameplates.
	 
	 	 	The SI units of measurement are used in all
technical documents.
	 
	 	 	The design and manufacture of Power Barge equipment supplied by Wärtsilä Finland Oy is
subject to constant review, and due to improvements and optimisation of materials,
design and tooling techniques, manufactured equipment may be improved from the
specification given below.





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 5 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation
date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009








	 	 	Deviations to assumptions made in this specification
	 
	 	 	If the purchasers requirements, local building codes, zoning requirements,
Grid/Interconnection Study, Environmental Impact Assessment, Building Permit
Application, Soil investigation, Topographical survey, Contamination evaluation or site
Demolition requirements or other random conditions deviate from the assumptions made
herein and have an impact on Wärtsilä’s scope of supply, the scope of work shall be
reviewed and Wärtsilä shall issue change order request(s) as per the relevant contract
clauses.
	 
	 	 	Project Management and Engineering
	 
	 	 	The delivery of the power barge will be managed by a dedicated Project Team, comprising
a Project Manager who has the overall responsibility for the delivery, who is assisted
by Project Engineers for the main technical disciplines.
	 
	 	 	The Project Team is the single point of contact with the purchaser’s organisation and
has full authority to decide technical and commercial issues related to the project on
behalf of Wärtsilä Finland Oy.
	 
	0.2	 	TYPE OF PRODUCT
	 
	 	 	The proposed power barge is designed for base load (cop) operation and is intended for
power generation.
	 
	 	 	Waste heat from the prime movers is used to produce thermal energy in the form of steam
for fuel heating.
	 
	 	 	The power barge is designed to use heavy fuel oil as the main
fuel.
	 
	 	 	Light Fuel Oil is used as alternative fuel.
	 
	0.3	 	MAIN DATA AND CONDITIONS
	 
	 	 	Configuration
	 
	 	 	The Power barge is equipped with 8 engines of the Wärtsilä 20V32 type, as the prime
mover.
	 
	0.4	 	OPERATION MEDIA
	 
	 	 	General
	 
	 	 	To maintain the components and equipment power barge in good operating condition and to
minimize wear and tear, it is of outmost importance that all operating media used are
of good quality and within the specification given by Wärtsilä.
	 
	 	 	Below are the main parameters for the major operating media of the power barge. The
complete specification and requirements for all needed operating media are given in the
Operation and Maintenance Manuals delivered for the power barge.
	 
	 	 	Fuels
	 
	 	 	Wärtsilä engines are designed and developed for continuous operation on fuels with a
quality within the Recommended Limits described in the column “Engine” below. These
values indicate





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 6 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation
date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009








the individual extreme limits for the engines only. Fuels having one or several values close
to this limit might have a negative impact on the component lifetime.




Project requirements, actual fuel availability or Customers preferences may set other
limits on the fuel quality, as stated in the column “Plant” below. The power barge will be
designed according to the specified plant fuel quality.



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 7 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation
date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009








Light fuel oil (LFO)



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	Fuel quality limit	 	 	 	 
	Parameter	 	 	 	Engine	 	Plant	 	Unit	 	Test Method reference
	 
	Viscosity
	 	Minimum	 	 	 		 	CSt at 40°C	 	ISO 3104
	 
	 	Maximum	 	 	 		 	 	 	 
	Injection viscosity
	 	Minimum	 		 	 	 	Cst	 	ISO 3104
	 
	 	Maximum	 		 	 	 	Cst	 	ISO 3104
	Density
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	kg/m3 at 15°C	 	ISO 3675 or 12185
	Water
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	% Vol.	 	ISO 3733
	Sulphur
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	% mass	 	ISO 8754or 14596
	Ash
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	% mass	 	ISO 6245
	Vanadium
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	ISO 14597 or IP 501 or 470
	Sodium
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	ISO 10478
	Aluminium + silicon
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	ISO 14597 or IP 501 or 470
	Carbon Residue
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	 	 	ISO 10370
	Asphaltenes
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	% mass	 	ASTMD 3279
	Flash point (PMCC)
	 	Minimum	 		 		 	°C	 	ISO 2719
	Pour point
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	°C	 	ISO 3016
	Used lubricating oil2
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	- Calcium
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	IP 501 or 470
	- Zinc
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	IP 501 or 470
	- Phosphorus
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	IP 501 or 500







The limits above are based on the demands of ISO 8217:2005(E) standard and covers the fuel
categories ISO-F-DMX, DMA, DMB and DMC




The fuel should not include any added substance or chemical waste, which jeopardizes
the safety of installations or adversely affects the performance of the engines or is
harmful to personnel or contributes overall to additional air pollution.





 




			
	1	 	Additional properties specified by the engine manufacturer
	 
	2	 	A fuel shall be considered to be free of used lubricating oil (ULO), if
one or more of the elements calcium, zinc and phosphorus are below or at the
specified limits. All three elements shall exceed the same limits before a fuel
shall be deemed to contain ULO.





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 8 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation
date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009








Heavy fuel oil (HFO)



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	Fuel quality limit	 	 	 	Test Method reference
	Parameter	 	 	 	Engine	 	Plant	 	Unit	 	Eq* = equivalent
	 
	Viscosity
	 	Maximum	 	 	 		 	CSt at 50°C	 	ISO 3104 Eq*: ASTM D-
445
	Injection viscosity
	 	Minimum	 		 	 	 	Cst	 	ISO 3104
	 
	 	Maximum	 		 	 	 	Cst	 	ISO 3104
	Density
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	kg/m3 at 15°C	 	ISO 3675 or 12185
Eq*: ASTM D-1298
	CCAI-number
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	 	 	ISO 8217, Annex B
	Water
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	% Vol.	 	ISO 3733 Eq*: ASTM D-95
	Sulphur
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	% mass	 	ISO 8754 or 14596 
Eq*: IP-336
	Ash
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	% mass	 	ISO 6245 Eq*: ASTM D-
482
	Vanadium
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	ISO 14597 or IP 501 or 470 
Eq*: AAS
	Sodium
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	ISO 10478 Eq*: AAS
	Aluminium + silicon
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	ISO 14597 or IP 501 or 470
	Carbon Residue
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	 	 	ISO 10370 Eq*: ASTM D-
4530
	Asphaltenes
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	% mass	 	ASTMD 3279-90 Eq*:
IP143/90
	Flash point (PMCC)
	 	Minimum	 		 		 	°C	 	ISO 2719 Eq*: ASTM D-93
	Pour point
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	°C	 	ISO 3016 Eq*: ASTM D-97
	Total Sediment potential
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	%	 	ISO 10307-2 Eq*: ASTM D-
4870
	Used lubricating oil3	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	- Calcium
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	IP 501 or 470
	- Zinc
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	IP 501 or 470
	- Phosphorus
	 	Maximum	 		 		 	mg/kg	 	IP 501 or 500







Compatibility between HFO and LFO, as well as with previous delivery according to 1/1
ASTM-D 4740 should be assured.




The limits above are based on the demands of:




- BS MA 100: 1996, RMH 55 and RMK 55 

- CIMAC 2003, Grade K 700

- ISO 8217:2005(E), ISO-F-RMK 700




The fuel should not include any added substance or chemical waste, which jeopardizes
the safety of installations or adversely affects the performance of the engines or is
harmful to personnel or contributes overall to additional air pollution.





 




			
	3	 	A fuel shall be considered to be free of used lubricating oil (ULO), if
one or more of the elements calcium, zinc and phosphorus are below or at the
specified limits. All three elements shall exceed the same limits before a fuel
shall be deemed to contain ULO.





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 9 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation
date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009








Lubricating oil




Only lubricants that are approved by Wärtsilä are allowed to be used. The major
lubricating oil suppliers have certain lubricating oils which are approved by Wärtsilä.




The properties of the fresh lubricating oil must meet the following requirements.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Viscosity class
	 	 	 	 	 	 		 	 	 	 	 
	Viscosity Index (VI)
	 	minimum	 	 		 	 	 	 	 
	Alkalinity (BN)4, LFO operation
	 	 	 	 	 	 		 	 	mg KOH/g
	Alkalinity (BN)4, HFO operation
	 	 	 	 	 	 		 	 	mg KOH/g







Engine cooling water




Corrosion inhibiting additives must be used in the engine cooling water. Only additives
of the brand and types approved by Wärtsilä are allowed to be used. The additive
manufacturer’s dosage, pH, and testing recommendations shall be followed.




If a nitrite based corrosion inhibitor is used, the aim should be to keep a nitrite
(NO2) content of approximately 1500 mg/l, calculated as nitrite. The pH
shall be between 8.5 and 9.5.




Limits for engine cooling (primary circuit), turbine washing, and separator operating water:



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	pH at 25°C
	 	 		 	 	 	—	 
	Conductivity
at 25°C (limit for turbine washing only) 
	 	 		 	 	mS/m
	Total hardness Ca2+ + Mg2+
	 	 		 	 	°dH
	Silica as
SiO2
	 	 		 	 	mg/l
	Chlorides Cl-
	 	 		 	 	mg/l
	Sulphates as SO42-
	 	 		 	 	mg/l







The general appearance should be clear, colourless and free of undissolved materials.




Charge air




The highest allowed concentration of impurities at charge air inlet is:



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Chlorides (Cl-)

	 	 		 	 	mg/Nm3 5
	 

	 	 		 	 	mass-ppm
	Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S)

	 	 		 	 	μg/Nm3
	 

	 	 		 	 	vol.-ppm
	Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

	 	 		 	 	mg/Nm3
	 

	 	 		 	 	vol.-ppm
	Ammonia (NH3)

	 	 		 	 	mg/Nm3
	 

	 	 		 	 	vol.-ppm
	Minimum filtration class

	 	 		 	 	EN 779:2002








 




			
	4	 	Required alkalinity depends on the used fuel oil.
	 
	5	 	Nm3 given at 0 °C and 1013 mbar





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 10 of 81







 











 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






0.5 SPECIAL FEATURES





Vibration control




Transmission of vibration and structure borne noise is minimised by having the engine
generator set flexibly mounted on the foundation. The engine generator set is isolated
from the building, piping and steel structures.




Torsional vibration in the engine generator shaft system is minimised by means of a
flexible coupling between the engine and generator.




Modular construction




Wärtsilä’s modular design concept enables the plant to be optimised for specific needs
of the project, utilising well proven standard units and components. Prefabrication of
auxiliary units allows for shop testing of equipment and reduces installation cost and
time at the site.




Note for Lihir Power Barge: Cables inside Wärtsilä supplied units
(modules, control panels, engine, generators) will be as per Wärtsilä standard.
Instrument and control cables between generating sets and control room will also be as
per Wärtsilä standard.







Figure 1 Example of a factory made and tested auxiliary module (starting air compressor unit)




Operation and Maintenance support




The Operation and Maintenance Manuals are tailor made for each project and cover all of
the equipment included in the plant, thus enabling the correct operation and maintenance
of the plant throughout its lifetime.



	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 11 of 81






 









 





 
	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







Wärtsilä’s local service organisation will assist the customer in organising the plant
day-to-day operations and will assist in setting up the plant reporting procedures and
routines, thus laying the foundation for long term successful operation of the plant.



	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 12 of 81






 









 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







0.6 CODES AND STANDARDS





The design complies with the following standards:




Mechanical systems




The mechanical systems are designed, manufactured, constructed and installed according
to the appropriate extent of the following standards:



	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	Code
	-

	 	Engine test run
	 	ISO 15550
	-

	 	Vibrations
	 	ISO 8528 part 9
	-

	 	Design
	 	EN 12100
	-

	 	Pipe design calculations
	 	EN 13480 and DIN 2413
	 

	 	Note for Lihir Power Barge: piping
on pre-fabricated units, modules, generating sets
will be as per manufacturer’s standards.	 	 
	 

	 	Other external piping design standard will be
made in accordance with ANSI standard
system.	 	 
	-

	 	Welding
	 	EN 1011
	-

	 	Stair and platforms
	 	ISO
	-

	 	Dimensional standards for installation

materials (pipes, beams, etcetera)
	 	DIN, ISO, SFS and EN
	-

	 	Pressure equipment
	 	PED 97/23/EC
	-

	 	Typical material standards
	 	DIN and EN







Explanation to abbreviations



	 	 	 
	DIN:

	 	German Standard (Deutsche Institute für Normung)
	EN:

	 	European Standard
	ISO:

	 	The International Organization for Standardization







Electrical systems




The electrical systems are designed, manufactured, constructed and installed to applicable
parts according to the following standards:



	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	Code
	-

	 	Generator
	 	IEC 60034
	-

	 	Transformer, oil type
	 	IEC 60076
	-

	 	Transformer, dry type
	 	IEC 60726
	-

	 	Enclosure protection
	 	IEC 60529
	-

	 	WOIS workstation hardware
	 	IEC 60950
	-

	 	WOIS workstation software
	 	Applicable parts of VDE 3699
	-

	 	Earthing network
	 	IEEE 80
	-

	 	Control panels
	 	IEC 60439-1
	-

	 	PLC software
	 	IEC 61131-3
	-

	 	Lighting installation
	 	IEC 60589
	-

	 	Protection of structures against lightning
	 	IEC 1024






	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 13 of 81






 









 





 
	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






     Explanation to abbreviations



	 	 	 
	IEC:

	 	International Electrotechnical Commission
	IEEE:

	 	Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
	EN:

	 	European Standard
	VDE:

	 	The Association for Electrical, Electronic & Information Technologies






	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 14 of 81






 









 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







A POWER GENERATION




A1 GENERATING SET







Figure 2 Example of a Wärtsilä 20V32 generating set arrangement




The Wärtsilä 20V32 engine and generator are mounted on a common base frame. The common base
frame is flexibly mounted on a foundation by means of steel springs.




The Wärtsilä 20V32 generating set main dimensions are6:



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Length
	 	 		 	 	
	Width
	 	 		 	 	
	Height
	 	 		 	 	
	Weight
	 	 		 	 	






A1.1 ENGINE





8 Wärtsilä 20V32 engine




General Engine Description




The engine is of the four stroke, direct injected, trunk piston, turbocharged and
intercooled design.




The engine is designed for continuous operation at any load between 30 — 100% and can
be started and stopped on heavy fuel oil provided that the fuel is heated to operating
temperature. The engine can be operated between 10 — 30 % load of rated power maximum
10 hours after which it has to be operated at minimum 70 % load for minimum one hour.




Engine main data



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Configuration	 	V 	engine form
	Number of cylinders
	 	 		 	 	 
	Cylinder bore
	 	 		 	 	
	Stroke
	 	 		 	 	








 




			
	6	 	The dimensions and weight may vary depending on the generator make and type.





	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 15 of 81






 









 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Speed
	 	 		 	 	
	Mean piston speed
	 	 		 	 	
	Mean effective pressure
	 	 		 	 	
	Swept volume per cylinder
	 	 		 	 	
	Compression ratio
	 	 		 	 	 
	Number of inlet valves
	 	 		 	 	 
	Number of outlet valves
	 	 		 	 	 
	Direction of rotation faced towards flywheel
	 		 	 	 
	Length
	 	 		 	 	
	Width
	 	 		 	 	
	Height
	 	 		 	 	
	Weight
	 	 		 	 	







Engine block




The engine block is made of nodular cast iron and is of stiff and durable design to absorb
internal forces. The engine block carries the underslung crankshaft. The nodular cast iron
main bearing caps are fixed from below by two hydraulically tensioned studs. The caps are
fixed sideways by hydraulically tensioned horizontal side studs. Together they provide a
rigid crankshaft bearing. The inlet air receiver and the cooling water and lubricating oil
channels are integrated into the engine block. The engine is provided with an oil sump,
mounted against the engine block and sealed by an o-ring gasket.




Crankshaft




The crankshaft is forged from one piece of high tensile steel. Counterweights are fitted on
the crankshaft webs. The high degree of balancing results in an even and thick oil film for
all bearings. The main bearings and the crankpin bearings have a steel backing and a soft
running layer with excellent corrosion resistance.




Connecting rod




The connecting rod is of the drop forged, totally machined type. The connecting rod is of
three-piece design with a horizontal split at the crankpin bearing and a flanged connection
to the rod. The oil supply for the piston cooling, gudgeon pin bush and piston skirt
lubrication takes place through a single drilling in the connecting rod.




Cylinder liner




The cylinder liner is centrifugally cast iron with special alloy elements to create wear
resistance and high strength. The liner is of stiff bore cooled collar design and supported
symmetrically at the top of the engine block. It is equipped with an anti-polishing ring at
the top, preventing bore polishing.




Piston




The piston consists of an oil cooled steel crown bolted on to a nodular cast iron skirt. The
piston crown has two compression rings and one oil scraper ring. The piston skirt and
cylinder liner are lubricated by a patented pressurized lubricating system utilizing
lubricating nozzles in the piston skirt. This system ensures excellent running behavior, and
constant low lubrication oil consumption.



	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 16 of 81






 









 





 
	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







Cylinder head




The cylinder head is made of nodular cast iron. Ample height and the stiff design allow only
four hydraulically tightened studs to fix the cylinder head on to the cylinder block/liner.
Each cylinder head has two inlet and two exhaust valves, all equipped with rotators. The
exhaust valves are made of Nimonic and the exhaust valve seat rings are water cooled.




Camshaft and valve mechanism




The cams are integrated in the drop forged camshaft material. The bearing journals are made
of separate pieces that are fitted to the camshaft sections by means of flanged connections.
This design allows lateral dismantling of the camshaft sections. The camshaft bearings are
located in integrated bores in the engine block casting. The camshaft is driven from the
crankshaft through a fully integrated gear train.




Fuel Oil System




All the high pressure fuel injection equipment is located in a closed compartment with a removable
cover (“hot box”), providing maximum reliability and safety for preheated heavy fuel.




The fuel
system comprises the following equipment:




	 	•	 	Low pressure pipes made of steel
	 
	 	•	 	High pressure pipes, double wall with common leak alarm
	 
	 	•	 	Injection pumps, individual for each cylinder
	 
	 	•	 	Pneumatic stop cylinder at each injection pump
	 
	 	•	 	Fuel injector in each cylinder
	 
	 	•	 	Fuel limiter to limit smoke at start up
	 
	 	•	 	Solenoid valve for fuel limiter at start up






Lubricating Oil System




The lubricating oil system lubricates the main moving parts of the engine and also
cools the piston tops. The engine has a wet lubricating oil sump.




The lubricating oil system comprises the following
equipment:




	 	•	 	Pipes made of steel
	 
	 	•	 	Oil sump of wet type
	 
	 	•	 	Engine driven main lubricating oil pump with pressure regulating valve
	 
	 	•	 	Pre-lubricating pump with electrical motor
	 
	 	•	 	Lubricating oil cooler
	 
	 	•	 	Lubricating oil thermostatic valve
	 
	 	•	 	Lubricating oil automatic back-flushing fine filter, with integrated
safety filter
	 
	 	•	 	Centrifugal filter to clean the back-flushing oil from the automatic
filter 
	 
	 	•	 	Start up/running in filters
	 
	 	•	 	Non-return valves in oil supply pipes
	 
	 	•	 	Crankcase ventilation pipe






Starting Air System




The Wärtsilä 32 engine is started by means of compressed air with a nominal pressure of 30
bar. The start is performed by direct injection of air into the cylinders through starting
air valves in the cylinder heads.




The starting air system comprises the following equipment:



	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 17 of 81






 









 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009








	 	•	 	Pipes made of steel
	 
	 	•	 	Starting air master valve, electrically and manually operated
	 
	 	•	 	Start blocking valve to prevent starting when turning gear is
engaged
	 
	 	•	 	Starting air distributor
	 
	 	•	 	Starting air valves in A-bank cylinder heads
	 
	 	•	 	Air container for emergency stop system
	 
	 	•	 	Flame arrestors






Cooling Water System




The engine cooling system is divided into three circuits, the jacket cooling circuit, the
1st stage charge air cooler circuit and 2nd stage charge air cooler circuit.




The cooling water system comprises the following equipment:




	 	•	 	Pipes made of steel
	 
	 	•	 	Engine driven pump for jacket cooling circuit
	 
	 	•	 	Engine driven pump for low temperature cooling circuit
	 
	 	•	 	Non-return valves after circulating pumps






Combustion air system




The compressor side of the turbocharger feeds air into the cylinders via the charge air
cooler. The engine is equipped with one turbocharger per cylinder bank. The turbocharger is
of the axial turbine type.




The combustion air system comprises the following equipment:




	 	•	 	Compressor on the turbocharger
	 
	 	•	 	1st stage charge air cooler
	 
	 	•	 	2nd stage charge air cooler
	 
	 	•	 	Fresh water cleaning device for the compressor






Exhaust Gas System




The engine mounted exhaust gas pipes are made of cast iron, with separate sections for each
cylinder. Stainless steel bellows are installed between the sections to absorb heat
expansion. The pipes are fixed by brackets, but are free to move axially. The engine exhaust
gas pipes are fully covered by an insulation box.




The exhaust gas system comprises the following equipment:




	 	•	 	Single Pipe Exhaust System (SPEX) exhaust manifold with bellows
	 
	 	•	 	Flexibly mounted insulation box
	 
	 	•	 	Turbine on the turbocharger
	 
	 	•	 	Fresh water turbine washing system






Speed & Load Regulating System




Speed control of the engine is provided by using an electronic governor and a hydraulic
actuator mounted on the engine. The electronic governor is provided with a starting fuel
limiter and load ramp controller which assures that the air to fuel ratio is kept within
acceptable limits at starting and when the load setting is changed, thus limiting smoke
during start-up and loading. The engine has an overspeed protection system, working
independently from the speed governing system.




The engine is provided with the following control and protection equipment.



	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 18 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	•	 	Pneumatic starting fuel limiter and load ramp
controller
	 
	 	•	 	Electro-pneumatic overspeed trip device
	 
	 	•	 	Speed measuring system, with magnetic pick-ups for engine an turbocharger speed






Temperature measurements are fitted on the engine for reading following
temperatures:




	 	•	 	Fuel oil before the engine
	 
	 	•	 	Lubricating oil before lubricating oil
cooler
	 
	 	•	 	Lubricating oil after lubricating oil
cooler
	 
	 	•	 	Cooling water before engine
	 
	 	•	 	Cooling water after turbocharger
	 
	 	•	 	Cooling water after engine
	 
	 	•	 	Cooling water before the charge air cooler
	 
	 	•	 	Cooling water after charge air cooler
	 
	 	•	 	Cooling water after the lubricating oil
cooler
	 
	 	•	 	Charge air in the air receiver
	 
	 	•	 	Exhaust gas after each cylinder






Sensors for Alarm and Monitoring




One set of sensors fitted on the engine to be connected to an alarm and monitoring unit in
the control board specified in section A4, the sensors are wired to terminal box for
electrical cables.




Other Included Items




	 	•	 	Flywheel with fixing bolts
	 
	 	•	 	Electrical motor driven turning
device
	 
	 	•	 	Counter flanges for pipe connection
	 
	 	•	 	Indicator valves in the cylinder
heads
	 
	 	•	 	Safety valves in cylinder head
	 
	 	•	 	Terminal box for electric cables
	 
	 	•	 	The engine has one coat of priming paint and one coat of finishing paint






8 Turbocharger cleaning device



A1.2 GENERATOR





8 Generator




Generator type




The generator is of the synchronous, three-phase, brushless, salient pole type.




Generator main data



	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Generator apparent power
	 	 		 	
	Rated power factor
	 	 		 	 
	Nominal voltage
	 	 		 	
	Rated current (In)
	 	 		 	
	Voltage adjustment range
	 	 		 	
	Frequency
	 	 		 	
	Speed
	 	 		 	
	Overspeed
	 	 		 	
	Continuous short circuit current
	 		 	 






	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 19 of 81






 









 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	 	 
	Insulation class

	 	F
	Temperature rise

	 	B
	Cooling method

	 	Air cooled
	Enclosure

	 	IP23
	Standard

	 	IEC60034







Generator construction




The generator is designed to operate together with reciprocating engines. The stator frame is
constructed with a rigid welded steel structure. The stator core is build of thin electric
steel sheet laminations. The rotor consists of a shaft and salient pole type main revolving
field.




The generator achieves very high efficiency because of the exceptional thermal
conductivity created by the tight fit between the coils and the stator core.




Terminals




The six stator winding ends are brought to the terminal boxes on the generator sides.
Terminals for monitoring and auxiliary equipment have separate terminal boxes.




Damper winding




The generator is provided with a damper winding for parallel operation with other
generators and with a separate power grid.




Shaft and bearing




The generator is horizontally mounted and provided with two sleeve bearings. The generator
rotor is designed to minimise the effect of torsion rotor oscillations due to system
disturbances and rapid load changes.




Excitation




The exciter is of the brushless type with a rotating armature/rectifier assembled on the same
shaft as the main generator rotating armature. The exciter field is controlled by the
automatic voltage regulator (AVR). The rectifiers are of the silicon diode type in a full
wave bridge arrangement. The rotating armature and stationary field of the exciter are
insulated with Class F materials.




Cooling (air cooled)




The generator is air cooled. A fan mounted on the generator shaft takes cooling air from
the engine hall, through washable filters, and passes it through the generator.




Automatic voltage regulator




The voltage regulator is of a completely solid state type for control of generator voltage
by means of controlling the exciter field. The regulator controls the generator exciter
field as required to maintain a constant and stable generator output voltage. (The AVR is
installed in the engine generator set control panel).



	 	 	
	Voltage regulation accuracy
	 	
	- within power range
	 	
	- within speed range
	 	
	Voltage setting range
	 	






	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 20 of 81






 









 





 
	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







Accessories




The following accessories are included with the generator:




	 	6	 	PT-100 elements in stator windings
	 
	 	2	 	PT-100 elements for bearings
	 
	 	1	 	Anti condensation heater
	 
	 	1	 	Voltage transformer for excitation power and measurement
	 
	 	1	 	Current transformer for measurement
	 
	 	3	 	Current transforms for protection





A1.3 BASE FRAME




     8 Common base frame




The engine and generator are rigidly mounted on a common base frame. The base frame is
of a rigid welded steel box construction, which facilitates straightforward and fast
installation and alignment of the engine and generator at site.




8 Fastening equipment (set)




Equipment for fastening the engine and generator to the common base frame, including:
bolts nuts, washers and steel chocks.



A1.4 ELASTIC MOUNTING





The common base frame is mounted on elastic elements to reduce the transmission of
dynamic forces to the foundation. The size of the foundation is thereby reduced
compared with traditional rigid type generator set mounting to foundations. With this
elastic mounting, the common base frame is completely isolated from the foundation and
thus not affected by the difference in thermal expansion coefficient between the
foundation and the common base frame. The structure borne noise level is also greatly
reduced with an elastic mounting design.




8 Steel springs (set)




Steel spring type vibration isolation units are installed between the common base frame
and the steel foundation. The number of steel spring units for each type of generator
set is determined by the weight of the generating set and an analysis of the natural
frequency of the rigid body. A fitting plate is installed between the common base frame
and the steel spring packages to adjust to the level of the surface of the foundation.



A1.5 COUPLING





8 Flexible coupling




A flexible coupling between the engine flywheel and the generator transmits the torque
from the engine to the generator. By using a flexible coupling the crankshaft is not
loaded by any external bending forces. The elements in the coupling are made of rubber.



A1.7 CONNECTIONS




	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 21 of 81






 









 







	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






8 Flexible connections between engine and external piping




Flexible hoses and bellows are provided for installation between the generating set and
external piping systems, to minimise the transmission of engine vibrations to the plant
piping systems.




Flexible connections are supplied for the following auxiliary systems:




	 	•	 	Starting/control air
	 
	 	•	 	Cooling water
	 
	 	•	 	Lubricating oil
	 
	 	•	 	Exhaust gas
	 
	 	•	 	Fuel
	 
	 	•	 	Crankcase ventilation






The following is included:




	 	1	 	Flexible hoses and gaskets (set)
	 
	 	1	 	Cooling water bellows (set)
	 
	 	2	 	Exhaust gas bellows
	 
	 	2	 	Charge air bellows compensator





A1.8 PLATFORMS





8 Engine maintenance platform prefabricated




Partly prefabricated maintenance platforms are provided for easy maintenance and access
to the engine. To minimize vibrations, the platforms and stairs are freestanding on the
floor and not connected to the engine. The engine platforms are designed for a
distributed load of 4 kN/m2.



A2 MECHANICAL AUXILIARY SYSTEMS





The proper function of the power barge depends on the mechanical auxiliary systems. The
proposed systems have been optimised for this particular application. The function of
these systems is to provide the engine with fuel, lubricating oil, starting air,
cooling water, and charge air, of the required quantity and quality, as well as to
dispose of exhaust gases in a proper manner.



A2.0 AUXILIARY MODULES





To secure installation quality and reduce erection time, Wärtsilä has developed a
prefabricated auxiliary module which is installed at the front end of the engine. This
module contains several pieces of auxiliary equipment (listed below) which are
completely installed and fitted at the shop, which saves significant pipefitting and
installation time at site. The complete auxiliary module is pressure and function
tested, and then flushed, painted, and corrosion protected prior to shipment. All
external connection points are sealed and covered with steel plates.




	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 22 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







8 Engine auxiliary module with integrated compact booster





Figure 3 Illustration of a typical engine auxiliary module




The following is included:




	 	1	 	Fuel oil filter
	 
	 	1	 	Fuel booster pump
	 
	 	1	 	Return fuel pump
	 
	 	1	 	Fuel oil cooler
	 
	 	1	 	Return fuel tank
	 
	 	1	 	Pre heating unit
	 
	 	1	 	Thermostatic valve high temperature water system
	 
	 	1	 	Thermostatic valve low temperature water system
	 
	 	1	 	Steam heater
	 
	 	1	 	Piping and insulation
	 
	 	1	 	Valves and gauges
	 
	 	1	 	Module control panel:
	 
	 	 	 	The module control panel includes breakers and controls for the electrical motors
and heaters of the engine generator set as indicated below. It is also equipped with
indicating lamps and alarms. The panel controls the following motors and heaters (if
applicable):





	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 23 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	§ 	 	Generator
anti-condensation heaters
	 
	 	§ 	 	Prelubricating oil pump
	 
	 	§ 	 	Fuel booster pump
	 
	 	§ 	 	Turning gear motor
	 
	 	§ 	 	Preheating circulating pump
	 
	 	§ 	 	High temperature cooling circuit preheaters
	 
	 	•	 	Air filters (if
motorised)
	 
	 	§ 	 	Outlet socket 16A






8 Exhaust gas module




To secure installation quality and reduce erection time, Wärtsilä has developed a
prefabricated exhaust gas module. This module contains several pieces of exhaust gas
equipment (listed below) which are completely installed and fitted at the shop. Some of the
components will be separated from the module during transportation and installed again at
site. This saves significant pipefitting and installation time at site. The complete
exhaust gas module is function tested, and then flushed, painted, and corrosion protected
prior to shipment.






Figure 4 Illustration of a typical exhaust gas module




The following is included:




	 	2	 	Charge air silencer
	 
	 	1	 	Exhaust gas branch pipe
	 
	 	1	 	Piping and insulation
	 
	 	1	 	Oil mist separator





	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 24 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






A2.1 FUEL SYSTEM





The main function of the fuel system is to provide the engine with fuel of correct
flow, pressure and degree of purity.



A2.1.1 LIGHT FUEL OIL SYSTEM





Light Fuel Oil System is used in case of operation disturbances and flushing of the
system before maintenance work, before longer stoppages and during start up when the
HFO system is not heated to operation temperature.




1 Light fuel oil feeder unit




	 	1	 	Electric motor driven light fuel oil feeder pump





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Capacity, each
	 	 		 	 	
	Pressure
	 	 		 	 	







	 	1	 	Single strainers on feeder pump suction side
	 
	 	2	 	Pressure regulating valve
	 
	 	1	 	Local control panel
	 
	 	1	 	Steel frame
	 
	 	1	 	Set of interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves






1 Light fuel oil flow meter for total fuel consumption measurement




The meters are of mass flow type with totalizing display.



	 	 	 	 	 
	Accuracy
	 	 	 	







1 Piping and valves light fuel oil system on Power Barge




This includes all necessary piping and valves for the light fuel oil system including
flanges up to the interconnection point.



A2.1.3 HEAVY FUEL OIL SYSTEM (designed for a maximum fuel viscosity of 180 cSt)





Heavy Fuel Oil is the main fuel for the power barge. A preheated engine can be started
directly on HFO provided that the fuel has been circulated through the fuel system and
has achieved the correct temperature and pressure. The engine can also be stopped on
HFO provided that the fuel circulation can be restarted after the outage or the
external system has to stay in operation i.e. fuel must be circulated through the
stopped engine continuously for heating purposes.




The Heavy Fuel System is designed for the agreed project fuel quality specified in
Section A0.3.




2 Heavy fuel oil separator single units




Centrifugal separators are installed to remove water and solids from the fuel. The
separator unit receives fuel from the buffer tank and sends clean fuel to the day tank.






	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 25 of 81






 









 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009










Figure 5 Picture of a typical factory made and tested separator unit




The following is included:




	 	1	 	Separator






Separators of automatic discharge type.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Capacity
	 	 		 	 	







	 	1	 	Delivery pump
	 
	 	1	 	Strainer






Single strainer on pump suction side.




	 	1	 	Steam heater






Steam heaters for the heating of heavy fuel oil.




	 	1	 	Sludge tank
	 
	 	1	 	Sludge pump
	 
	 	1	 	Steel frame
	 
	 	1	 	Control panel






Local control panel for manual and automatic operation.




	 	1	 	Interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves





	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.

	 	Page: 26 of 81







 











 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
 

August 25,
2009
 







	 	2	 	Heavy fuel oil feeder unit






The fuel oil feeder unit supplies the correct fuel flow from the day tank to the booster
unit. The following components are built on a steel frame, which forms a compact skid
unit.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Electric motor driven heavy fuel oil feeder pump	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	 

	 	Pressure
	 	 		 	 	bar
	1

	 	Single strainers on feeder pump suction side	 	 	 	 	 	 
	2

	 	Pressure regulating valve	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Local control panel	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Steel frame	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	The following is included:	 	 	 	 	 	 







	 	1	 	Heavy fuel oil feeder pump
	 
	 	1	 	Automatic filter
	 
	 	1	 	Manual by-pass filter
	 
	 	1	 	Viscosity control system
	 
	 	2	 	Heavy fuel oil flow meter for total fuel consumption measurement






The meters are of mass flow type with totalizing display.




Accuracy
                                        




	 	1	 	Piping and valves heavy fuel oil system on Power Barge






This includes pipes, valves, flanges and gaskets for the heavy fuel oil system up to the interconnection point.




	 	1	 	Heavy fuel oil trace heating material on Power Barge






This includes trace heating piping and other necessary materials for the heavy fuel oil
system up to the interconnection point.




	A2.2	 	 LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM
	 
	 	 	The lubricating oil system provides required lubrication for all moving parts on the
engine. It consists of the engine related lubricating oil system which handles the cooling
and filtration of the lubrication oil and the plant related lubricating oil system, with
storage of new and old lubrication oil.
	 
	 	 	The lubricating oil system consists of the following equipment:





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 27 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
 

August 25,
2009
 







	 	8	 	Lubricating oil separator unit






Centrifugal separators are installed to remove water and solids from the oil.




The following components are built on a steel frame, which forms a compact skid unit.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Separators of automatic discharge type	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	1

	 	Separator delivery pumps	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Single strainers on pump suction side	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Steam heater for the lubricating oil	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Sludge tank	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Sludge pump	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Steel frame	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Local control panel for manual and automatic operation	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves	 	 	 	 	 	 







	 	1	 	Lubricating oil unloading pump unit: fresh oil






The function of the unloading pump unit is to pump new lubricating oil from tanker trucks to
the lubricating oil storage tank. The unloading pumps and auxiliary equipment components are
built on a steel frame, which forms a compact skid unit.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Electric motor driven unloading pumps	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity, each
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	

1

	 	Pressure

Suction filters on pump suction side
	 	 		 	 	bar
	1

	 	Pressure gauges at inlet and outlet pipe	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Steel frame	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Local control panel	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves	 	 	 	 	 	 







	 	1	 	Lubricating oil transfer pump unit (mobile)






The function of the transfer pump unit is to pump lubricating oil to and from the engine when
topping up or changing oil, or to transfer oil to and from drums as needed. The transfer
pumps and auxiliary equipment are built on a wheeled dolly.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Electric motor driven transfer pump	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity, each
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	 

	 	Pressure
	 	 		 	 	bar
	1

	 	Single strainers on pump suction side	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Thermometer on pump suction side	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Local control panel	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Wheeled dolly	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves	 	 	 	 	 	 






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 28 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
 

August 25,
2009
 







	 	1	 	Lubricating oil transfer pump unit (stationary)






The function of the transfer pump unit is to pump lubricating oil from the storage tank to
the engines when topping up or changing oil. The transfer pumps and auxiliary equipment
are built on a steel frame, to form a compact skid unit.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	2

	 	Electric motor driven transfer pump	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity, each
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	 

	 	Pressure
	 	 		 	 	bar
	1

	 	Single strainer on pump suction side	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Local control panel	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Steel frame	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves	 	 	 	 	 	 







	 	1	 	Lubricating oil unloading pump unit: used oil






The function of the unloading pump unit is to pump used lubricating oil from lubricating
oil storage tank to the tanker trucks. The unloading pumps and auxiliary equipment
components are built on a steel frame, which forms a compact skid unit.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Electric motor driven unloading pumps	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity, each
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	 

	 	Pressure
	 	 		 	 	bar
	1

	 	Suction filters on pump suction side	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Pressure gauges at inlet and outlet pipe	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Steel frame	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Local control panel	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves	 	 	 	 	 	 







	 	1	 	Piping and valves lubricating oil system inside Power Barge






This includes all necessary pipes, valves, flanges and gaskets for the plant lubricating
oil system up to the interconnection point.




	 	1	 	Automatic lubricating oil top up system inside Power Barge






This includes all necessary instrumentation, software, pipes, valves, flanges and gaskets
for the automatic plant lubricating oil top up system for all eight engines.




	A2.3	 	COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
	 
	 	 	Compressed air is used for starting the engines and for control and instrument air.
	 
	 	 	Starting air is produced by the starting air compressor unit. Compressed air from the
starting air unit is stored in starting air bottles until it is used for starting the
engine. The pressure equipment is designed, manufactured and tested according to the
European Union directive 97/23/EC “Pressure Equipment Directive”.
	 
	 	 	The starting air system consists of the following main equipment:





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 29 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
 

August 25,
2009
 







	 	2	 	Starting air bottle






The total capacity of the starting air bottles is dimensioned to ensure a total of 17 engine
starts. Each starting air bottle is equipped with necessary accessories. European pressure
vessel inspection certificates are included.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Capacity

	 	 		 	 	m3
	Pressure

	 	 		 	 	bar







	 	1	 	Starting air compressor unit — double






Starting air compressor unit is used for refilling the starting air bottle(s). The
following components are built on a steel frame, which forms a compact skid unit.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Electric motor driven air compressor	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity, each
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	 

	 	Pressure
	 	 		 	 	bar
	1

	 	Electric motor driven air compressor	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity, each
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	 

	 	Pressure
	 	 		 	 	bar
	1

	 	Pressure switch for starting and stopping the electrically driven air compressor (24/30 bar)
	1

	 	Alarm switch for too low starting air pressure to engine (18 bar)	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Oil and water separator	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Control centre for manual and automatic operation	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Pressure reduction valve for control and working air (30/6 bar)	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Steel frame	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves	 	 	 	 	 	 









Figure 6 Picture of a typical starting air compressor unit



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 30 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
 

August 25,
2009
 







	 	2	 	Instrument air compressor unit






The control and working air compressor unit produces control, instrument and working air.
The compressed air is stored in the built-on air bottle until it is distributed to the
different consumers.




 The control and working air compressor and related equipment are
built on a common frame to form a compact unit.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Electrically driven air compressor	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity, each
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	 

	 	Pressure
	 	 		 	 	bar
	1

	 	Compressed air receiver	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Volume
	 	 		 	 	m3
	1

	 	Refrigerated air dryer with control panel	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Dew point
	 	 		 	 	°C
	1

	 	Filter for removal of oil, water and particles	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Common control panel	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Steel frame	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves	 	 	 	 	 	 







	 	2	 	Instrument air bottle






The compressed air is stored in the control air bottle until it is distributed to the different consumers.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Capacity

	 	 		 	 	m3
	Pressure

	 	 		 	 	bar







	 	1	 	Piping and valves compressed air system (set)






	 	 	This includes pipes, valves, flanges and gaskets for the compressed air system up to the interconnection point.
	 
	A2.4	 	COOLING SYSTEM
	 
	 	 	The main task of the cooling system is to provide adequate cooling of critical engine
components such as cylinder jackets, cylinder heads and turbochargers as well as to cool
the lubrication oil and charge air entering the cylinders after it has been compressed by
the turbocharger.
	 
	 	 	The engine cooling water cools the low temperature charge air cooler, lubricating oil
cooler, high temperature charge air cooler and engine jackets in a common single-circuit
radiator.
	 
	 	 	The cooling system consists of the following main equipment:






	 	8	 	Cooling radiator sets






The engines are cooled with remote mounted, horizontal type radiators with electrically
driven induced draft fans. Each engine generator set has its own cooling radiator package
comprising:



	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Radiator cooler circuit	 	 
	 

	 	Frame material
	 	
	 

	 	Tube material
	 	
	 

	 	Fin material
	 	






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 31 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
 

August 25,
2009
 






	 	 	 
	Noise level
	 	61     dB(A) at 40 m distance







1     Support for cooling radiators (set)




The supporting structure is used to ensure adequate cooling air flow through radiator
fans. The supporting structure are fixed with bolts to the power house.




8     Cooling radiator ladder and railings




Radiators are supplied with railings and inspection ladder.




8     Low temperature expansion tanks




1     Piping and valves maintenance water system (set)




This includes pipes, valves, flanges and gaskets for the plant maintenance water system up
to the interconnection point.




1     Piping and valves cooling system




This includes all necessary pipes, valves, flanges and gaskets for the engine cooling
water system up to the interconnection point.




	A2.5	 	CHARGE AIR SYSTEM






The charge air filter protects the engine against impurities in the inlet air and the
charge air silencer reduces the air intake noise from the engine




8     Charge air filter, epoxy coated




The air inlet to the filter is equipped with a vertical weather louvre for removal of
water droplets. The combined oil wetted and dry filter type filter have 2-stage
filtration. The oil wetted contains filter panels that move vertically inside the filter
housing. After a complete revolution the filter elements are soaked in oil where the dust
particles settle in the oil basin. The next dry filter stage consists of several
replaceable filter panels with pleated filter media for increased filtration efficiency.
The filter elements are accessed through a maintenance opening.






Figure 7 Picture of an oil wetted filter and weather louvre



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 32 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
 

August 25,
2009
 







16     Ducting charge air system (set)




This includes all necessary ducts, flanges, gaskets, bolts and nuts for the engine charge air system.




	A2.6	 	 EXHAUST SYSTEM






The exhaust gas of the engine is discharged at the required height through the exhaust gas
silencer and stack pipe. The exhaust gas silencer reduces the exhaust noise from the
engine




8     Exhaust gas silencer




The exhaust gas silencer reduces the noise emission from the engine exhaust outlet.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Noise attenuation

	 	 		 	







8     Set bellows for exhaust gas system




The expansion bellows isolate the exhaust ducting from vibrations and also allow for thermal expansion.




8     Ducting exhaust gas system (set)




This includes ducting for the exhaust gas system between the engine and the exhaust gas stack.




8     Insulation exhaust gas ducting (set)




This includes insulation material and cladding for the exhaust gas ducts inside the engine
hall and in accessible places with a surface temperature over 60 °C up to the exhaust gas
stack.




8     Exhaust gas stack pipe




The exhaust gas of the engine is discharged through the exhaust gas stack. The exhaust gas
stack has the following characteristics:



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Diameter

	 	
	 	 
	Material

	 	
	 	 
	Height above ground level

	 	 		 	







	A2.8	 	 STATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
	 
	A2.8.1	 	OILY WATER SYSTEM






The function of the oily water system is to collect the oily water produced in the Power
Barge, and to separate it into treated water and sludge. The treated water can be mixed
with other effluent flows before discharging from the Power Barge. The sludge is collected
for further disposal.




3     Oily water transfer pump unit




The purpose of the oily water transfer pump unit is to transfer the oily water from oily
water collecting sumps to an oily water buffer tank. The pump is designed for pumping oily
water



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 33 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
 

August 25,
2009
 







which may contain some particulate matter. The following components are built on a steel
frame, which forms a compact skid unit.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Oily water pump (air driven)	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	1

	 	Local control panel for switch-over between manual and automatic operation	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnecting pipes and equipment	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Steel frame	 	 	 	 	 	 







	 	1	 	Oily water feed pump unit






The oily water feed pump is an eccentric screw pump. The unit is installed between the
oily water buffer tank and oily water treatment unit. The control of this pump is
integrated in the control panel of the oily water treatment unit.




	 	1	 	Oily water treatment unit






The plant is equipped with a skid-mounted oily water treatment unit designed for
continuous operation. The system is based on two stage dissolved air flotation system. The
purpose of the first stage is to separate most of the free oil and heavier solids from
water. The second stage is used for removing residual oil and impurities from the water.
The oily sludge and solids removed from the water are pumped to the plant sludge tank.




Chemicals are added to the stage two to achieve better treatment result. The chemical
dosing system contains dosing pumps for coagulant, flocculants and NaOH. The main
components of the unit are: 1 flotation basin for removal of free oil (pre — treatment) 1
flotation basin after chemical addition



	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnecting piping, valves and necessary gauges and sensors
	1

	 	Pump for transfer of oily sludge and separated bottom solids
	1

	 	Pump for transfer of pre-treated water to the stage two
	1

	 	Buffer tank or basin for separated oil with level controllers
	1

	 	Intermediate tank or basin for pre-treated water with level controllers
	1

	 	Discharge pump for treated water
	1

	 	Activated Carbon filter for final polishing of the effluent
	1

	 	Set of heating equipment
	1

	 	Set of pumps for chemical dosing
	1

	 	Local control panel







	 	1	 	Sludge unloading pump unit






The purpose of the sludge loading pump is to transfer the sludge from the sludge tank to a
tank truck. The pump is specially designed for pumping sludge. The main components of the
unit are:



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Oily water pump (pneumatic)	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	1

	 	Set of interconnecting pipes and equipment	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Local control panel for Manual operation	 	 	 	 	 	 






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 34 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
 

August 25,
2009
 







	 	1	 	Piping and valves oily water treatment system (set)






This includes pipes, valves, flanges and gaskets for the oily water system up to the interconnection point.




	A2.8.2	 	WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM






The water supply system provides the different plant systems with water of the correct
amount, pressure and quality based on the raw water quality specified in section A0.




1     Water treatment unit




The water treatment unit is designed for treatment of brackish water, with low organic
matter and suspended solids content i.e. for typical well water, according to the raw
water specification in section A0.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	1

	 	Sand filters 2 x 100% capacity	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Softening unit with 2 x 100% capacity softeners (with NaCl tank)	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Safety cartridge filter with 5 micron mesh size	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Vertical multistage centrifugal high pressure feed pump	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Reverse osmosis housings and membranes	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Chemical cleaning tank and pump	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Local control panel for the system	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Set of interconnection pipes flanges and valves	 	 	 	 	 	 







The raw water should fulfil the requirements listed in section A0.4 of this document.




The target quality of treated water is:



	 	 	 	 	 
	pH at 21°C

	 	
	 	
	Total dissolved solids

	 	
	 	
	Total hardness Ca2+ + Mg2+

	 	
	 	
	Silicate as SiO2

	 	
	 	
	Iron Fe

	 	
	 	
	Suspended solids

	 	
	 	







If the raw water quality is worse than specified, Wartsila reserves right to modify the
treatment system. If additional costs due to modification(s), Wärtsilä shall issue change
order request(s) as per the relevant contract clause.




2     Water booster unit




The water booster unit provides water to various water consumers in the plant. The
following components are built on a steel frame, which forms a compact skid unit.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	1

	 	Pressure tank	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity
	 	 		 	 	l
	 

	 	Pressure
	 	 		 	 	bar(a)
	2

	 	Multi stage centrifugal pump	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Capacity
	 	 		 	 	m3/h
	 

	 	Pressure
	 	 		 	 	bar(a)






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 35 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
 

August 25,
2009
 






	 	 	 
	1

	 	Local control panel with frequency converters for pumps
	1

	 	Steel frame
	1

	 	Set of interconnection pipes flanges and valves







	 	1	 	Piping and valves treated water system (set)






This includes pipes, valves, flanges and gaskets for the water treatment system up to the interconnection point.




	A2.8.3	 	 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM






Fire system requirements depend on the applicable local codes and the requirements of the
Owner’s insurance company. Wärtsilä’s standard plant is equipped with the following
detection and protection devices. If local codes or the insurance company requirements
mandate additional equipment or material, it can be offered at additional cost.





For a detailed description of the fire fighting system, see enclosure “Lihir Power Barge
Fire Protection”, doc. id.: DBAB103090



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 36 of 81







 











 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	1	 	Fire fighting room pump equipment
	 
	 	1	 	Foam systems for tanks
	 
	 	1	 	Engine’s + Fuel treatment water mist systems
	 
	 	1	 	Hydrants and hose cabinets inside
	 
	 	3	 	MFU’s
	 
	 	1	 	Hose reels and foam hose reels
	 
	 	1	 	Switchgear room, CO2 extinguishing system
	 
	 	1	 	Office, Canteen, Corridor sprinkler syst.
	 
	 	1	 	Workshop sprinkler syst.
	 
	 	1	 	Parts store sprinkler syst.
	 
	 	1	 	Outside hydrants and hose equipment
	 
	 	1	 	Detection (incl.tanks)
	 
	 	1	 	Fire fighting main piping and valves
	 
	 	1	 	Standpipe inside
	 
	 	1	 	Foam piping
	 
	 	1	 	All extinguishers (sets)
	 
	 	2	 	Firemans outfits and storage lockers
	 
	 	1	 	UHF radios
	 
	 	1	 	Fire fighting tank, 300 m3






			
	A3	 	ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS






			
	A3.1	 	MAIN SWITCHGEAR






	 	8	 	Neutral point cubicle






	 	 	Consisting of:






	 	1	 	Neutral grounding resistor 5A, 10s
	 
	 	1	 	Single pole disconnector switch
	 
	 	2	 	Current transformer (single phase) for earth fault





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 37 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	8	 	Generator cubicle cable (set)






The cables are XLPE insulated medium voltage cables, unarmoured, between the generator
and the generator cubicle.




	 	8	 	Generator neutral point cable (set)






The cables are XLPE insulated medium voltage cables, unarmoured, between the generator
and the generator neutral point cubicle.




	 	1	 	Trailing cable support systems






Steel support for trailing cables on power barge




	 	1	 	Cable terminations and cable fittings for Wärtsilä supplied cables






			
	A3.2	 	STATION SERVICE SYSTEM






The station service system distributes low voltage electricity to electrical consumers
included in Wärtsila scope of supply.




The station service system consists of the following equipment:




	 	2	 	Station auxiliary transformer






The station auxiliary transformer is a three-phase, two-winding, naturally cooled
distribution transformer.




The station auxiliary transformer is dimensioned with the following ratings:



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Rated power

	 	 		 	 	kVA
	Rated incoming voltage +2x2.5%

	 	 		 	 	V
	Rated outgoing voltage

	 	 		 	 	V
	Standard

	 	 		 	 	 
	Cooling

	 	 		 	 	 





The transformer has the following accessories:





	 	•	 	Voltage bushings
	 
	 	•	 	Thermometer with two signal contacts
	 
	 	•	 	Off-load tap changer, 5 positions, on MV-side
	 
	 	•	 	Earthing terminal
	 
	 	•	 	Rollers
	 
	 	•	 	Lifting and towing lugs






	 	1	 	Blackstart unit






The function of the black start unit is to enable a black-start of the Power Barge when
there is no power supply from the grid.




The black start unit provides power for the auxiliaries (such as the starting air
compressor, pre-lubricating pump and battery charger) which are needed to be able to make a
black-start of the Power Barge.



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 38 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







The Black start system will have a synchronizing facility in the LV Switchboard to enable
load testing.




The black start unit is connected directly to the low voltage switchgear of the
plant. The following components are built on a steel frame, which forms a compact
skid unit. The following is included:




	 	1	 	Diesel generating set





	 	 	 
	Capacity

	 	
	Frequency

	 	







	 	1	 	Light fuel oil tank
	 
	 	1	 	Radiator
	 
	 	1	 	Exhaust gas ducting and silencer
	 
	 	1	 	Interconnecting pipes, valves and flanges (set)
	 
	 	1	 	Electric panel






Electric panel consisting of:




	 	•	 	Main breaker with short circuit and overload protection
	 
	 	•	 	Control system for automatic start/stop at grid failure/recovery
	 
	 	•	 	Alarm system with basic alarm functions
	 
	 	•	 	Monitoring system






	 	1	 	Steel frame
	 
	 	1	 	Container






The acoustic enclosure will attenuate the noise to a level of 80 dB(A) at one meter distance
from the container wall.




	 	2	 	Frequency converter (for heavy fuel oil feeder pump)
	 
	 	1	 	Frequency converter (for light fuel oil feeder pump)
	 
	 	8	 	Frequency converter (for cooling radiator)






The frequency converter controls the rotation speed of the engine cooling radiator fans.
The frequency converters minimize power consumption and noise level of the cooling
radiators.




	 	2	 	Station auxiliary transformer medium voltage cables (set)






The cables are XLPE insulated medium voltage cables, unarmoured, between the station
transformer feeder cubicle and the station auxiliary transformer.




	 	2	 	Station auxiliary transformer low voltage cables (set), (see low voltage cable
section for details)






The cables are PVC insulated low voltage cables, between the station service transformer
and the station low voltage switchboard. Maximum cable length 25 m.



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 39 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	8	 	Radiator panels
	 
	 	1	 	Low voltage cables on power barge (set)






The low voltage cables are installed between the station low voltage switchboard and
the various motor control centres and electrical consumers included in Wärtsilä scope
of supply.




Colouring of wiring;



	 	 	 
	- phase L1

	 	Red
	- phase L2

	 	White
	- phase L3

	 	Blue
	- Neutral

	 	Black (or light blue)
	- Protect earthing, PE

	 	Yellow/Green







In case of one phase power supply, phase wire is red and neutral is black.




Note that colouring of cables/wirng installed to DG-set (engine- generator set) follows
Wärtsilä standard.




	 	1	 	Cable terminations and cable fittings for Wärtsilä supplied cables






All necessary cable terminations, cable fittings and joints for the above mentioned
cables.




			
	A3.3	 	DC SYSTEM






The Power Barge is equipped with a DC system which feeds DC power to the control,
automation, protection and alarm systems needed to ensure safe operation and shutdown
of the plant in case of a failure in the AC based station service system.




	 	2	 	DC system Power Barge control






The DC supply unit consists of:



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	1	 	 	Battery set
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	Type

	 	 		 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	Capacity

	 	 		 	 	Ah
	 	 	 	 	Voltage (DC)

	 	 		 	 	V
	 	2	 	 	Charger(s)
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	Charging current each

	 	 		 	 	A
	 	1	 	 	Distribution switchboard containing:
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	Battery main switch
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	DC system monitoring unit
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	Miniature circuit breakers for DC feeders
	 	 	 	 	 	 







	 	1	 	DC cables on power barge (set),






The DC cables are installed between the Power Barge DC systems and the consumers included in
Wärtsilä scope of supply.




Colouring of wiring;



	 	 	 
	-  ́+ ́ (positive)

	 	Grey
	-  ́ - ́ (negative)

	 	Brown







Note that colouring of cables/wirng installed to DG-set (engine- generator set) follows
Wärtsilä standard



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 40 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







			
	A4	 	AUTOMATION SYSTEM






Control and Supervision Concept for Wärtsilä Power Barge




The control and supervision system is designed for safe, reliable, efficient and easy
operation of the generating sets, their associated auxiliaries and electrical systems.
A modular design allows easy extension of the system.




The Power Barge can be controlled from either the Wärtsilä Operator’s Interface System
(WOIS workstations, CWA901), or from the central control panel/common and generating
set sections (CFA 901 and CFC0_1).




The WOIS workstation, common and generating set control panels are located in the
control room where all the main supervision of the plant takes place. The generating
set control consists of two control panels, the central generating set control panel
and the local generating set control panel, which is placed next to the generating set.




Control modes




The following control modes are available for the generating set control.




By increasing or decreasing the engine fuel supply, the active power can be controlled in:




	 	•	 	MW mode — the generating set power is maintained at a preset value irrespective
of system load or frequency. This is the typical operating mode for a base load Power
Barge supplying an infinite grid.
	 
	 	•	 	Isochronous load sharing — the generating set shares the load with other
generating sets at a constant frequency. This is the typical operating mode when
running in isolation from the grid. This operating mode requires that all the
generating sets have speed controllers suitable for isochronous load sharing.
	 
	 	•	 	Speed droop mode — the generating set shares the load with the grid or other
generating sets according to a speed droop curve. This is the typical operating mode
for smaller grids or in island operation.






By increasing or decreasing the generator voltage, the reactive power can be controlled in:




	 	•	 	Constant Power Factor control — the generating sets power factor is maintained at a
preset value and any changes are produced by the grid or other generating sets. This is
the typical operating mode for a base load Power Barge supplying an infinite grid.
	 
	 	•	 	Voltage droop compensation control — The generating set will share the reactive
load with the other generating sets based on digital communication lines between the
AVR’s when running in island mode. This is the typical operating mode when running
in isolation from the grid. This operating mode requires that all the generating
sets have voltage controllers suitable for voltage droop compensation control.
	 
	 	•	 	Voltage droop mode — the generating set will share the reactive load with the
grid and other generating sets equally in relation to the size of the units. This is
the typical operating mode for smaller grids or in island operation.






The system will automatically switch the operating mode based on the “parallel with
grid” signal. In Auto mode the setting values for active and reactive power will be
according to operator input in WOIS workstation, while in Manual mode they are
determined by the switches in the control panel.




			
	A4.1	 	OPERATOR’S STATION





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 41 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	3	 	WOIS workstation






	 	 	The Power Barge is controlled and supervised from the Wärtsilä Operator Interface System
(WOIS workstation). All actions necessary for the normal operation, such as start and stop of
the generating sets, load increase and load reduction are activated and supervised via the
WOIS workstation, using a mouse, keyboard and display. The operator can also supervise key
data from the plant such as various temperatures and pressures as well as measurements of
electrical variables such as generator power, voltage and frequency. The WOIS workstation
also includes a hardcopy laser printer.
	 
	 	 	WOIS workstation includes the following functionality:






	 	•	 	Process status displays, where the status and operation of the processes are
displayed using various dynamic objects, such as images of pumps, valves and other
components and units. The status of these objects is displayed graphically. By interacting
with an object, the function and operational status can be displayed.
	 
	 	•	 	Process trends can be displayed as a free combination of six (6) measured values such
as pressures, temperatures, speed, generating set load, etc. The operator may combine the
values of interest in one graph to get a good view of the total process for further
analysing. The trends are stored for up to 180 days, and the operator may call back a
trend for any time interval within these limits.
	 
	 	•	 	An alarm banner in the uppermost part of the displays informs about the latest
occurred alarm. The active alarm list informs the operator of possible problems in the
process. An alarm will remain on the active alarm list until the process has returned to
normal state and the alarm has been acknowledged. Historical alarm and event lists can be
called up for further evaluation of events.
	 
	 	•	 	Any of the displays and the alarm list can be printed to the hard copy printer.





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 42 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	 	 
	Figure 8

	 	The picture above is an example of a set of typical WOIS workstation displays;
The Plant Overview display, a process displays, a sensor trend display, a historical
trend display and the alarm event display







The WOIS workstation contains the following equipment:




	 	1	 	Desktop PC computer, 1 GB RAM, min. 80 GB HDD, min 2 GHz processor
	 
	 	1	 	Display, TFT Flatscreen 24” with the resolution of 1920x1200
	 
	 	1	 	Keyboard and optical mouse
	 
	 	1	 	Operating system
	 
	 	1	 	Human-Machine-Interface (HMI) software






	 	1	 	Laser printer for hardcopy and report printing
	 
	 	1	 	WISE workstation






The Wärtsilä Information System Environment (WISE workstation) handles the long term data
storage and reporting functions of the Power Barge. The operator can view and print out
the daily, monthly and yearly reports produced by the reporting program. WISE workstation
keeps the engine and production reports available for later study and archiving. WOIS
workstation is the provider of information to the WISE workstation.




WISE workstation includes the following functionality:



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 43 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	•	 	Daily engine and plant reports of plant analogue measurement values. Daily minimum,
maximum and average values are generated and stored for one year.
	 
	 	•	 	Long term engine and plant performance tracking throughout trend displays of the
reported analogue measurements.
	 
	 	•	 	Daily production reports of generated active and reactive energy as well as hourly
fuel consumption are generated and stored for one year.
	 
	 	•	 	Monthly production reports (on daily level) are stored for 5 years and yearly
production reports are generated and stored for 10 years.
	 
	 	•	 	The production reports include minimum, maximum, average and total sum calculations
for the period.
	 
	 	•	 	Electronic log book with search possibilities for recording of operation and
maintenance activities.







	 	 	 
	Figure 9

	 	The above picture shows a typical WISE workstation daily operation data,
production report and Log book







The WISE workstation contains the following equipment:




	 	1	 	Desktop PC, 1 GB RAM, min. 80 GB HDD, min 2 GHz processor
	 
	 	1	 	Display, TFT Flatscreen 24” with the resolution of 1920x1200
	 
	 	1	 	Keyboard and optical mouse
	 
	 	1	 	Operating system software
	 
	 	1	 	Reporting interface software





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 44 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	1	 	Uninterrupted power supply (UPS)






Uninterrupted power supply is used for control room operator stations.




			
	A4.2	 	CONTROL PANELS






	 	1	 	Central common control panel






The central common control panel (CFA901) contains the operating switches, buttons and
meters for synchronising and the mimic for the plant Medium Voltage system. It also
contains the common PLC system.






	 	 	 	Figure 10 The above illustration shows an example of the central common control panel






The central common control panel (CFA901), contains the following equipment:




	 	1	 	Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) unit for plant control and supervision of
the common systems of the plant. The high grade PLC integrates the control
functions as required by the process and operation sequences.
	 
	 	 	 	The PLC include the following units and devices:






	 	-	 	Power supply for CPU (110 VDC)
	 
	 	-	 	Central Processing Unit (CPU)
	 
	 	-	 	Communication card
	 
	 	-	 	Digital input and output cards
	 
	 	-	 	Analogue input cards





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 45 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	1	 	P1 Double frequency meter (for synchronising)
	 
	 	1	 	P2 Double voltage meter (for synchronising)
	 
	 	1	 	P3 Synchronoscope (for synchronising)
	 
	 	1	 	M2 Manual syncronisation control interface unit with:






	 	-	 	Synchronising mode selector switch (auto/manual)
	 
	 	-	 	Synchronising breaker selector switch for generator and for incoming breaker
	 
	 	-	 	Generating set voltage adjustment switch
	 
	 	-	 	Generating set frequency adjustment
switch
	 
	 	-	 	Synchronising breaker close control pushbutton
	 
	 	-	 	Synchronising order
pushbutton for automatic synchronising






	 	1	 	Auto-synchroniser
	 
	 	1	 	Check synchroniser relay
	 
	 	1	 	Safety relay for emergency circuit
	 
	 	1	 	Mimic diagram for the electrical system
	 
	 	1	 	S20 Emergency stop pushbutton
	 
	 	1	 	S10 Safety relay reset pushbutton






	 	8	 	Central generating set control panel






The central generating set control panel (CFC0_1) contains selectors for the generating set
operating mode, control switches for manual control, the Power Monitoring Unit and the
protection relays. In auto-mode the PLC system performs the starting sequence and stopping
sequence automatically and sets the active load and the power factor references to the
primary controls according to WOIS workstation set points. The PLC monitors the status of
the engine constantly regardless of the running mode. The generating set Input/Output
signals are mainly connected to PLC remote Input/Output modules which are located in the
local generating set control panel (CFE0_1), which also contains the Automatic Voltage
Regulator (AVR) and the hardwired engine shutdown and breaker trip circuits.



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 46 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009









	 	 	Figure 11 The above illustration shows an example of the central generating set
control panel






The central generating set control panel (CFC0_1), contains the following equipment:




	 	1	 	Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) unit for control and supervision of the generating set. The
high grade PLC integrates the control functions as required by the process and operation
sequences. The PLC also handles the start/stop sequence, process measurements and alarms






	 	-	 	Power
supply unit for CPU (110 VDC)
	 
	 	-	 	Central Processing Unit (CPU)
	 
	 	-	 	Communication card
	 
	 	-	 	Analogue
measurement Input — Output card
	 
	 	-	 	Digital Input — Output cards






	 	1	 	Set of conventional panel mounted meters for:






	 	-	 	P1-P3 Current meters, one per phase
	 
	 	-	 	P4 Frequency
meter
	 
	 	-	 	P5 Voltage meter, with selector switch S21
	 
	 	-	 	P6 Engine and turbocharger speed (rpm), with selector switch S22
	 
	 	-	 	P7 Power factor meter
	 
	 	-	 	P8 Reactive power (MVAr) meter
	 
	 	-	 	P9 Active
power (MW) meter





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 47 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	1	 	S20 Generating set emergency stop push-button
	 
	 	1	 	P11 Power monitoring unit (PMU)
	 
	 	 	 	The PMU is a digital power monitoring unit where the generating sets
electrical measurements can be monitored and supervised.
	 
	 	 	 	The PMU includes the following functions:






	 	-	 	Measurement of phase currents, with stored min and max
	 
	 	-	 	Measurement of main and phase voltages, with stored min, max and average
	 
	 	-	 	Measurement of frequency
	 
	 	-	 	Calculation of Active, Reactive and Apparent power
	 
	 	-	 	Calculation of Active and reactive Energy, imported, exported and total
	 
	 	-	 	Calculation of harmonic distortions
	 
	 	-	 	Calculation of power factor
	 
	 	-	 	Measurement of
engine running hours






	 	1	 	K1 Generator protection relay
	 
	 	 	 	The digital programmable multi-function protection relay is connected to current
and voltage transformers in the generator cubicle and in the generators main
terminal box.
	 
	 	 	 	The protection relay has the following protection
functions:






	 	-	 	Over and under voltage protections
	 
	 	-	 	Over and
under frequency protection
	 
	 	-	 	Reverse power protection
	 
	 	-	 	Over current and short circuit protection
	 
	 	-	 	Stator earth fault
protection
	 
	 	-	 	Loss of excitation protection
	 
	 	-	 	Negative sequence
(unbalance) over current protection






	 	1	 	K2 Differential protection relay
	 
	 	1	 	M1 Manual control interface unit with:






	 	-	 	Generator set control mode selector switch (Auto-Manual)
	 
	 	-	 	Active power control mode selector switch (Speed droop-kW/isoch control )
	 
	 	-	 	Reactive power control mode selector switch (Voltage droop — p.f. control)
	 
	 	-	 	Engine power control switch (decrease-increase)
	 
	 	-	 	Generator voltage control
switch (decrease-increase)
	 
	 	-	 	Synchronising select and start of synchronisation
control switch
	 
	 	-	 	Engine start pushbutton with engine running indication light
	 
	 	-	 	Engine stop pushbutton with engine stopped indication light
	 
	 	-	 	Breaker close
pushbutton with breaker closed indication light
	 
	 	-	 	Breaker open pushbutton with
breaker opened indication light
	 
	 	-	 	Engine
shutdown indication light with reset pushbutton
	 
	 	-	 	Breaker trip indication light
with reset pushbutton
	 
	 	-	 	Indication lamp testing pushbutton






	 	8	 	Local generating set control panel






The local generating set control panel, CFE0_1, contains the following equipment:




	 	1	 	Remote Input-Output unit for PLC






	 	-	 	Power supply unit (24 VDC)





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 48 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009







	 	-	 	Remote communication card
	 
	 	-	 	Digital Input — Output cards
	 
	 	-	 	Analogue Input — Output cards






	 	1	 	Automatic voltage regulator (AVR) for the generator
	 
	 	1	 	S1 Emergency stop push-button
	 
	 	1	 	Safety relay for emergency circuit






			
	A4.5	 	CABLES AND ACCESSORIES






	 	1	 	Control and instrumentation cables (as per Wärtsilä standard)






Control and instrumentation cables for delivered equipment including necessary joints
and fittings.




			
	A5	 	HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM






			
	A5.1	 	STEAM GENERATION SYSTEM






			
	A5.1.1	 	STEAM GENERATION SYSTEM FOR FUEL HEATING






The pressure equipment is designed, manufactured and tested according to the European
Union directive 97/23/EC “Pressure Equipment Directive”.




The steam generation system generates steam to be used for fuel heating in the Power
Barge. Steam is generated by recovered waste heat from the engine exhaust gas. A
standby fuel fired boiler is supplied for backup use. The system is designed based on
an “N+1 redundancy principle” including the fuel fired boiler.




Steam flows from the heat recovery boilers to a steam header for distribution to the
steam consumers in the plant. A non-return valve on the steam outlet of the drum
prevents backflow when the boiler is not in use. Condensate is collected in the feed
water tank and returned to the boilers by the feed water pumps.




A fuel fired boiler is provided to generate steam when the engines are not running or
when the exhaust gas boilers require maintenance.




	 	3	 	Exhaust gas boiler






The exhaust gas boiler is a verticall smoke tube type.




Capacity at boiler outlet at Stated Ambient Conditions as specified in
 engine load and clean heat exchanger surfaces:



	 	 	 
	Steam generation

		   kg/h saturated steam
	- at feed water temperature

		   °C
	Working steam pressure

		    bar(a)









The following is included:




	 	1	 	Inlet and outlet hoods with inspection doors
	 
	 	1	 	Modulating exhaust gas by-pass damper with actuator





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 49 of 81







 











 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009







	 	1	 	Manual steam soot blowing equipment
	 
	 	1	 	Shut-off valves
	 
	 	1	 	Blow-down drain
	 
	 	1	 	Safety valve
	 
	 	1	 	Relief valve
	 
	 	1	 	Pressure switches
	 
	 	1	 	Level switches
	 
	 	1	 	Level control device
	 
	 	1	 	Insulation and cladding
	 
	 	1	 	Counter flanges, bots, nuts and gaskets
	 
	 	1	 	Mounting supports
	 
	 	1	 	Boiler service platform






1 Heat recovery container




Auxiliary equipment for the steam generation system is installed into a standard 40 foot
container. All installation, piping, insulation, cabling, painting and testing of the
equipment inside the container is done at the factory where the container is assembled, thus
saving installation time at site.




The following is included:




1 Feed water tank




The feed water tank is of the “hot well type” working at atmospheric pressure. It
receives condensate from the steam consumers and make-up water from the water treatment
system. The feed water tank is insulated and located on top of the container.




2 Feed water pump




The feed water pump pumps feed water from the feed water tank to the boilers at the
appropriate pressure.




1 Chemical dosing unit




The chemical dosing unit adds chemicals to the feed water in order to prevent corrosion
and scaling in the boiler system.




1 Blow-down tank




Blow down water from the boilers is lead via the blow down tank to the drain. The blow
down tank can be cooled by tap water when needed. Blow down is performed at regular
intervals in order to prevent the accumulation of chemical compounds in the steam system.



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 50 of 81






 









 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009







1 Local control panel




The local control panel contains the components for controlling and operating the steam
system as described above.




1 Light fuel oil fired boiler for steam generation




An independent oil fired boiler is supplied for use when the exhaust gas boilers are not
in use, for example during the start-up of the Power Barge. It is also used for heating
the heavy fuel system during outages.




The auxiliary boiler unit includes:




	 	•	 	Evaporator section
	 
	 	•	 	LFO burner
	 
	 	•	 	LFO pump
	 
	 	•	 	Combustion air fan
	 
	 	•	 	Steam pressure gauge
	 
	 	•	 	Pressure switches
	 
	 	•	 	Temperature switches
	 
	 	•	 	Level control device
	 
	 	•	 	Main closing valve for steam
	 
	 	•	 	Non-return valve at steam outlet
	 
	 	•	 	Safety valves
	 
	 	•	 	Local control panel
	 
	 	•	 	Interconnection pipes, flanges and gaskets






Capacity at boiler outlet at Stated Ambient Conditions as specified in section A.0.2 and
clean heat exchanger surfaces:



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Steam generation
	 	 		 	 	kg/h saturated steam
	 

	 	- at feed water temperature
	 	 		 	 	°C
	 

	 	Working steam pressure
	 	 		 	 	bar(a)







1 Oil detector




The oil detector detects if the condensate return coming to the feed water tank contains oil.
If oil is detected condensate will be dumped into the drain system and an alarm will be given
to the control system.




1 Steam header




Steam from all the boilers is collected to the steam header and forwarded onwards to the
steam consumers. Shut-off valves are installed on each incoming and outgoing line from the
steam header. The steam header also functions to separate possible water droplets in the
steam and drain them to the condensate return system.




1 Boiler washing water pump




Boiler washing water pump transfers dirty water from the boiler washing water tank to the
water treatment system.



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 51 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009







1 Piping, valves and insulation for steam generation system for fuel
heating (set)




Pipes, flanges, gaskets, bolts, nuts, expansion compensation, condensate traps and air
vents together with insulation and metal sheet cladding needed for insulation of the
steam pipes included in Wärtsilä’s scope of supply.




	A7	 	 TOOLS






1 Engine maintenance tools (set)




This includes the special tools needed for normal maintenance of the engine.




1 Engine hand tools (set)




This includes normal hand tools needed for normal maintenance of the engine.




1 Tools for turbocharger (set)




This includes the special tools needed for normal maintenance of the turbocharger.




1 HFO separator tools (set)




Set of special tools for maintenance.




1 Lubricating oil separator tools (set)




Set of special tools for maintenance.




	A8	 	SPARE PARTS






1 Commission consumable parts for 8 engines




Wärtsilä will replace any part which is found defective or which is damaged by
Wärtsilä personnel during start up of the plant.




The commissioning spare parts list includes parts which are susceptible for damage
during installation and commissioning.




These parts are the property of Wärtsilä and unused parts will be removed from the
plant after commissioning.



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 52 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009







	B	 	CIVIL WORKS: HULL (B1) AND STRUCTURES ON CARGO DECK (B2)
	 
	 	 	This Civil’s technical specification provides the reader with the basic technical data
and information required for evaluation of the plant’s technical features and
performance, as well as Wärtsilä’s Civil’s (Superstructure) scope of supply.
	 
	 	 	The proposed project is designed, engineered and will be delivered by Wärtsilä Finland
Oy in accordance with this technical specification.
	 
	B1	 	HULL
	 
	 	 	General
	 
	 	 	The construction is made according to the requirements of Classification Society and
considering the results of vibration and noise studies. The hull is designed for power
generation. All structures, stiffening and reinforcements are designed to carry the
actual loads of eight (8) W20V32 generating sets and related auxiliaries.
	 
	 	 	Materials
	 
	 	 	Mild steel, material grade A, is used for hull structures in general. All hull
materials are approved by the Classification Society.
	 
	 	 	Standard materials, fittings and equipment are used as far as practicable, if not
otherwise mentioned, in order to achieve easy maintenance and low replacement cost.
	 
	 	 	All materials, equipment, appurtenances and outfit which are supplied by the Wärtsilä
are new, good quality, suitably selected for the purpose they are to serve and
especially taking into account the service intended for the Barge and of well
recognized make and of the latest type or model at the time of ordering within the
limits of this specification.
	 
	 	 	Construction tests
	 
	 	 	Structural strength and watertightness of decks, bulkheads, hatchway covers, weather
and splashtight doors, ventilator coamings, tanks and piping systems are tested to
assure effective performance. tanks are tested using industrial fresh water.
	 
	 	 	Workmanship and welding
	 
	 	 	The hull is of fully welded construction corresponding to the requirements of the
Classification Society.
	 
	 	 	Below main deck rooms and technical spaces:






	 	•	 	Fuel treatment room
	 
	 	•	 	Sewage room
	 
	 	•	 	Bilge water central (preliminary);
	 
	 	 	 	Containing bilge pump and valves. All compartions in the hull is connected by pipes to the
bilge water central. The bilge water is pumped to the oily water settling tank.The preliminary
location of the bilge water central is under the fuel treatment room. The access is from the fuel
treatment room.
	 
	 	•	 	Oily water treatment room
	 
	 	•	 	Water treatment room
	 
	 	•	 	Air-, sounding-, bilge-, (ballast if applicable) and draining pipes
	 
	 	•	 	Tanks





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 53 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009







Maintenance




The structure and layout of the Barge and equipment designed and constructed permits
ready access to all parts for inspection, maintenance and repair without disturbance of
other structure or equipment.




Pumps, heaters, etc. have isolating valves to enable independent maintenance of the
units. 


Permanent stairs, ladders, doors, manholes, scuttles, bolted plates, etc. are
provided for access. Ladders and stairs are bolted or otherwise easily removable in
external and machinery spaces.


 Battens and gratings in store rooms and other spaces and
protective casings around pipes are made readily removable.




Special care is exercised in the location of manholes and access holes to tanks,
bilges, drain wells, machinery or equipment foundations and other places difficult to
access.




Restriction of access openings by pipes and valves is avoided and ladders and stairs
are located in line with openings.




In places where the lodgment of oil or water may take place, adequate draining
possibility is provided. Oil drip pans are provided under all oil using equipment.




All tanks and compartments as part of the hull structure are provided with venting and
sounding means with striker plates, and manholes




Temporary navigation lights




Temporary navigation lights are during transportation installed on the Power Barge.
Common practice has been that the haulage company is temporary installing the
navigation lights. When the haulage is finnish they are taken off.




B1.0 CLASSIFICATIONAND REGULATIONS




Classification and flag
state 


The class mark is:




Germanischer Lloyd (GL) or the American Bureau of Shipping (ABS).




If required by the Buyer, the flag state can be the Republic of Panama. The Buyer will
inform the Supplier no later than 4 months prior to Delivery (in accordance with clause
5.2(a) of the Contract).




Rules and Regulations




The hull complies with following conventions, regulations and requirements as in force
at the delivery date:




	 	•	 	International Convention on Load Lines 1966 (LL 1966) (701 81.01.E), Supplement relating to
the LL 1966 (1971, 1975, 1979) (705 81.02.E)
	 
	 	•	 	International Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ship, 1969 (TONNAGE 1969) (713
70.81.E)





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 54 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009







	 	•	 	International Tonnage convention Oslo 1965






	B1.1	 	TANK CAPACITIES, SHORE CONNECTIONS
	 
	 	 	Filling volumes are (100%), total :





	 	 	
	Heavy fuel oil buffer tanks (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Heavy fuel oil day tank (1+1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Diesel oil day tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	New lubricating oil storage tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Used lubricating oil tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Maintenance (service) lubricating oil tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Sludge tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Maintenance water tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Raw water tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Fresh water tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Treated water tank (for fresh water) (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Sewage tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Over flow tank (2)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Boiler washing tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	
	Oily water tank (1)

	 	






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 55 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009






	 	 	 
	Fire fighting tank (1)

	 	
	 
	 	 
	Ballast water tanks

	 	If required is depending of on
final design







1 Level Indicators and alarms for under deck tanks (set)




1 Remote readouts, operator, control valves for tanks below deck




Miscellaneous loose tanks are arranged as needed. Fuel tanks will be constructed so as not
to have the walls in contact with outher shell. Void space construction may be used for
this.




Shore connections




Shore connections are arranged on both sides of the hull. The location will be optimised at
final design. The barge will be delivered set up for connecting on only one side, but the
design will allow connection on the other side of the hull if the barge is moved.




Following shore connections are located on bunker station:




Connection sizes below are preliminary, to be determined at final design



	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Used lubrication oil / sludge
	 	DN65
	 
	 

	 	Lubrication oil filling
	 	DN50
	 
	 

	 	Diesel oil filling
	 	DN80
	 
	 

	 	HFO filling
	 	DN100
	 
	 

	 	Fire water
	 	DN80







Following shore connections are located on the sides of the Barge:



	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Sewage
	 	DN65
	 
	 

	 	Fresh water filling
	 	DN50







All shore connections are arranged with international shore connection flange. Flexible
hoses will be provided for all connections.




	B1.2	 	HYDROSTATICS, STABILITY, PRELIMINARY
	 
	 	 	The possible ballasting is executed according to the stability and trim
calculations. The calculation, design and need of ballast tanks are depending on
final design.
	 
	B1.3	 	HULL, LARGE HULL FITTINGS, PAINTING AND CORROSION PROTECTION





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 56 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009







	B1.3.1	 	CONSTRUCTION PRINCIPLES
	 
	 	 	Strength and material thicknesses of the hull
	 
	 	 	Hull strength criteria is according to Classification Rules.
	 
	 	 	Plates exposed to compression stresses are provided with adequate buckling strength.
	 
	 	 	Preliminary hull thicknesses: side plate 10 mm, bottom plate 12 mm and deck plate 12 mm
	 
	B1.3.2	 	LARGE HULL FITTINGS
	 
	 	 	Engine foundations
	 
	 	 	Generator set foundations are integrated to steel structure
	 
	 	 	Machinery foundations
	 
	 	 	Foundations are fabricated of steel plates and rolled sections.
	 
	 	 	Girders or extra webs are fitted below heavy machinery and power house supporting
pillars.
	 
	B1.3.3.	 	PAINTING AND GALVANIZING
	 
	 	 	General
	 
	 	 	All steel material with thickness of 4 mm and over is shot blasted to Sa21/2 according to
International standard ISO 8501-1 and primed with 2-component zincrich prefabrication
primer 12 — 20 my.
	 
	 	 	The detailed painting specification will be subject to the shipyard finally selected
as the constructor and their used paint manufacturer. However, please find below
preliminary specification. The detailed painting specification will be sent to the
Owners for approval a reasonable time before painting work is started.
	 
	 	 	The specification states the accuracy for the treatment of surfaces, the type of paint,
colour scheme, number of coats and coating thickness.
	 
	 	 	Data given by the paint manufacturer regarding the specified painting systems is
followed. 


Where painting is not specified, it is done according to the Shipyard’s
practice after Owners’ approval.
	 
	 	 	Preparation system according to International standards ISO 8501-1, ISO 8501-2 


Dry film
thickness (DFT) is the thickness of coating remaining on surface when coating is
hardened. Nominal dry film thickness (NDFT) is specified for each coat or for the whole
paint system to achieve the required durability.
	 
	 	 	Measurement of total dry film thickness is done according to ISO 12944-5 standard.





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 57 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009







Inspection is carried out according to the list below by the Owner (O), Paint Manufacturer
(P) and Builder (B).



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	Before top	 	 
	 	 	Preparation	 	coats	 	Final inspection
	Exterior
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Below WL

	 	BPO
	 	BPO
	 	BPO
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Above WL

	 	BPO
	 	BPO
	 	BPO
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Decks

	 	BPO
	 	BPO
	 	BPO
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Interior
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Fresh water tanks

	 	BPO
	 	BPO
	 	BPO
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Water and dry tanks

	 	BPO
	 	B O
	 	B O
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Oil tanks

	 	BPO
	 	B O
	 	BPO
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Other spaces

	 	B O
	 	 	 	B O







The Owner and Paint Manufacturer make spot checks during the protection process.



The Builder and Paint Manufacturer make control of weather conditions.




Documentation of inspections and working conditions are given by the Yard to the Owners
and Paint Manufacturer.




Damage to the painting caused by welding, burning etc. is prepared and repainted according to
the specification excluding shop-primer. Instead of sandblasting only small areas are
prepared by power brushing.




Pre-treatment




Explanation of pre-treatment code before painting of welds and damaged prefabrication
primer and surfaces not treated with prefabrication primer.




			
	            ISO 8501-01	 	Light wire brushing

Weld spatter not to be removed

No chamfering






			
	            ISO 8501-1	 	Wire brushing to St 2

Loose spatter to be removed

No chamfering





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 58 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009







			
	            ISO 8501-1	 	Blasting to Sa 2

Loose spatter to be removed

No chamfering






			
	            ISO 8501-1	 	Blasting to Sa 2.5 – 2

Loose spatter to be removed

Light chamfering






The cleaning degree is according to agreed standards (above-mentioned or equal
International standard).




Painting of shell below waterline




  From keel to light loadline



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Cleaning grade
	 	Sa 2.5 – 2	 	 
	 
	 

	 	Painting (typical)
	 	Jotamastic 87 Aluminium
	 	1 × 150 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	Jotamastic 87 grey
	 	1 × 150 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	total
	 	300 μm







Painting of shell above water line



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Cleaning grade
	 	St 2	 	 
	 
	 

	 	Painting (typical)
	 	Jotamastic 87 grey
	 	1 × 150 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	Hardtop AS,

polyurethane topcoat	 	 
	 
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	1 × 50 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	total
	 	200 μm







Painting of weatherdecks



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Cleaning grade
	 	St 2	 	 
	 
	 

	 	Painting (typical)
	 	Jotamastic 87 grey
	 	1 × 125 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	Jotamastic 87
	 	1 × 125 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	total
	 	250 μm






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 59 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009







Painting of HFO, LO and overflow tank



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Cleaning grade
	 	St 2	 	 
	 
	 

	 	Painting (typical)
	 	Balloxy HB Light
	 	2 × 150 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	total
	 	300 μm







Painting of fresh water tanks



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Cleaning grade
	 	St 2	 	 
	 
	 

	 	Painting (typical)
	 	Balloxy HB Light
	 	2 × 150 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	total
	 	300 μm







Painting of ballast water tanks (if applicable)



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Cleaning grade
	 	St 2	 	 
	 
	 

	 	Painting (typical)
	 	Balloxy HB Light
	 	2 × 150 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	total
	 	300 μm







Painting of dry tanks (voids)



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Cleaning grade
	 	St 2	 	 
	 
	 

	 	Painting (typical)
	 	Jotun alkyd primer
	 	1 × 60 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	Total
	 	60 μm







Oily water, sludge and sewage tanks



	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Cleaning grade
	 	St 2






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 60 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002
	 	Document creation
date:
	 	August 25, 2009






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Painting (typical)
	 	Balloxy HB Light
	 	2 × 150 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	Total
	 	300 μm







Painting of technical rooms



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Cleaning grade
	 	St 2	 	 
	 
	 

	 	Painting (typical)
	 	Jotun alkyd primer
	 	1 × 50 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	Pilot II
	 	1 × 50 μm
	 
	 

	 	 	 	total
	 	100 μm







	B1.3.4.	 	CATHODIC PROTECTION
	 
	 	 	Cathodic protection system
	 
	 	 	To avoid need for docking the hull is protected against corrosion by means of Impressed
Current type Cathodic protection system (ICCP), Corrpro brand or equal internationally
recognized brand. Using ICCP is an arrangement of hull mounted anode(s) (type and
number at final design) and four reference cells (number at final design) connected to
a control panel, the ICCP system produces a powerful impressed external current to
suppress the natural electrochemical activity on the wetted surface of the hull.
	 
	B1.3.5.	 	DRAUGHT MARKS, NAME, MARKING OF PAINTING LINES
	 
	 	 	Draught marks
	 
	 	 	Draught marks fore, aft and midship, freeboard and loadline marks are made of steel
plate continuously welded on the shell and painted. Draught marks are indicated in
metric numbers.
	 
	 	 	Name
	 
	 	 	The name is fitted on each side of bow. Name and port of registry is fitted on aft
transom centerline. Names are made of steel plate continuously welded on the shell and
painted. The Seaboard name will be placed on both sides of the power plant building,
made of steel plate, approximately 1 meter high letter size.
	 
	B1.3.6.	 	TOWING, BOLLARDS AND MOORING EQUIPMENT – PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
	 
	 	 	General
	 
	 	 	According to ABS or GL rules.





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 61 of 81







 











 







	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






	 	 	 
	 

	 	Towing and brackets
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	•    Two smith brackets are installed on the bow for towing the Power Barge

	 
	 	 
	 

	 	•    One emergency towing line

	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Bollards
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	•    3 bollards are installed on each side of the hull for mooring

	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Mooring arrangement and equipment on Power Barge
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The design of the mooring system to be based on actual conditions on the final location of the
Barge.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	•    One set of rubber and teflon for mooring, if required

	 
	 	 
	B1.3.7

	 	HULL AND DECK FITTINGS
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	In general, fittings and connections on weather deck are protected by painting.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Exterior Steel Doors, part of hull
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Doors are constructed and installed according to rules and standards. Watertight doors are
equipped with rubber packing, two hinges and six latches, an eyelet for padlock and hand grip.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	•    clear width min.750 mm

	 
	 	 
	 

	 	•    minimum height 1900 mm from the deck

	 
	 	 
	 

	 	•    sill height in way of watertight doors according to rules

	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Manholes
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Manhole and ladder are arranged for all tanks as required. Clear opening is minimum 400 * 600
mm. All manholes are clearly and permanently marked with a name and number of tank/space.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Access and Service Hatches, Inspection Openings
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Clear opening is minimum 600 x 600 mm. Sill height minimum 400 mm if not otherwise required
by the rules.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Stair, Ladders and Steps
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Ladders or steps are provided in way of manholes or access opening where necessary, width
400 mm minimum. Short ladders may be arranged by hook steps welded to the hull. Stairs,
ladders and steps are arranged according to general drawings.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Platforms
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Platforms are arranged in technical spaces. Platforms are made of chequered steel plate or steel
grating fastened with screws.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Railings
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The height of rail or bulwark above the deck is about 1100 mm around the hull. Stanchions and
wire ropes or chains are arranged in a way of bollards and where necessary but only in limited
length.






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 62 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Drain Plugs
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Drain plugs of stainless steel are provided to all tanks to the lowest point with clear markings.
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lifting Eyes
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Lifting eyes are provided above all heavy equipment and elsewhere where necessary.
	 
	 	 	 	 
	B.2	 	SUPERSTRUCTURES ON CARGO DECK
	 
	 	 	 	 
	B2.1	 	DESIGN DATA FOR ON DECK CARGO (POWER HOUSE, STRUCTURES etc.)
	 
	 	 	 	 
	B2.1.1	 	Explanation to abbreviations
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	ASHRAE:
	 	American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
	 

	 	EN:
	 	European Standard
	 

	 	ENV:
	 	European Pre-standard
	 

	 	FEM:
	 	European Federation of Materials Handling and Storage Equipment
	 

	 	ISO:
	 	International Organization for Standardization
	 

	 	SFS:
	 	Finnish Standards Association
	 

	 	AISI
	 	American Iron and Steel Insitute
	 

	 	UBC:
	 	Uniform Building Code






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B2.1.2	 	Codes and standards for power barge deck cargo
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	The Power House superstructures are designed, manufactured, constructed and installed to
applicable parts according to the following standards:
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Description	 	Code	 	Note
	 

	 	-
	 	Wind load, seismic load
	 	UBC 1997	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Steel structures
	 	SFS-ENV 1993-1-1...4
	 	Eurocode 3
	 

	 	-
	 	Self supporting double skin metal faced

insulating panels-Factory made products-

Specifications (wall panels)
	 	EN 14509	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Installation of pre-manufactured buildings
	 	European Norms and ISO
standards	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Ventilation
	 	ASHRAE 62.1-2004	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Air conditioning
	 	ASHRAE 55-2004	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Crane classification and design
	 	FEM	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Painting of steel structures
	 	EN ISO 12944	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	Galvanization
	 	EN ISO 1461	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Stairs and platforms (standard)
	 	EN ISO 14122
	 	Fixed stairs and
platforms
	 

	 	-
	 	Noise measurement
	 	ISO 1996, Acoustics
Description, measurements
and assessment of
environmental noise, Part
1-3	 	 






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 63 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






	 	 	 
	B2.1.3

	 	Loads
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The civil works and structures are designed for the following loads:






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	Value	 	 	Unit	 	Code	 	Note
	Wind	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Basic wind speed	 	 		 	 	mph	 	UBC1997	 	Measured as 3 sec. gust
	-
	 	Exposure	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Importance factor	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Earthquake	 	 		 	 	 	 	UBC1997	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	Note! Concerns only mooring
	 
	 	 	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	system. The Barge and Power
	-
	 	Seismic zone	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	House is not designed for earth
	 
	 	 	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	quake loads
	-
	 	Occupancy category	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Soil profile	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Importance factor	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Seismic source, type	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Min. distance to fault	 	 		 	 	km	 	 	 	 
	Live load	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Roof	 	 		 	 	kN/m2	 	UBC1997	 	Including snow load
	-
	 	Floor (Barge Deck)	 	 		 	 	kN/m2	 	 	 	Distributed load
	 
	 	 	 	 		 	 	kN	 	 	 	Concentrated 200x200 mm2
	-
	 	Intermediate floor	 	 		 	 	 	 	UBC1997	 	 
	 
	 	Store area	 	 		 	 	kN/m2	 	 	 	Distributed load
	 
	 	 	 	 		 	 	kN	 	 	 	Concentrated 200x200 mm2
	 
	 	Control Room / office	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	area	 	 		 	 	kN/m2	 	 	 	Distributed load
	 
	 	 	 	 		 	 	kN	 	 	 	Concentrated 200x200 mm2
	-
	 	Working platforms	 	 		 	 	kN/m2	 	UBC1997	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 		 	 	kN	 	 	 	Distributed load
	 
	 	 	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	Concentrated 200x200 mm2
	Dead load	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Material	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	According to material weights
	-
	 	Equipment	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	According to Wärtsilä and other
 manufacturer specifications
	Load combinations	 	 		 	 	 	 	UBC1997	 	 






	 	 	 
	 

	 	Wärtsilä Power Barge design fulfil general international requirements for structural safety.






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 64 of 81






 









 








	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






	 	 	 
	B2.1.4

	 	Other design criteria






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	Value	 	Unit	 	Code	 	Note
	Noise	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Noise level	 	 		 	 	dB(A)	 	ISO 1996	 	 	At 100 m from wall
	-
	 	Noise level in Control	 	 		 	 	dB(A)	 	ISO 1996	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	Room and offices	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Temperatures and
relative humidity	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Max. ambient air	 	 		 	 	°C	 	 	 	 	Design ambient 30 °C
	 
	 	temperature	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Min. ambient air	 	 		 	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	temperature	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Dimensioning relative	 	 		 	 	%	 	 	 	 	At 30 °C ambient
	 
	 	humidity, RH	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Rainfall	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Maximum rainfall	 	 		 	 	mm/h	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Other	 	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-
	 	Dust level	 		 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 








 




			
	*	 	ISO 1996 Acoustics — Description, measurement and assessment of environmental
noise, Parts 1-3





	 	 	 
	B2.1.5

	 	Indoor environment






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Maximum	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	noise	 	Min. / max.	 	 	 	 	 	Illumination
	 	 	level	 	temperature	 	 	 	 	 	level
	Area	 	dB(A)	 	°C	 	AC	 	Ventilation	 	Lux
	Engine Hall

	 	 	—	 	 	Ambient /Ambient+10
(except for
hot spots)
	 	No
	 	Mechanical
	 	 	200	 
	Engine hall, maintenance platform, Auxiliary
equipment areas

	 	 	—	 	 	Ambient /Ambient+10
(except for
hot spots)
	 	No
	 	Mechanical
	 	 	300	 
	Fuel treatment room/pump
rooms

	 	 	—	 	 	Ambient /Ambient+10
(except for
hot spots)
	 	No
	 	Mechanical
	 	 	300	 
	Switchgear room(s)

	 	 	85	 	 	20-28
	 	Yes
	 	Mechanical
	 	 	250	 
	Control room

	 	 	65	 	 	20-24
	 	Yes
	 	Mechanical
	 	 	500	 
	Offices (and corresponding)

	 	 	65	 	 	20-24
	 	Yes
	 	Mechanical
	 	 	500	 
	Canteen (and correcponding)

	 	 	65	 	 	20-24
	 	Yes
	 	Mechanical
	 	150 – 200

	Changing room(s), toilet(s),
cleaning cupboard(s)

	 	 	65	 	 	22-26
	 	Yes
	 	Mechanical
	 	150 – 200

	Battery room

	 	 	65	 	 	18 °C/

Ambient+5
	 	No
	 	Mechanical
	 	150 – 200

	Workshop)s), Store 

room(s), Technical rooms

	 	 	—	 	 	18 °C/

Ambient+10
	 	No
	 	Mechanical
	 	150 – 200

	Electrical Workshop

	 	 	—	 	 	Ambient
	 	Yes
	 	Mechanical
	 	150 – 200

	Stairhall

	 	 	85	 	 	22-26
	 	Yes
	 	Mechanical
	 	150 – 200







			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 65 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B2.2	 	POWER HOUSE — SUPPLY:
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Power house steel frame and supporting structures (set) — see B2.2.1 for more
details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	External walls (set) — see B2.2.2 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Internal walls (set) — see B2.2.3 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Separation walls between engine 4 and 5 (set) — see B2.2.4 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Intermediate floor (set) — see B2.2.5 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Roof (set) — see B2.2.6 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Doors (set) — see B2.2.7 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Windows (set) — see B2.2.8 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Finishing and furnishing — see B2.3 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Heating and Sanitary Installations (inside buildings) (set) — see B2.4 for more
details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Process ventilation, Power plant buildings (set) — see B2.5 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Comfort ventilation and Air conditioning (set) — see B2.6 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	1	 	 	Equipment (cranes etc) — see B2.7 for more details
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B2.2.1	 	POWER HOUSE STEEL FRAME AND SUPPORTING STRUCTURES
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Material for building steel frame and other steel structures
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	The material characteristics are:






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	Grade	 	Code	 	Note
	Steel profiles and fasteners	 		 	 	 	 
	-

	 	Steel plates > 3 mm
	 		 	EN10025	 	 
	-

	 	I, H and U sections
	 		 	EN10025	 	 
	-

	 	L sections
	 		 	EN10025
	 	Primary profiles
	 

	 	 	 		 	EN10025
	 	Secondary profiles
	-

	 	Welded hollow sections
	 		 	EN10219	 	 
	-

	 	Bolts
	 		 	EN ISO 4014
	 	Hot-dip galvanized
	-

	 	Nuts
	 		 	EN ISO 4032
	 	Hot-dip galvanized
	-

	 	Washers
	 		 	EN ISO 7091
	 	Hot-dip galvanized






	 	 	 
	 

	 	Surface treatment
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Surface treatment is based on the quality document “Anti-corrosive treatment instructions for
auxiliary equipment” for Wärtsilä Power Barge. Actual document is made based on ISO standards
8501 (Pre-treatment), 12944 (Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective paint
system, 2808 (Determination of film thickness).






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 66 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






	 	 	 
	 

	 	The surface treatment for indoor structural steel frame components
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The painting system for indoor steel structures, , fulfill corrosivity categories C2M, C3L. according
to EN ISO 12944 (treatment EP120/2-FESa2,5 or equivalent). The preliminary treatment class is
FeSa2,5 according to EN ISO 8501.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The surface treatment for outdoor structural steel frame components
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The painting system for outdoor steel structures, fulfill corrosivity category C5-M according to EN
ISO 12944: treatment EPZn(R)EPPUR240/4-FESa2,5 or equivalent – note: additionally priced.
The preliminary treatment class is FeSa2,5 according to EN ISO 8501
The steel frame is made of shop painted shopfabricated steel profiles. Installation is done with
bolted connections. The columns are welded to the deck.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	STAIRS AND PLATFORMS
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	In the engine hall, on the gable wall, fixed to the steel frame, is a service platform for the
overhead crane. Other platforms are ventilation unit / charge air platform and stack platform.
Generally platforms are included where so required from maintenance point of view. The frame
material and surface treatment of the platform frame and railing are similar to structural steel
frame. The landings and platforms inside power house are covered with hot-dip galvanized
gratings (Class A, approximately 80 microns – EN ISO 1461). The landings and platforms outside
are painted.
	 
	 	 
	B2.2.2

	 	EXTERNAL WALLS
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	External walls of light weight sandwich panels
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Material characteristics
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The material characteristics for the wall sandwich panel materials are:






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	Grade	 	Code	 	Note
	-

	 	Outer steel sheet face
	 	
	 	EN10147
	 	Galvanized and PVDF-HB coil coated and lacquer
	-

	 	Structural mineral wool
	 	
	 	 	 	Load bearing capacity
	-

	 	Inner steel sheet face
	 	
	 	EN10147
	 	Galvanized PE coil coated






	 	 	 
	 

	 	The technical information for the sandwich panels are:






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description, 100 mm panels	 	Value	 	Unit
	-

	 	Fire rating
	 	
	 	60 minutes
	-

	 	Noise reduction, RW
	 	 		 	 	dB
	-

	 	Thermal insulation l
	 	 		 	 	W / m2K






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 67 of 81






 









 








	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






	 	 	 
	 

	 	External walls of light weight sandwich panels
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The external walls are made of shopfabricated mineral wool insulated lightweight sandwich type
panels. The surface metal sheets are bonded to the structural mineral wool to form an integrated
structural sandwich panel. The panel thickness is 100 mm
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The panels are fixed with bolts or screws to the steel frame. The joints between the frame and
panels are sealed with elastic rubber packing. The vertical joints between the panels are sealed up
with mineral wool strips and covered with shaped steel flashings. The surface metal sheets of the
panels and steel sheet flashings are galvanized and plastic coil coated at shop.
	 
	 	 
	B2.2.3

	 	INTERNAL WALLS
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Walls of light weight sandwich panels
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The material characteristics for the wall sandwich panel materials are:






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	Grade	 	Code	 	Note
	-

	 	Structural mineral wool
	 	
	 	 	 	Load bearing capacity
	-

	 	steel sheet faces (both sides)
	 	
	 	EN10147
	 	Galvanized PE coil coated






	 	 	 
	 

	 	The technical information for the standard 100 mm thick sandwich panels are:






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	Value	 	Unit
	-

	 	Fire rating
	 	
	 	 	minutes
	-

	 	Noise reduction, RW
	 		 	 	dB
	-

	 	Thermal insulation l
	 	 		 	 	W / m2K






	 	 	 
	 

	 	The internal walls are made of shopfabricated mineral wool insulated lightweight sandwich type
panels, similar to the external walls. The panel thickness is 100 mm
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The panels are fixed with bolts or screws to the steel frame. The joints between the frame and
panels are sealed with elastic rubber packing. The vertical joints between the panels are sealed up
with mineral wool strips and covered with shaped steel flashings. The surface metal sheets of the
panels and steel sheet flashings are galvanized and plastic coil coated at shop.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Wall between engine hall and control room
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	In wall between the Engine Hall and the Control room and office area is fire rated 1 hour (EI 60).
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Noise requirement 65 dB(A) in Control room/ office areas
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The wall is a double light weight panel wall with 50 mm thick mineral wool in the airgap in
between. The mineral wool boards are fastened to the Control room / office side wall.
	 
	 	 
	B2.2.4

	 	SEPARATION WALLS BETWEEN ENGINE 4 AND 5 (ADDITIONALLY PRICED)
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The engine hall will be separated by installing two walls between engine #4 and #5. The central
common access / lay-down area between the separation walls is enlarged (final width according
to the plan layout). The lower part of the walls are made with light weight wall panels (same as






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 68 of 81






 









 







	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	other walls). The upper part is openable to allow overhead crane and load to traverse when
required. The noise reduction is in the region of 25...30 dB(A).
	 
	 	 	 	 
	B2.2.5	 	INTERMEDIATE FLOOR
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 	 	The intermediate floor secondary structures are generally made with steel cassettes (steel sheets
with stiffeners) on secondary steel frame The joints between the cassettes are welded.
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 	 	The cassettes are used as such in the Store areas abobe the workshop. If necessary checkered
plates may be used.
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 	 	The intermediate floor for the Workshop as well as the whole Control room / Office / Canteen
area is build “floating” as follows:
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Steel cassettes on secondary steel frame
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Hard mineral wool 30 mm (15 kPa)
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Plywood boards 21 mm, tongued and grooved, glued to each other
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	-
	 	Plastic carpet (see finishing part)
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 	 	The material characteristics are:






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	Grade	 	Code	 	Note
	-

	 	Steel plates, L- and U- sections
	 		 	EN10025	 	 
	-

	 	Structural mineral wool
	 		 	 	 	Load bearing capacity






	 	 	 
	 

	 	The changing rooms, toilets and shower are are with a sloped concrete slab (40...70 mm) on top
of the steel cassettes.
	 
	 	 
	B2.2.6

	 	ROOF
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Roof structure, Engine Hall with radiators on the roof
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The roof structure consists of load bearing steel profiles, perforated (15 %) for noise
attenuation. The structure is insulated with mineral wool 100 mm. The roofing is with welded
plain metal sheets 5 mm, sandblasted and painted after installation, the painting system is the
same as for outdoor steel structures (note: additional paint supply will be additionally priced)
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Material characteristics






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	Grade	 	Code	Note
	-

	 	Steel plates
	 	
	 	EN10025	 	 
	-

	 	mineral wool	 	 	 	 	 	 
	-

	 	Load bearing steel sheet
	 	
	 	EN10147
	 	Galvanized






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 69 of 81






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






	 	 	 
	 

	 	Gutters and downpipes
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The eave gutters and down spouts are, where used, made of coil coated metal sheets.
	 
	 	 
	B2.2.7

	 	DOORS
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The doors are metal plated mineral wool insulated steel doors. Doors between Engine Hall and
surrounding areas are fire rated. Other fire rated doors where required. The doors will be
supplied with handles and hinges with bearings. Part of the doors are supplied with shutter and
lock with serial keys. The material characteristics of the door frame and metal plates are similar
to the structural steel frame.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Surface treatment is based on the quality document “Anti-corrosive treatment instructions for
auxiliary equipment” for Wärtsilä Power Barge. Actual document is made based on ISO standards
8501 (Pre-treatment), 12944 (Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective paint system,
2808 (Determination of film thickness). The painting treatment for doors fulfill the same corrosity
category as for the surrounding steel frame (Note: if treatment EPZn(R)EPPUR240/4-FESa2,5 or
equivalent it will be additionally priced).
	 
	 	 
	B2.2.8

	 	WINDOWS
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The windows are with shop painted aluminium profile frame and double glazing. Part of the
windows are fixed, part with casement.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Windows between Engine Hall and surrounding areas are fire rated. If the wall between the
engine hall and other areas is a double wall the windows are double with separate frames.
	 
	 	 
	B2.3

	 	FINISHING AND FURNISHING
	 
	 	 
	B2.3.1

	 	EXTERNAL WALL FINISHING
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Light weight wall panels
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Panels are coil coated at shop.
	 
	 	 
	B2.3.2

	 	INTERNAL WALL FINISHING
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Light weight panels
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Panels are coil coated at shop.
	 
	 	 
	B.2.3.3

	 	FLOOR FINISHING
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Painted floors in buildings
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Floors are painted 2 times with an epoxy paint.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Following rooms are with epoxy painting: Engine Hall, Workshops, Store rooms and areas of
similar use.






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 70 of 81






 









 








	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:

Document creation

date:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


August 25, 2009






	 	 	 
	 

	 	Floor with plastic carpet
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The carpet used is a 2 mm thick homogenous plastic carpet with welded seams.



Following rooms are with plastic carpet Control room, office areas, canteen, corridor(s),
Electrical Workshop, changing rooms and toilets.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Raised floor
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The switchgear room(s) has a raised floor (access floor) with a steel structure supporting the
floor and the electrical panels
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The floor surface is a 2 mm thick antistatic plastic carpet with welded seams on plywood boards
	 
	 	 
	B2.3.4

	 	CEILING
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Suspended ceiling
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	The acoustical panels are used in the suspended ceiling of the control room, office areas,
canteen corridors, changing room and toilet areas. The panels are on mineral wool base.





The suspended ceiling in changing room and toilet areas are moisture resistive.
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Other
	 
	 	 
	 

	 	Ceiling of other areas are unpainted.






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B2.3.5	 	TECHNICAL SPACES AND FURNISHING ON MAIN DECK
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	•	 	Switchgear room
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	•	 	Locker room with toilets:
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	The changing rooms have lockers and benches
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	•	 	Store for parts:
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	Light duty rack section (Kasten or equivalent), 8 pcs., estimated size: 715x715X900
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	o
	 	Robust design
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	o
	 	Easy to assemble
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	o
	 	7 shelf levels
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	•	 	Mechanical workshop:
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	Heavy duty workbench with boxes, 4 pcs., estimated size: 1500x700
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	o
	 	Top of workbench covered with sheet metal
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	o
	 	Including heavy duty set of drawers.
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	Heavy duty closet with boxes, 2 pcs., estimated size: 715x715X900






			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 71 of 81







 











 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


	 

	 	Document creation

date:
	 	August 25, 2009







	 	o	 	Robust design
	 
	 	o	 	Including heavy duty set of
drawers.
	 
	 	o	 	Equipped with wheels.






	 	•	 	Electrical workshop:






Light duty rack section (Kasten or equivalent), 6 pcs., estimated size:
715x715X900




	 	o	 	Robust design
	 
	 	o	 	Easy to assemble
	 
	 	o	 	7 shelf levels






	 	•	 	Compressor air room
	 
	 	•	 	Office:






Two conference room tables with 12 chairs. Additionally, 4 shelves.




	 	•	 	Toilets






The toilets have mirror with shelf, group of hangers and rack for toilet paper




	 	•	 	Canteen






The canteen is supplied with cupboards stove, refrigerator and sink.
Additionally, 4 tables with 4 chairs each.




	 	•	 	Control room:






The control room is supplied with table for operators with 3 chairs.
Additionally, a shelf for operation manuals.




	 	•	 	Open storage area:






Heavy duty rack section (Kasten or equivalent), 8 pcs. Estimated size:
715x715X900




	 	o	 	Robust design
	 
	 	o	 	7 shelf levels






For more details as location and area, see the layouts.




	B2.4 	 	SANITARY INSTALLATIONS AND SAFETY SHOWERS






Sanitary installations (plumbing)




The water pipes are copper. Toilets and wash basins are ceramic / plastic. Wash basins
in engine hall and workshops are of stainless steel. Taps are made of chrome-plated
steel or brass. 

Emergency shower / eye washing station is installed in Engine Hall and
Workshop.




The sanitary fascilities area is supplied with cold and hot water. Hot water for
showers and other use is made with electrical water heater(s).




Sewage pipes are plastic. Pipe ring stiffness is in the range 4...8kN/m2,
depending on assembly location. Floor gulleys are supplied with air traps. The sanitary
wastewater system is totally



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 72 of 81
















 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


	 

	 	Document creation

date:
	 	August 25, 2009







separated from rainwater and oily sewage drainage in order to minimize flow and
pollutant loadings.




Oily water




The oily water from the engine foundation bloc and from the floor area is collected to
the floor gulleys and led to oily water collecting tanks.




The oily water pipes from are of mild or galvanized steel




	 	3	 	Emergency Safety Shower






Unheated Emergency Safety Shower with additional Body Spray and Eye Wash. Available in
Galvanised or Stainless Steel. Two Emergency Safety Showers will be installed in the
engine hall and one Emergency Safety Shower in the fuel treatment room.




	B2.5	 	 PROCESS VENTILATION, POWER BARGE BUILDINGS 





ENGINE HALL


General




The total ventilation air flow is based on an average temperature rise of 10 °C above
ambient air temperature in the normal working zones of the engine hall, with the
exception of some hot spots. The ventilation system is based on a gravity inlet air
system (without filtering) and forced exhaust ventilation.




Inlet ventilation, generator and auxiliary side




The air is entering the engine hall thru generator and auxiliary side wall louvers




The louvers consist of a framed weather louver, bird screen and a mosquito net. The
louvers are equipped with sound baffles.




The framed weather louver, bird screen and mosquito net are made of acid proof
stainless steel (AISI 316) — note: additionally priced. The sound baffle frame is epoxy
painted galvanized steel — note: additionally priced.




Outlet ventilation




The exhaust fans are located on the roof, 1 pcs/engine. The fan unit includes the
following equipment:




	 	-	 	Electric motor (frequency converter controlled) driven axial fan

     Air flow per unit         30,0   m3/s 

     Static pressure          150   Pa
	 
	 	-	 	Silencer, to achieve max 65dB(A) at 100m.
	 
	 	-	 	Damper
	 
	 	-	 	Hood






The exhaust fans are made of painted galvanized steel, silencer frame of stainless
steel AISI 304.




The fans are frequency converter operated according to the outside ambient temperature.
The system allows the outlet air fan to be operated both manually and automatically.



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 73 of 81
















 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


	 

	 	Document creation

date:
	 	August 25, 2009







Short generator duct




All generators are supplied with a short duct on top of the outlet opening, directing
the air flow towards the roof fans. The duct is bolted to the generator or assembled on
a free-standing steel support. The duct is manufactured from galvanized steel sheets.




Pump rooms and other below deck ventilation




The total ventilation air flow is based on an average temperature rise of max. 10 °C
above ambient air temperature in the normal working zones, with the exception of some
hot spots. The ventilation system consists of inlet unit(s) and outlet fan(s) including
needed ductwork. The inlet ventilation air unit(s) supply filtered air from outside,
silencers are used where needed.




	B2.6	 	COMFORT VENTILATION AND AIRCONDITIONING






WORKSHOP AND RELATED AREAS




The total ventilation air flow is based on an average temperature rise of max. 10 °C
above ambient air temperature. The ventilation system consists of inlet unit(s) and
outlet fan(s) including needed ductwork. The inlet ventilation air unit(s) supply
filtered air from outside, silencers are used where needed.




ELECTRICAL ROOMS




Electrical Room (MV and LV switchgear room) and Cable Space is Cooled by Rooftop
Package Units, with direct expansion Evaporator and air Cooled Condenser, circulating
room air through mechanical filters. The inlet air is lead to the Electrical room, the
circulation is from the Cable Space area below the raised floor. Air flow to Cable
Space from Electrical Room is arranged through floor louvers.




Required overpressure in the Electrical Room shall be taken from outdoor environment
through mechanical particle filters and fresh air intake dampers on the Rooftop Units.




Pressure shall if needed be released trough an overpressure damper in the outer
wall construction.




The system consists of 2 Roof-top Units with one or several refrigerant circuits. If
one circuit / unit is under maintenance the other unit / circuits shall have a capacity
of  (calculated based on the dimensioning criteria) Room temperature is
controlled by air sensors built in the Rooftop unit control panel.




The cooling units will be installed in reserved roof area.




CONTROL ROOM AND OFFICE AREAS / OFFICE BUILDINGS




Control room and office areas are airconditioned using a centralized roof-top unit
system.




Control Room, Office Rooms and related areas are air-conditioned (cooled and
ventilated) by Rooftop Package Units, with direct expansion Evaporator and air cooled
Condenser, which circulate room air and outdoor over pressurization air through
mechanical filters.



			
	 This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 74 of 81






      









 








	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


	 

	 	Document creation

date:
	 	August 25, 2009







The system is equipped with an exhaust system (toilets etc). Compensation air is taken
from outdoor environment through mechanical particle filters and Fresh air intake
dampers on the Rooftop Units.




Room / area temperature is controlled by a thermostat which is regulating a 2-stage
motorized air flow damper.




Rooftop Units can be equipped with a hygrostat for control of humidity in the
Rooms. Control of fresh air damper or a heating coil shall be used for
dehumidifying the air.




The system consists of minimum 2 Roof-top Units with one or several refrigerant
circuits. If one circuit / unit is under maintenance the other unit / circuits shall
have a capacity of  (calculated based on the dimensioning criteria) 

The
air-conditioning units shall be installed in a reserved roof area. 

For avoiding
pressure drop duct work shall be as short is possible. Ducts are of galvanized steel,
all ducts are insulated. The duct fittings will be manufactured from material equal to
the ducts The covering sheet of the ducts is air- and water-tight (moisture barried).




The system is equipped with balancing, shut off, control and fire dampers where needed.




CONTROL AND REGULATING EQUIPMENT




Every air handling unit will be controlled and regulated by a unit wise control
equipment. Room / area temperature is controlled by a thermostat in every each room
or alternative by zone regulation.




ALARM OPERATIONS




The alarms from the air handling units are collected to one common alarm and
transmitted to the HVAC distribution panel or control room.




Following alarms shall be found in the common control unit:




	 	-	 	Common alarms from each Rooftop Unit.
	 
	 	-	 	Common alarms from each overheat protection.
	 
	 	-	 	A common alarm from MCB’s if they trip.






All alarm contact is potential free and are ready made for external signalling to the
PLC-system.




FIRE ALARM AND MAIN CONTACTOR




The distribution panel is provided with a Main Contactor and should be operated by the
fire alarm. The purpose for the Main Contactor is in case of a fire alarm the main
contactor should shut of power supply to all HVAC equipment in the specific area.




	B2.7	 	 EQUIPMENT (Cranes)






OVERHEAD CRANES




The common technical data for the overhead cranes (Note: small differences due to
frequency, type of manufacturer and type of crane)



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 75 of 81
















 








	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


	 

	 	Document creation

date:
	 	August 25, 2009






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description	 	 	Value	 	 	Unit	 	Note
	Speed	 	 
	 			 	 	 	 	 
	-	 	Hoisting speed
	 			 	 	m/min	 	2-speed
	-	 	Traversing speed
	 			 	 	m/min	 	2-speed+inverter control
	-	 	Travelling speed
	 			 	 	m/min	 	2-speed+inverter control
	Classification	 			 	 	 	 	 
	-	 	Crane group
	 		 	 	 	 	 
	-	 	Hoist machinery group
	 		 	 	 	 	 
	-	 	Bridge travel group
	 		 	 	 	 	 






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Overhead cranes are supplied as follows:	 	 
	 
	 	 	Engine hall (electrically, push button operated):	 	 
	 
	 

	 	 	 	•	 	Overhead crane, lifting capacity of 2,0 ton
	 	1 pc
	 
	 	 	Workshop (electrically operated)	 	 
	 
	 

	 	 	 	•	 	Lifting rail with hoist, 1,0 t
	 	1 pc
	 
	 	 	Fuel treatment / Pump room (manually operated traversing, electrically operated hoisting)	 	 
	 
	 

	 	 	 	•	 	Lifting rail with hoist 0,5 ton
	 	1 pc







MANUALLY OPERATED CHAIN HOISTS




Engine Hall Auxiliary area




Engine hall auxiliary area has a manually operated monorail chain hoist, lifting
capacity 500 kg




Other Areas




For maintenance of heavy equipment in other areas manually operated chain hoist(s) with
a lifting capacity of 250-500 kg, is marked in the layouts.




	B2.8
	 	 AUXILIARY STRUCTURES
	 
	B2.8.1	 	 CHARGE AIR / EXHAUST GAS DUCTING AND BOILER SUPPORT STRUCTURES






	 	1	 	Steel structures for charge air duct support (set)
	 
	 	1	 	Steel structures for auxiliary equipment support (set)
	 
	 	1	 	Railing outside building and auxiliary platform (set)
	 
	 	1	 	Steel structures outside the building (set)







 




			
	7	 	The listed speeds may vary slightly depending on the local electrical grid system
characteristics





			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 76 of 81
















 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


	 

	 	Document creation

date:
	 	August 25, 2009







	 	1	 	Superstructures, exhaust gas stack (set)
	 
	 	1	 	Superstructures, boiler support (set)
	 
	 	1	 	Steel frame for fire wall and other supporting structures (set)






Material for other steel structures




The material characteristics are:



	 	 	 	 	 	   	 	   	 
	Description	 	 	Grade	 	Code	 	Note
	Steel profiles and fasteners	 		 	 	 	 
	-	 	Steel plates > 3 mm
	 		 	EN10025	 	 
	-	 	I, H and U sections
	 		 	EN10025	 	 
	-	 	L sections
	 		 	EN10025	 	Primary profiles
	 	 	Welded hollow sections
	 		 	EN10025	 	Secondary profiles
	-	 	 
	 		 	EN10219	 	 
	-	 	Bolts
	 		 	EN ISO 4014	 	Hot-dip galvanized
	-	 	Nuts
	 		 	EN ISO 4032	 	Hot-dip galvanized
	-	 	Washers
	 		 	EN ISO 7091	 	Hot-dip galvanized







Surface treatment




The surface treatment of structural steel used in the Power House is based on the
quality document “Anti-corrosive treatment instructions for auxiliary equipment” for
Wärtsilä Power Plants. This Wartsila quality document is based on ISO standards 8501
(Pre-treatment), ISO 12944 (Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective
paint system, and ISO 2808 (Determination of film thickness).




The painting system for indoor steel structures fulfils corrosivity categories C2M, C3L
according to EN ISO 12944 (treatment EP120/2-FESa2,5 or equivalent). The preliminary
treatment class is FeSa2,5 according to EN ISO 8501.




The painting system for outdoor steel structures fulfills corrosivity category C5-M
according to EN ISO 12944: treatment EPZn(R)EPPUR240/4-FESa2,5 or equivalent –
note: additionally priced. The preliminary treatment class is FeSa2,5 according to EN
ISO 8501.




The structural steel frame of the Power House is made of shop painted, shop fabricated
steel profiles. Installation is done with bolted connections. The columns are welded to
the barge deck.




	B2.9 	 	INTERNAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM






Talk back system




An intercom system for communication from control room and several different places on
the Barge is provided.



			
	 	 	 
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 77 of 81
















 







	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


	 

	 	Document creation

date:
	 	August 25, 2009







	C	 	SERVICES 

C1 ENGINEERING
	 
	C1	 	ENGINEERING






The following engineering is performed in relation to the execution of the project:




	 	1	 	Preliminary engineering of power barge






The following is included:




	 	•	 	Draft power house layout
	 
	 	•	 	Draft engine generator set foundation drawing
	 
	 	•	 	Estimated total power demand
	 
	 	•	 	Estimated ventilation demand
	 
	 	•	 	Estimated dimensions and weights of main equipment






Based on this information it is possible to evaluate the site basics prior to start
of the site activities.




	 	1	 	Basic engineering of power barge






The following is included:




	 	•	 	General engineering information
	 
	 	•	 	Flow diagrams 
	 
	 	•	 	Power house layouts
	 
	 	•	 	Barge hull layouts
	 
	 	•	 	Main dimensions and weights for major equipment
	 
	 	•	 	Electrical system layouts






	 	1	 	Detailed mechanical engineering for Wärtsilä scope of supply
	 
	 	1	 	Detailed electrical engineering for Wärtsilä scope of supply
	 
	 	1	 	Detailed civil engineering for Wärtsilä scope of supply
	 
	 	1	 	Engineering of Barge Hull






	C2	 	 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
	 
	C2.1 	 	TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE DURING INSTALLATION






Wärtsilä will send technical advisory personnel to the shipyard to provide technical
assistance during the installation. The technical advisory personnel will assist the
installation personnel to identify drawings, documents and equipment and to give advice
concerning the methods and procedures for the installation of the equipment.




The following personnel will be provided:




Advisors during construction phase in the shipyard




Travel, board and lodging, local transport and temporary office for Wärtsilä’s
personnel during the construction phase in the shipyard



			
	 This
information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 78 of 81
















 







	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


	 

	 	Document creation

date:
	 	August 25, 2009







	C2.2	 	C2.2 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE DURING PRE-COMMISSIONING






Wärtsilä will send technical advisory personnel to provide technical assistance during
the pre-commissioning at the shipyard. The technical advisory personnel will prepare
the detailed testing program. Before start up of any equipment, the Wärtsilä personnel
will inspect the correctness of the installation to ensure the safe start up of the
equipment and that the installation work is done in such a manner that Wärtsilä’s
warranty obligations stipulated in the contract will apply.




Advisors during pre-commissioning phase in the shipyard




Travel, board and lodging, local transport and temporary office for Wärtsilä’s
personnel during pre-commissioning phase




	C3	 	 INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION SERVICES






The following installation and construction services are performed in relation to the
execution of the project:




	 	1	 	Installation of mechanical equipment
	 
	 	1	 	Installation of electrical equipment
	 
	 	1	 	Installation of safety earthing system
	 
	 	1	 	Installation of power barge superstructures






	C4	 	TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
	 
	C4.1	 	 WORKSHOP TESTS






	 	8	 	Engine test according to standard program






After the assembly is completed, the engine is tested in accordance with the following
test programme:



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	Duration	 	 	Load	 	 	 
	Item	 	 	[min]	 	 	[%]	 	 	Notes
	 	1.	 	 	 	15	 	 	 	 	 	 	Start test and heating up

	 	2.	 	 	 	45	 	 	 	60	 	 	Site output, main fuel

	 	3.	 	 	 	45	 	 	 	85	 	 	Site output, main fuel

	 	4.	 	 	 	45	 	 	 	100	 	 	Site output, main fuel

	 	5.	 	 	 	45	 	 	 	100	 	 	Site output, alternative fuel (if applicable)

	 	6.	 	 	 	15	 	 	 	 	 	 	Test of overspeed devices








Test documentation is provided according to Wärtsilä’s Quality System.




	C4.3	 	 PRE-COMMISSIONING AT SHIPYARD






When the construction and installation works has been completed, the equipment and
works included in Wärtsilä scope of supply will be inspected and tested to verify the
quantity, quality and performance of the supply is in line with the Contract.



			
	 This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 79 of 81
















 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


	 

	 	Document creation

date:
	 	August 25, 2009







The inspection and test program will be agreed between Wärtsilä and the Customer before
commencement of the tests, but will principally include:




	 	1	 	No load test No






load tests:




	 	•	 	Check of installation
	 
	 	•	 	Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, alarm and tripping circuits.
	 
	 	•	 	Rotational tests on all motors
	 
	 	•	 	Check of overspeed trip devices.






All tests to be carried out according to Wärtsilä standard procedures.




	C6	 	DOCUMENTS
	 
	C6.1	 	 PRELIMINARY DESIGN






	 	3	 	General site layouts
	 
	 	3	 	General power house layouts
	 
	 	3	 	General flow diagram drafts






	C6.2	 	 BASIC DESIGN






	 	3	 	General site layouts
	 
	 	3	 	General power house layouts
	 
	 	3	 	Flow diagram drafts






	C6.3	 	 DETAILED DESIGN






	 	3	 	Drawings (set)
	 
	 	3	 	Parts lists (set)
	 
	 	3	 	P&ID’s






	C6.4	 	 FINAL DESIGN






	 	3	 	Drawings as built, only updates (set)
	 
	 	1	 	Electronic copy of as built drawings, only updates (set)





			
	This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 80 of 81
















 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Project name:

Project number:

Quotation number:

Created by:

Document Id:
	 	Power Supply Upgrade. LGL

P0900329

Q0900869

MNO002


	 

	 	Document creation

date:
	 	August 25, 2009







	C6.5	 	 USER MANUALS






	 	1	 	Station manuals in English (set)






The user manuals prepared and provided with the plant delivery are compiled to a
logical package – the “Station Manuals”.




The information provided is based on EN62079 and the manuals deal with normal and safe
operation of the plant, further the instructions give information about indications and
warnings to be recognized by the user.




The Station Manuals comprise the following information modules:




	 	•	 	Operation
	 
	 	•	 	Maintenance
	 
	 	•	 	Spare parts
	 
	 	•	 	Quality records






The following is included:




	 	3	 	As hard copy
	 
	 	1	 	On digital media
	 
	 	1	 	Installed into Wärtsilä Information System (WISE)






The Station Manuals are installed into Wärtsilä Information System Environment (WISE
workstation) containing all necessary information supplied with the plant delivery. The
WISE user interface provides an instant and easy access to the manuals.



			
	 This information is confidential and proprietary to Wärtsilä.
	 	Page: 81 of 81
















 





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Doc.	 	Classification: —
	
	 	Title:	 	Lihir Power Barge Fire Protection	 	Doc.ID:	 	DBAB103090	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Revision:	 	-	 
	 	Author:	 	Marko Ristimäki/ 04-Aug-2009	 	Status:	 	Finalised
	 	Finalised by:	 	Marko Ristimäki / 04-Aug-2009	 	Pages:	 	1(15)	 
	- General
	 	Project:	 	- Lihir	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Power Plants
	 	Description:	 	Power Supply Uppgrade, LGL 8 x W20V32	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	Type:	 	Description	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 






Lihir Power Barge Fire Protection

















 






			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 2(15)






GENERAL





This description is specifying extended protection compared to the basic protection
provided by Wartsila.




The system is based mainly on NFPA principles like NFPA850, NFPA10, NFPA11, NFPA12,
NFPA13 and NFPA14 but utilising european standards for equipment.




This shall not overrule the engine, module and civil design (power house building)
used by Wartsila and the experience of Wartsila building similar power plants.




The engine room shall be provided with ring pipe with hydrant connections.
Additionally, the mobile foam units are to be provided. For immediate action against
small local fires the power house is equipped with many 6 kg and 12 kg dry powder
extinguishers at strategic locations and 5 kg CO2 extinguishers for electrical fires.
Additionally the engines are protected with fixed water mist system utilising high
pressure water supply (approx 100 bar). The system shall be built mainly for the
protection of engine frontal piping and turbochargers.




The fire main will be built aroung the barge deck providing main supply of fire water
for different applications.



Recommendations





When recommended the fire fighting equipments have following aspects been noticed:




	 	•	 	Skilled personnel attend the Power Plant 24 hours a day.
	 
	 	•	 	Experience on execution of similar Power Plants
	 
	 	•	 	Power Generation not to be interrupted due to false alarms and failures in an
automatic system.
	 
	 	•	 	Regular training of personnel in correct operating procedures
	 
	 	•	 	Plant shall be well maintained and kept in good order
	 
	 	•	 	Maintenance work including welding and cutting shall be done with appropriate
precautions and instructions
	 
	 	•	 	Installed fire protection equipment shall be maintained and perioidically
tested










 









 












			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 3(15)






Fire water pumps





In the Fire Fighting Water pump room, there are two fire pumps, one driven by diesel
engine and the other by an electric motor. The pumps supply water from the Fire
Fighting Water tank for the standpipe system and fire hydrants.




The pumps shall locate in a room separated with fire rated wall and protected with wet
pipe sprinklers.




Either one of these centrifugal pumps must alone be able to deliver the required
amount of water. At the rated flow, the pressure produced by the pumps must be at
least 8 bar. The final pressure should be evaluated according to system requirements.




Electric jockey pump in the system automatically maintains system pressure in the
pipeline. If the jockey pump can not keep the pressure, the pump control system,
brings the fire pump or pumps into action automatically.




The selected capacity of one fire water pump is 150 m3/h (2500 l/min).




The offered pumps shall be hydraulically sized according to the NFPA20 standard (Not
less than 150 % of rated capacity at not less than 65 % of total rated head).
Otherwise the pumps will follow CEA4001 standard.




Both pumps shall have fire water suction strainers with pressure difference
measurement. The fire pump test line with flow measurement device shall return the
flow after the pumps to the fire water tanks for testing. During these perioidical
tests the pressure loss over suction strainers shall be also checked and if necessary
the strainers shall be cleaned and cause for blockage to be examined.



 









 






			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 4(15)






Fire water tank capacity





The Fire Fighting Water tank supplies the hoses, mobile foam units with adequate
amount of water. The water capacity of the Fire Fighting Water tank must be at least
300 m3. This provides 120 min protection of a 150 m3/h (2500
l/min) flow demand. Theis sizing is based on simultaneous operation of the engine
water mist system up to group of four engines (approx 600 l/min) and hose stream
allowance of 1900 l/min or in the otherhand foaming of the 600 m3 HFO day
tank (approx 500 l/min) and hose stream allowance of 1900 l/min.



Engine hall





	 	•	 	automatic fire alarm (optical smoke detectors)
	 
	 	•	 	standpipe with water hydrants and fire hose equipment






8 hydrant valve pairs inside (2 x 1 1/2”)




8 hose cabinets inside with 2 x 15m long 1 1/2” hose (38 mm) and from 12 to
16 mm nozzle




	 	•	 	2 mobile foam unit (with 100 l foam concentrate, mixing ratio 3%, water flow
200 l/min)
	 
	 	•	 	27 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguishers in the hall (some of them at engine
platforms)






The loop inside is fed from two directions from the main loop on deck.




The number and position of the hydrants are such that the spray from two direction may
reach any part of engine hall.




The fuel feed of the engine may be automatically stopped in case of fire detected in
the area discussed if so decided.



 









 







			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 5(15)






Water mist systems for engines





Additionally the engines are protected with water mist system utilising high pressure
water supply (approx 100 bar).




The system shall be built mainly for the protection of engine frontal piping and
turbochargers.




This kind of system has very low water consumption. Transfer of fresh water to the
break tank of the water mist system, shall be arranged (600 litres/min. pressure
minimum 2.5 bar, max. 6 bar).




The system release can be done manually but remotely from the control room in case of
fire to avoid accidental release.



Switchgear room





	 	•	 	automatic smoke alarm
	 
	 	•	 	Gaseous extinguishing system (CO2 or equivalent) with manual remote release
from control room after adequate evacuation time.
	 
	 	•	 	4 portable 5 kg CO2 extinguishers
	 
	 	•	 	1 trolley type 22 kg CO2 extinguisher





Staircase (downstairs)





	 	•	 	automatic smoke alarm
	 
	 	•	 	1 hose reel with 1” hose (corridor downstairs)
	 
	 	•	 	1 portable 6 kg dry powder extinguishers





Locker rooms (downstairs)





	 	•	 	automatic smoke alarm
	 
	 	•	 	1 portable 6 kg dry powder extinguisher





Control room





	 	•	 	automatic smoke alarm
	 
	 	•	 	3 portable 5 kg CO2 extinguishers




 









 












			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 6(15)






Office, Canteen and Corridor upstairs





	 	•	 	Wet pipe sprinkler system
	 
	 	•	 	automatic smoke alarm system in each room
	 
	 	•	 	1 hose reel with 1” hose (corridor)
	 
	 	•	 	3 portable 6 kg dry powder extinguishers (located in office, corridor and
canteen)





Air compressor room





	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	1 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguisher
	 
	 	•	 	Fire fighting equipment from engine room and from deck can be used.





Mechanical workshop





	 	•	 	Wet pipe sprinkler system
	 
	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	1 hose reel with 1” hose
	 
	 	•	 	2 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguishers





Store for parts





	 	•	 	Wet pipe sprinkler system (in same loop with workshop)
	 
	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	1 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguishers





Open storage area





	 	•	 	automatic smoke alarm
	 
	 	•	 	1 hose reel with 1” hose
	 
	 	•	 	3 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguishers





Electrical workshop





	 	•	 	automatic smoke alarm
	 
	 	•	 	1 portable 5 kg CO2 extinguishers




 









 












			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 7(15)






Barge Deck





The main hydrants with 2 x 2 1/2” connections, are used on the deck area outside the
powerhouse.




The total number of deck area hydrants is 7 pieces connected to the fire main loop on
deck. These are mainly for the use of fire brigade or personell trained for operate
heavy water streams.




The number of hose cabinets outside is 7 pieces with following equipment:




1 Set of hose wrenches




2 fire hoses with light alloy instantaneous couplings. 2 1/2” size and 20 m length.




1 Nozzle 19 mm




Four of the cabinets shall be equipped with foam mixing possibility to the hose
stream.



Fuel and lube oil pumping area (below main deck)





	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	water mist system utilising same high pressure water supply as for the engines
	 
	 	•	 	4 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguishers
	 
	 	•	 	1 wheeled type 50 kg dry powder extinguisher
	 
	 	•	 	2 foam hose reels with 1” hose and 25 litre foam container





Water treatment area (below main deck)





	 	•	 	automatic smoke alarm
	 
	 	•	 	2 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguishers





Fire fighting pump room





	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	wet pipe sprinkler
system
	 
	 	•	 	1 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguishers




 









 












			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 8(15)






General about the fuel storage protection





If the foam would be applied only for the biggest (600 m3) tank, the foam
concentrate amount would be minimum 300 litres. The foam storage for this application
shall be approx. 600 litres and same amount stored at site in containers for
refilling. That amount should be capable for foaming the other HFO tanks (2 x 300
m3). The system can be bladder tank type working without foam concentrate
pump.



Light Fuel Oil tank





	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	fixed low expansion foam application into the tanks with remote manual release
from control room. Application rate 4,1 l/min/m2 .





Heavy Fuel Oil settling tank





	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	fixed low expansion foam application into the tanks with remote manual release
from control room. Application rate 4,1 l/min/m2 .





Heavy Fuel Oil day tank 1





	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	fixed low expansion foam application into the tanks with remote manual release
from control room. Application rate 4,1 l/min/m2 .





Heavy Fuel Oil day tank 2





	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	fixed low expansion foam application into the tanks with remote manual release
from control room. Application rate 4,1 l/min/m2 .





Station transformers





The station transformers (2 pcs) are having less than 500 gallon of oil each, which
means that the spatial separation or fire walls are not directly recommended by
NFPA850 but when considering that those are critical for power generation the fire
wall between the station transformers will be provided as referred in NFPA850.




	 	•	 	1 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguisher per transformer at safe distance
	 
	 	•	 	1 portable 5 kg CO2 extinguisher per transformer at safe distance
	 
	 	•	 	water hydrant and fire hose equipment from deck may be used. The neighboring
hose cabinet shall be equipped with foam mixing possibility to the hose stream.




 









 











			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 9(15)






Steam container





	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	1 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguisher
	 
	 	•	 	water hydrant and fire hose equipment from deck may be used. The neighboring
hose cabinet shall be equipped with foam mixing possibility to the hose stream.





Black start unit container





	 	•	 	automatic heat alarm
	 
	 	•	 	1 portable 12 kg dry powder extinguisher
	 
	 	•	 	water hydrant and fire hose equipment from deck may be used. The neighboring
hose cabinet shall be equipped with foam mixing possibility to the hose stream.





Fireman’s outfits





The fire man outfits to be provided




	 	•	 	2 self contained breathing apparatus (min. 30 minutes capacity)
	 
	 	•	 	2 fire proof life lines
	 
	 	•	 	2 sets of protective clothing
	 
	 	•	 	2 sets of boots and gloves (electrically non conducting)
	 
	 	•	 	2 helmets
	 
	 	•	 	2 electric safety lamps (min. 3 hour capacity)
	 
	 	•	 	2 axes with high voltage insulation
	 
	 	•	 	UHF radio set (5 radios)
	 
	 	•	 	2 storage lockers (two distant locations) for the outfits in a safe area










 









 












			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 10(15)






RECOMMENDATION FOR FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM




General





This specification describes the practises applied and recommended in the design of
fire alarm system. It provides guidelines for dividing the plant into fire alarm zones
(groups), for selecting fire alarm system, detectors and alarm devices, for locating
the devices, and for arranging the fire detection and fire alarm signalling loops.




The detection shall be based on EN54 standard.



Systems may differ in product assortment and allowed configurations. A fire alarm system consists of the following main components (see Figure 1):





	 	¥	 	a fire alarm center including a supervision unit, a display unit, input and
output terminal units, a power supply unit, and a message transfer unit
	 
	 	¥	 	fire detectors and manual call points connected to the fire alarm center
	 
	 	¥	 	alarm devices (bells, sirens, flashing lights) connected to the fire alarm center







Figure 1. A principle figure about the components of a fire alarm system as it could appear in a power plant




 









 












			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 11(15)







Figure 1 represents an addressable system. The detectors are arranged in closed loops
with disconnecting devices (separate disconnectors or isolator bases) at appropriate
intervals for isolation of faulty sections at line fault. The hazardous area (area
containing inflammable gases, liquids or vapors) has detectors of conventional type,
which are connected to the fire alarm center via an address unit.




When designing a fire alarm system, the following basic principles should be
considered:




	 	¥	 	The fire alarm center shall be placed in a continuously
manned room. In a power plant this is the control room.
	 
	 	¥	 	The supervised rooms should be divided into alarm zones to
ease locating the fire.
	 
	 	¥	 	Every room must be provided with a suitable amount and type
of detectors.
	 
	 	¥	 	Alarm bells, sirens and flashing lights must be situated so
that they can be heard or seen everywhere inside and where needed outside the
buildings.
	 
	 	¥	 	An average ambient sound level greater than 105 dBA shall
require the use of a visible notification appliances





Selecting fire alarm system





This specification gives no directives regarding supplier or type of fire alarm
system. An addressable system is recommended.



Fire alarm zones





The purpose with fire alarm zones is to group the fire detectors and in that way ease
the fire location at an alarm.




At least the following areas should be defined as separate fire alarm zones:




	 	¥	 	Separate buildings
	 
	 	¥	 	Separate floors (except stairways which may encompass several
floors)
	 
	 	¥	 	Rooms separated by fire walls
	 
	 	¥	 	Areas of different fire classes
	 
	 	¥	 	Rooms or areas of essentially different heights
	 
	 	¥	 	Rooms that cannot be accessed without passing through other
zones










 









 











			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 12(15)






Designing fire detection system




Selecting fire detectors





The basic principle is to install the type and amount of fire detectors that gives
earliest possible fire detection without causing false alarms during normal operation
conditions.




Optical smoke detectors are recommended, except in workshops and similar rooms where
smoke may appear as a result of the normal use of the room. Use differential maximum
heat detectors in rooms where smoke detectors cannot be used.




Smoke detectors are suitable for the engine room, the auxiliary hall, the switchgear
rooms, offices, stores and control rooms.




The optical smoke detectors detect visible smoke particles, either based on their
light reflectance or light absorption. Ion detectors are activated at an increased
electrical ionization resistance and they are able to detect even invisible smoke.




Heat detectors are immune to exhaust gas and welding smoke and are therefore suitable
for use in the workshop.




The maximal heat detectors operate in cases where a maximum temperature is exceeded.
The differential detectors operate in cases where the temperature rises too fast. The
differential maximal detectors operate in both cases.




Flame detectors may easily cause false alarms and are not recommended.



Locating manual call points





In a manual alarm device, the fire alarm is activated with a push button. Normally the
button is protected with a cover that can be crushed.




Push buttons for activating fire alarms manually should be placed close to each exit
and close to the fire alarm panel or alarm center. Each fire detection loop must have
at least one push button.



 









 





			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 13(15)






Arranging fire detection loops




General principles





The fire detectors and fire call buttons are located along one or more closed loops
starting and ending in the fire alarm center. See Figure 2. In addressable systems, a
fire alarm loop may extend over several alarm zones.



Rules for locating disconnecting devices





Each detection loop will be partitioned by a number of disconnecting devices. The
disconnecting devices may be installed as separate devices or included in the detector
bases as “isolator bases”. At a line break or short circuit on the loop, the faulty
section is isolated at the two closest disconnecting devices. The other detectors on
the loop will stay in contact with the fire center along either end of the loop.





Figure 2. The fire detection loops on the bottom floor of a power house (BLN901 = fire alarm center)




Cable recommendation for detection loops





The cable with copper wires (2x0.8 mm indoors and 4x0.8mm in outdoor circuitries) that
fulfil the fire condition requirements of IEC 332-1 should be used.



 









 






			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 14(15)






Alarm signaling system





The following types of alarm signaling devices will be used:




	 	¥	 	Alarm bells (92 – 95 dB)
	 
	 	¥	 	Flashing lights (1 Hz, 1W)
	 
	 	¥	 	Alarm sirens (about 115 dB) where feasible






Flashing light signals (1 - 2 Hz) are obligatory in the engine hall and auxiliary
hall.



Locating alarm devices





Principles for placing the alarm signal devices:



	 	 	 
	Engine room

	 	Alarm devices (flashing lights) visible between every
engine.
	 
	 	 
	Control room

	 	One audible alarm device (alarm bell).
	 
	 	 
	Other rooms

	 	Audible alarm devices should be placed so that they can
be heard in all rooms where people stay more than
temporarily. The sound level should be at least 15 dBA
above the average sound level in the room or 5 dBA
above the maximum sound having a duration of at least
60 seconds whichever is greater, measured 1.5 m above
the floor.
	 
	 	 
	Outdoors

	 	One audible alarm device on each side of the power
house.






Arranging fire alarm signaling loops





All alarm devices everywhere in the plant should be activated at a fire alarm.




The fire alarm loops should be arranged so that a fault message is obtained at cable
break or short circuit.



 









 






			
	
	 	Doc. Classification: Internal

DocID: DBAB103090 Revision: - 15(15)








Figure 3. Example of fire alarm devices in a power house




Cable recommendations for alarm signaling loops





The cables with solid copper conductors (3x1.5 mm2 in the power house, and
2x2.5 mm2 between buildings) that fulfil the fire condition requirements of
IEC 332-1 have been used.



Fire alarm centre




Arranging power supply





There will be at least two independent power supplies:




	 	¥	 	230 VAC taken from the LV switchgear (or public grid)
	 
	 	¥	 	One or more batteries (generally 24 VDC) with battery
charger.






Each of them must be able to feed the power required when the system is in alarm state
and the current for 0,5 hours in alarm state.



Connecting to other systems





Available potential free contacts should be arranged so as to open at a fire alarm or
fault (normally closed). The contacts can be used for transferring alarm and fault
signals to the plant control system.



Plant control system





Alarm and fault signals can be used for activating alarm and possible consequential
actions in the plant control system. The programmed fire alarm procedures should be
agreed upon with the plant owner.



Plant ventilation system





The plant ventilation system is controlled according to engine operation. In
Auto-mode, fire alarms may be used for stopping the engines but the procedures should
be agreed with the customer.



 









 






			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 1(11)






Information to Vendor




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	Equipment title
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	LGL equipment number

	 	 	 		 	 
	 
	SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	System Normal Voltage

	 	 	 	
	 	Ok
	 
	System Highest Voltage

	 	 	 	
	 	
	 
	Frequency

	 	 	 	
	 	Ok
	 
	Phases

	 	 	 	
	 	Ok
	 
	System Earthing

	 	 	 	

	 	Ok
	 
	Fault Level

	 	 	 	
	 	
	 
	 

	 	 	 	
	 	
	 
	Single Line Drawing Number

	 	 	 	6647-SKETCH-02
	 	See singel line
diagram in Exhibit A
	 
	SERVICE CONDITIONS
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	Design Ambient Temperature Outdoor

	 	 	 		 	 
	 
	Extreme Ambient Temperature

	 	Max
	 		 	 
	 
	 

	 	Min	 	 	 	 
	 
	Altitude

	 	 	 		 	 
	 
	Design Relative Humidity Outdoor

	 	 	 		 	 
	 
	Other

	 	 	 		 	 
	 
	GENERATORS
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	Quantity

	 	 	 	(N Configuration)
	 	Spinning reserve by

existing plant
	 
	Plant Installed kW

	 	 	 	
	 	See Contract Exhibit B
“Performance
Guarantees”
	 
	Individual Generator kW Rating (min/max)

	 	 	 	
	 	See Contract Exhibit B
“Performance






 









 







			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 2(11)






Information to Vendor




	 	 	 	 	 
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	 

	 	 	 	Guarantees”
	 
	Frequency

	 	
	 	Ok
	 
	Generator Voltage

	 	
	 	Ok
	 
	Rated Power Factor at MCR

	 	
	 	Ok
	 
	Auxiliaries Voltage

	 	
	 	Ok
	 
	Control Circuit Voltage

	 	
	 	
	 
	FUEL SPECIFICATION

	 	Refer Specification	 	 






 









 







			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 3(11)






Information from Vendor




	 	 	 	 	 
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	Equipment Title
	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 
	LGL equipment number
	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 
	SYSTEM
	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Manufacturer

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Type

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Number of Poles

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Rated Voltage

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Frequency

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Rating of each Generating Set

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Quantity of Generating Sets

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	GENERATORS SETS
	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	

	 
	 	 	 	 
	Maximum Continuous Rating at Alternator
Terminals (0.8pf, 40°C outdoors)

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Generator Overload Capability (%/ duration)

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Auxiliary Power Usage at MCR

	 	 	 	






 









 







			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 4(11)






Information from Vendor




	 	 	 	 	 
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	Fuel Consumption at 100% MCR

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Fuel Consumption at 75% MCR

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Fuel Consumption at 50% MCR

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Fuel Type Required

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Fuel Quality Required

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Engine Make/Model

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Engine Type/No. of Cylinders

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Engine Speed

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Alternator Make/Model

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Voltage Regulator Make /Model

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Alternator Reactance % at 11000V, 100%

	 	 	 	
	-Subtransient, positive/negative/zero
	 	 	 	 
	-Transient, synchronous/zero sequence

	 	 	 	






 









 






			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 5(11)






Information from Vendor




	 	 	 	 	
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	Alternator Reactance % at 11000V, 70%

	 	 	 	
	-Subtransient, positive/negative/zero
	 	 	 	
	-Transient, synchronous/zero sequence
	 	 	 	
	 				
	Auxiliary Electric Motors Type/Quantity

	 	 	 	
	 				
	Auxiliary Electric Motors Size

	 	 	 	
	 				
	Generator Overall Mass (including fuel/oil/water)

	 	 	 	
	 				
	Engine Running Hours at MCR between major
overhauls

	 	 	 	
	 				
	Accessories Provided

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	DIMENSIONS
	 	 	 	
	 				
	Generator dimensions (mmLx mmWx mmH)

	 	 	 	
	 				
	Generator Mass (kg)

	 	 	 	
	 				
	Barge Qty

	 	 	 	
	Barge Dimensions (length, beam, draft, height)

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 				
	 

	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Barge Displacement (T each)

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	AUXILIARIES
	 	 	 	
	 				
	Light fuel oil unloading pump unit — qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/          /
	 	






 









 







			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 6(11)






Information from Vendor




	 	 	 	 	
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	Light fuel oil tank — qty/capacity (m3)

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Light fuel oil transfer pump unit — qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Light fuel oil day tank, qty/capacity (m3)

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Heavy fuel oil unloading pump unit — qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Heavy fuel oil storage tank — qty/capacity (m3)

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Heavy fuel oil transfer pump unit — qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Heavy fuel oil buffer tank — qty/capacity (m3)

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Heavy
fuel oil separator unit, — separator —
qty/capacity (m3/h)

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Heavy fuel oil day tank — qty/capacity (m3)

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Heavy fuel oil booster unit — qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	






 









 







			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 7(11)






Information from Vendor




	 	 	 	 	
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	Heavy / light fuel oil feeder unit — qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Light fuel oil feeder pump — qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Heavy fuel oil fuel oil unit —  qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Lubricating oil separator unit separator —
qty/capacity (m3/h)

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Lubricating oil unloading pump unit: fresh oil —
qty/capacity (m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Lubricating oil storage tank: fresh oil —
Qty/Capacity m3

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Lubricating oil service tank — Qty/Capacity m3

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Lubricating oil transfer pump unit (mobile) — qty/capacity (m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	






 









 







			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 8(11)






Information from Vendor




	 	 	 	 	
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	Lubricating oil transfer pump unit (stationary) —
qty/capacity (m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Lubricating oil storage tank: used oil —
Qty/Capacity m3

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Lubricating oil unloading pump unit: used oil —
qty/capacity (m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Starting air bottle — qty/capacity (m3/h)/Pressure
(bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Starting air compressor unit — double —
qty/capacity (m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Instrument air compressor unit — qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Compressed air receiver — qty/volume m3

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Refrigerated air dryer with control panel —
Qty/Dew Point °C

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Radiator cooler circuit — Frame material /Tube
material /Fin material /Noise level dB(A) at 40 m distance

	 	/

/
	 	
	

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Low temperature expansion tank — qty/vol m3

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Jacket water expansion tank — qty/vol m3

	 	/
	 	






 









 







			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 9(11)






Information from Vendor




	 	 	 	 	
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	Maintenance water tank — qty/vol m3

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Maintenance water tank discharge pump —
qty/capacity (m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Charge air silencer — qty/ Noise attenuation dB(A)

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Exhaust gas silencer — qty/Noise attenuation
dB(A)

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Exhaust gas stack — qty/Diameter
/Material/Height above ground level m

	 	/

/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Exhaust gas boilers — qty/ Steam generation kg/h
saturated steam/ Working steam pressure bar(a)

	 	/     /
	 	






 









 






			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 10(11)






Information from Vendor




	 	 	 	 	 
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	Light fuel oil fired boiler for steam generation —
qty/ Steam generation kg/h saturated steam/Working
steam pressure bar(a)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Oily water pump (air driven) — qty/capacity m3/h

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Oily water buffer tank — Qty/Capacity m3

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Sludge tank — Qty/Capacity m3

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Sludge loading pump unit — (air driven) —
qty/capacity m3/h

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Water treatment unit — qty/Capacity m3/h

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Treated water storage tank — Qty/Capacity m3

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Water booster units Pressure tank — qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	






 









 







			
	EXHIBIT A: TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
	 	Page 11(11)






Information from Vendor




	 	 	 	 	 
	Item	 	Description	 	Supplier’s comments
	Water booster units Pump Unit — qty/capacity
(m3/h)/Pressure (bar)

	 	/     /
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	Black start unit — qty/kW rating

	 	/
	 	
	 
	 	 	 	
	 

	 	 	 	








 









 





Doc. Classification: Confidential




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Title:
	 	Supplier list
	 	DocID:

Revision:
	 	WDAAA041238

y
	 

	 	Author:
	 	Marcus Hellman / 16-Oct-2008
	 	Sheets:
	 	1 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Wärtsilä Finland Oy

	 	Approved by:
	 	Stig Prost / 29-Oct-2008
	 	Status:
	 	Approved
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Power Plants

	 	Project:
	 	IN100 Power Plants	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Description:
	 	Wärtsilä Power Plants preferred suppliers	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Type:
	 	List	 	 	 	 





This document is based on the Wärtsilä Power Plants preferred suppliers list WDAAA182182. The
latest revision of WDAAA041238 hard copy document can be submitted upon request.



As delivery of the equipment may be far in the future, Wärtsilä reserves the right to use other
suppliers of same standard and Quality.




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	System	 	Section	 	Equipment	 	Supplier name	 	Supplier country
	A1 EG-SET

	 	A1.1 Genset / Engine
	 	Engine related equipment
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	U.K.
	 

	 	A1.2 Genset / Alternator
	 	Alternator
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	United Kingdom
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	A1.3 Genset / Base frame
	 	Base frame
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	A1.4 Genset / Elastic mounts
	 	Elastic mounts
	 		 	Netherlands
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Sweden
	 

	 	A1.5 Genset / Coupling, flywheel
	 	Coupling
	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	U.K.
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	Flywheel cover
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	A1.6 Genset / Flexible connections
	 	Flexible connections
	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	A1.7 Genset / Platform
	 	Platforms
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Poland
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A2 AUXILIARY MODULES

	 	A2 Auxiliary units and modules
	 	Auxiliary units and modules
	 		 	Finland / India
	 

	 	A2.0.1 Auxiliary module / components
	 	Auxiliary module control panels
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Centrifugal pumps
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Filters
	 		 	Italy
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Heaters
	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Italy
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	U.K.
	 

	 	 	 	Other auxiliary module components
	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Norway
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Plate heat exchangers
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	Pre-heating units
	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	Pumps
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Sweden
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Austria
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Thermostatic valves
	 		 	U.K.
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	Valves
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A2.1 FUEL SYSTEM

	 	A2.1.1/A2.1.2 Light/Heavy fuel oil system
	 	Boosters
	 		 	Finland/ China
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland/ India
	 

	 	 	 	Flow meters
	 		 	Finland (Netherlands)
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland (Switzerland)
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Tanks
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	A2.1.2 Heavy fuel oil system
	 	Separator modules
	 		 	India
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany






					
	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	Document Classification:	 	 
	 
	 	Confidential
	 	Page: 1/3






 









 









	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	System	 	Section	 	Equipment	 	Supplier name	 	Supplier country
	 

	 	A2.1.5 Gas system
	 	Gas compressors
	 		 	New Zeeland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Italy
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Italy
	 

	 	 	 	Gas flow measuring unit
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Italy
	 

	 	 	 	Gas regulating units
	 		 	USA
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A2.2 LUBE OIL SYSTEM

	 	A2.2 Lube oil system
	 	Oil mist coalescer
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Oil mist separator
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Separator modules
	 		 	India
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	Tanks
	 		 	Finland
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A2.3 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

	 	A2.3 Compressed air system
	 	Control and working air comp. units
	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Starting air pressure vessels
	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Starting air units
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Norway
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A2.4 COOLING SYSTEM

	 	A2.4 Cooling system
	 	Centrifugal pumps
	 		 	Spain
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Spain
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Cooling towers
	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Italy
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	 	 	Radiators
	 		 	Italy
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Sweden
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A2.5 CHARGE AIR SYSTEM

	 	A2.5 Charge air system
	 	3-way damper
	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	 	 	Charge air filters
	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	U.K.
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Charge air silencers
	 		 	Finland
	A2.6 EXHAUST GAS SYSTEM

	 	A2.6 Exhaust gas system
	 	Exhaust gas silencers
	 		 	Netherlands
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Mexico (USA)
	 

	 	 	 	Exhaust gas system equipment
	 		 	Belgium
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A2.8 STATION SUPPORT SYSTEM

	 	A2.8.1 Oily water treatment system
	 	Incinerators
	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Norway
	 

	 	 	 	Sludge treatment
	 		 	Sweden
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Sweden
	 

	 	 	 	Tanks
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	A2.8.2 Treated water system
	 	Water treatment
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	A2.8.3 Fire fighting system
	 	Fire fighting equipment
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Mechanical protection and fighting
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	England
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A2.9
AUX. STEEL STRUCTURES, [ILLEGIBLE]

	 	A2.9 Aux. Steel structure, piping, etc.
	 	Pipe material
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Piping & building signs
	 		 	Finland
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

	 	A3.1 MV-Equipment
	 	Earthing Transformer
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	MV-cables
	 		 	Belgium
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	MV-switchgear
	 		 	Czeck
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	USA
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	Neutral point cabinet
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	USA
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	Unit (block) transformer
	 		 	Spain
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Turkey
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Bulgaria
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	A3.2 Station service system
	 	Black start unit
	 		 	USA
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	 	 	Distribution Transformer
	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Turkey
	 

	 	 	 	Frequency converter
	 		 	Finland






					
	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	Document Classification:	 	 
	 
	 	Confidential
	 	Page: 2/3






 









 









	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	System	 	Section	 	Equipment	 	Supplier name	 	Supplier country
	 

	 	 	 	LV-cables
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Belgium
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	LV-Switchgear
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	USA
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	A3.3 DC system
	 	DC system
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	USA
	 

	 	A3.5 Outdoor switchyard
	 	HV-cables
	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Outdoor switchyard
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Power transformers
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Turkey
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	India
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	India
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Bulgaria
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Italy
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A4 AUTOMATION EQUIPMENT

	 	A4.2 Control panels
	 	Control panel main components
	 		 	Switzerland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Control panels
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	A4.3 Operators station
	 	Computer peripherals, Firewalls, Modems etc.
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Operator panels
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Norway
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A5 HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM

	 	A5.1 Steam generation system
	 	Steam equipment
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Steam turbines
	 		 	Netherlands
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	U.K.
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	France
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	India
	 

	 	 	 	Tanks
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Waste heat recovery system
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Norway
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	India
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Denmark
	 

	 	A5.2 Hot water generation system
	 	Exhaust gas heat recovery heat exchanger / Hot
	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Denmark
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	A6 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

	 	A6 Emission control system
	 	Oxidation catalysts
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Switzerland
	 

	 	 	 	SCR (DeNOx)
	 		 	Germany
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Switzerland
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	B CIVIL WORKS & STRUCTURES

	 	B Civil works & Structures
	 	Doors
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Electrical installation material
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Furnitures
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	HVAC and Piping material
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Insulation
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Miscellaneous civil material
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Overhead travelling cranes and workstation [ILLEGIBLE]
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Roofing sheets, wall panels, flashings
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Sewage piping and plumbing
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Steel structures
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Poland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Substructure material
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Surface treatment
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Ventilation
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Windows
	 		 	Finland
	 
	 	 	 	 	 		 	 
	C4 COMMISSIONING AND TESTING

	 	C4 Commissioning and testing
	 	Commissioning Engineers
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	C6 DOCUMENTS

	 	C6 Documents
	 	Design
	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	 	 		 	Finland
	 

	 	 	 	Design and O&M Manuals
	 		 	Finland






					
	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	Document Classification:	 	 
	 
	 	Confidential
	 	Page: 3/3






 









 





EXHIBIT B — PERFORMANCE FIGURES / GUARANTEES




1. Performance Guarantees




2. Emission data sheet, doc id: DBAA992527




 









 






PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES




Page 1(2)





	 	 	Guaranteed performance
	 
	 	 	The guaranteed performance in below article 1.2 is based on the Site conditions, article 1.3,
and the heavy fuel given in article 1.4. If the conditions of 1.3 and/or 1.4 changes the
power and heat rate adjustments may apply. These adjustment procedures are further defined in
document WDAAA245063 “Electrical Power & Heat Rate Test — Diesel Engine”.
	 
	1.1	 	General Data





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Engine Type

	 	 	 	 	Wärtsilä 20V32


	 
	Engine speed

	 	rpm
	 	 		 
	 
	Compression Ratio

	 	-
	 	 		 
	 
	Genset Maximum Electrical Power at Site

	 	kW
	 	 		 
	 
	Cooling method

	 	-
	 	 	

	 
	Cooling circuit

	 	-
	 	 	








	1.2	 	Performance Data





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Electrical Power Guarantee

	 	kW
	 	 		 
	 
	Minimum Electrical Power Guarantee

	 	kW
	 	 		 
	 
	Electrical Power Guarantee Point

	 	 	 	 	 	 	Generator terminals

	 
	Power factor

	 	 	Cos fi
	 	 	

	 
	Heat Rate Guarantee

	 	kJ/kWh
	 	 		 
	 
	Specific fuel oil consumption

(only as general information)

	 	g/kWh
	 	 	

	 
	Maximum Heat Rate Guarantee

	 	kJ/kWh
	 	 		 
	 
	Heat Rate Guarantee Point

	 	 	 	 	 	 	Generator terminals

	 
	Heat rate and electrical power tolerance

	 	 	%	 	 	 		 
	 
	Measurement tolerance

	 	 	 	 	 	 	Depends on measurement
equipment. Calculated as per
Performance test guideline

	 
	Lubricating Oil Consumption Guarantee

	 	kg/h
	 	 	








	1.3	 	Site ( Contract ) Conditions





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Altitude / Total barometric pressure
	 	m / kPa	 	 	101.3 kPa
	 
	Ambient air temperature
	 	oC	 	 	32	 
	 
	LT charge air cooler water inlet temperature
	 	oC	 	 	51.2	 
	 
	Relative Humidity
	 	 	%	 	 	 	80	 






 









 






PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES




Page 2(2)





	1.4	 	Heavy fuel oil





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Lower Heating Value (LHV) ,
( at 0
oC and
100 kPa)

	 	MJ/kg
	 	 		 
	 

	 	 	 	 	Fuel
specification is
according to
Wärtsilä Technical
Specification.

	Viscocity

	 	cSt, 50 oC
	 	 		 







	2.	 	ISO 3046 — Standard and Manufacturers Substitute Reference Conditions (These are the
reference conditions for calculating Electrical output and heatrate and Lube Oil consumption
for Reciprocating internal combustion engines running in Diesel mode)





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Standard reference conditions
(Conditions from where Heat Rate is de-rated)
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	Ambient air temperature
	 	oC	 	 	25	 
	 
	Charge Air coolant temperature
	 	oC	 	 	25	 
	 
	Total Barometric pressure
	 	kPa	 	 	100	 
	 
	Relative Humidity at Ambient air temperature
	 	 	%	 	 	 	30	 
	 
	Substitute reference conditions
(Conditions from where electrical output is de-rated)
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	Ambient air temp.
	 	oC	 	 	35	 
	 
	Charge Air coolant temperature
	 	oC	 	 	45	 







	3.	 	Exhaust Gas Emissions
	 
	 	 	Reference is made to Emission data, document DBAA992527 attached to this Exhibit B. The
measurement procedure are described in Exhibit C “Performance Test Guidelines”, documet
DAAB195899 “Stack Emission Test”.
	 
	4.	 	Duration of Performance Test
	 
	 	 	The Performance test practical testing details are described in Exhibit C “Performance Test
Guidelines”:






	 	-	 	WDAAA245063 “Electrical Power & Heat Rate Test — Diesel Engine”, and
	 
	 	-	 	DAAB184367 “Lubricating oil consumption test”, and
	 
	 	-	 	DAAB195899 “Stack Emissions Test”





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Duration of Electrical Power Test
	 	hours	 	 	2	 
	 
	Duration of Heat Rate Test
	 	hours	 	 	2	 
	 
	Duration of Emission Test
	 	hours	 	 	Depends on the test requirements
	 
	Duration of Lube Oil Test
	 	hours	 	 	48	 






 









 













Power Plants







Doc. Classification: Internal




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Title:

	 	Lihir, Papua New Guinea
	 	Doc.ID:
	 	DBAA992527
	 

	 	 	 	Revision:
	 	-
	Author:

	 	
	 	Status:
	 	Finalised
	Finalised by:

	 	 / 16-Apr-2009
	 	Pages:
	 	1 (1)
	Project:

	 	-	 	 	 	 
	Description:

	 	Emission data	 	 	 	 
	Type:

	 	Emission data sheet	 	 	 	 












			
	Engine:	 	Wärtsilä® 20V32 at 750 RPM (constant speed)






			
		 	- max. total pressure drop in air intake and flue gas system     5 kPa





Site design conditions:




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	- intake air or ambient temperature
	 	 	32	 	°C	 	 	 
	- LT charge air coolant temperature (max.)
	 	 	45	 	°C	 	 	 
	- altitude above sea level
	 	 	0	 	m	 	 	 
	- minimum absolute humidity
	 	 	6	 	gwater/kgdry air






Fuel specification:




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	- max. nitrogen content
	 	 		 		 	(dry)
	- max. density
	 	 		 		 	(at 15 °C)
	- max. kinematic viscosity
	 	 		 		 	(at 50 °C)
	- max. sulphur content
	 	 		 		 	(dry)
	- max. ash content
	 	 		 		 	(dry)
	- min. LHV
	 	 		 		 	 	 	 






Lubrication oil: Maximum sulphated ash content in lubricating oil 6.0 wt-% (dry)




Flue gas emission data at normal full steady load at site conditions after Engine:





- NOx emissions (calc. as NO2) max.  mg/Nm3 (dry, at 7 vol-%
O2) 
Nm3 defined at 0 °C and 101.3 kPa (abs .)



Typical flue gas emission data at normal 50 % steady load at site conditions after Engine:





- NOx emissions (calc. as NO2) max.  mg/Nm3 (dry, at 7 vol-% O2)
Nm3 defined at 0 °C and 101.3 kPa (abs .)



Flue gas emission measurement methods:



Nitrogen oxides (NOX): EPA Method 7E (USA): Determination of nitrogen oxides from
stationary sources

(instrumental analyzer method). Or principally similar other methods.



Oxygen (O2): EPA Method 3A (USA): Determination of oxygen and carbon dioxide emissions
from stationary sources (instrumental analyzer method). Or principally similar other methods.



Measurement uncertainties and acceptance: The measurement tolerances (uncertainties) will be as
specified by the measurement consultant. Assessment of the fulfillment of the guarantees shall be
made according to Section 6.2 of the VDI 2048 guidelines “Uncertainties of measurement during
acceptance tests on energy-conversion and power plants”.




 









 








EXHIBIT C — PERFORMANCE TEST GUIDELINES




1. Electrical power and heat rate tests, doc id; WDAAA245063




2. Lubricating oil consumption test, doc id: DAAB184367




3. Stack emissions test, doc id: DAAB195899




 









 














Power Plants







Doc. Classification:




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Title:

	 	2. Electrical Power & Heat Rate Test -
	 	Doc.ID:
	 	WDAAA245063
	 

	 	Diesel Engine (Euro version)
	 	Revision:
	 	c.9
	Author:

	 	KEN004/ 20-Aug-2008
	 	Status:
	 	Draft
	Draft by:

	 	 / 17-Apr-2009
	 	Pages:
	 	1 (11)
	Project:

	 	-	 	 	 	 
	Description:	 	Electrical power and Heat Rate Tests — Diesel, GD or DF Engine running in diesel mode
	Type:

	 	Contract/ Agreement	 	 	 	 











	 	 	 	 	 
	1 Objective
	 	 	2	 
	2 Symbols
	 	 	2	 
	3 Measurements
	 	 	4	 
	4 Electrical Power Test
	 	 	5	 
	4.1 General
	 	 	5	 
	4.2 Adjustment of electrical power for ambient conditions
	 	 	5	 
	4.3 Measurement tolerances in electrical power test
	 	 	7	 
	4.4 Electrical Power
	 	 	7	 
	5 Heat rate test
	 	 	8	 
	5.1 General
	 	 	8	 
	5.2 Recalculation of heat rate for ambient conditions
	 	 	8	 
	5.3 Measuring tolerances in Heat Rate test
	 	 	10	 
	5.4 Heat Rate
	 	 	10	 
	5.5 List of auxiliary equipment operational status during tests
	 	 	11	 






 









 








			
	
	 	Doc. Classification:

DocID: WDAAA245063     Revision: c.9      2(11)







	1	 	Objective




The Electrical power and heat rate can be tested to show compliance with the guarantees and is used
for power and heat rate adjustment at site during performance test of the power plant. Calculations
and symbols used in this document are according to ISO 15550, ISO3046-1 and ISO3046-3 standards.





	2	 	Symbols





	 	 	 	 	 
	Symbol	 	Definition	 	Unit
	b	 	Specific fuel consumption
	 	kg/kWh
	k	 	Ratio of indicated power
	 	1
	m	 	Exponent of the dry air pressure ratio or total barometric pressure
ratio
	 	1
	n	 	Exponent of the ambient air thermodynamic temperature ratio
	 	1
	p	 	Total barometric pressure
	 	kPa
	P	 	Power
	 	kW
	s	 	Exponent of the charge air coolant thermodynamic temperature
ratio
	 	1
	tc	 	Charge air coolant temperature at inlet to cooler
	 	C
	t	 	Ambient air temperature
	 	C
	Tc	 	Charge air coolant thermodynamic temperature
	 	K
	T	 	Ambient air thermodynamic temperature
	 	K
	a	 	Power adjustment factor
	 	1
	b	 	Fuel consumption recalculation factor
	 	1
	hm	 	Mechanical efficiency
	 	1
	Pg	 	Electrical power at generator terminals
	 	kW
	Po	 	Electrical power for own consumption
	 	kW
	Psu	 	High voltage transformer losses
	 	kW
	Phv	 	Electrical power at high voltage side of step up transformer
	 	kW
	Pmv	 	Electrical power at medium voltage side of step up transformer
	 	kW
	Ep	 	Electrical energy for power test
	 	kWh
	Ehr	 	Electrical energy for heat rate test
	 	kWh
	Eg	 	Electrical energy at generator terminals
	 	kWh
	Eo	 	Electrical energy for own consumption
	 	kWh
	Esu	 	High voltage transformer losses, energy
	 	kWh
	Ehv	 	Electrical energy at high voltage side of step up transformer
	 	kWh
	Emv	 	Electrical energy at medium voltage side of step up transformer
	 	kWh
	mfin	 	Mass of fuel in to engine
	 	kg






 









 







			
	
	 	Doc. Classification:

DocID: WDAAA245063      Revision: c.9      3(11)






	 	 	 	 	 
	mfout	 	Mass of fuel out from engine
	 	kg
	mfmeasured	 	Mass of fuel, measured
	 	kg
	mfleak	 	Mass of leak fuel
	 	kg
	mf,net	 	Mass of net fuel consumed by engine
	 	kg
	Fnet	 	Net fuel energy consumed by engine
	 	kJ
	LHVtest	 	Lower heating value of fuel during test
	 	MJ/kg
	LHVguarantee	 	Lower heating value of fuel used in fuel consumption guarantee
	 	MJ/kg
	r	 	Heat rate
	 	kJ/kWh
	tt	 	Time
	 	h
	N	 	Number of periods in test
	 	1
	EMUtol	 	Tolerance of electrical energy measuring unit
	 	%
	LHVtol	 	Tolerance of lower heating value of fuel
	 	%
	mftol	 	Tolerance of fuel mass metering
	 	%
	Itransf,tol	 	Tolerance of measuring transformer, current
	 	%
	Utransf,tol	 	Tolerance of measuring transformer, voltage
	 	%






Prefixes





D                           Difference, Tolerance




Subscripts




	 	  	 
	m

	 	Mechanical
	r

	 	Standard reference conditions
	ra

	 	Substitute reference conditions
	x

	 	Contractual Reference Conditions (Site conditions)
	y

	 	Test day conditions
	guaranteed

	 	Guaranteed value
	Min

	 	Minimum
	Max

	 	Maximum
	average

	 	Average






 









 









			
	
	 	Doc. Classification:

DocID: WDAAA245063      Revision: c.9      4(11)







	3	 	Measurements





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	ISO	 	Wartsila
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Tolerance,	 	Tolerance,
	Symbol	 	Definition	 	Measuring point	 	Unit	 	max	 	max 1)
	py

	 	Total barometric pressure
	 	At engine air intake filter
	 	kPa
	 	± 0,5 %
	 	± 0,2 %
	 
	ty

	 	Ambient air
thermodynamic
temperature
	 	At engine air intake filter
	 	K
	 	± 2 K
	 	± 1 K
	 
	tcy

	 	Chare air coolant
thermodynamic
temperature
	 	At charge air cooler inlet
	 	K
	 	± 2 K
	 	± 1 K
	 
	mfin

	 	Mass of fuel in to engine
	 	Engine/Plant specific mass
flow meter
	 	kg
	 	± 3 %
	 	± 0,5 %
	 
	mfout

	 	Mass of fuel out from
engine
	 	Engine/Plant specific mass
flow meter
	 	kg
	 	 	 	± 0,5 %
	 
	mfleak

	 	Mass of leak fuel
	 	 	 	kg
	 	 	 	± 1,0 %
	 
	LHV

	 	Lower heating value
	 	at Engine/Plant specific
mass flow meter
	 	MJ/kg
	 	 	 	± 0,5 %
	 
	E

	 	Electrical energy
	 	PMU / EMU 2)
	 	kWh
	 	 	 	± 0,5 %
	 
	tt

	 	time
	 	 	 	s
	 	 	 	± 0,1 %








 




			
	1)	 	Wärtsilä recommends equipments with these accuracies, however actual tolerances of
measuring equipment used during the test(s), shall be used for calculating Electrical Power and
Heat rate as per section 4.4 and 5.4 respectively.
	 
	2)	 	This is the point of measurement as per agreement between the Contractor and Owner.




 









 










			
	
	 	Doc. Classification:

DocID: WDAAA245063      Revision: c.9      5(11)







	4	 	Electrical Power Test






	4.1	 	General




The Electrical Power Test is preferably done concurrently with the Heat Rate Test.


The engines involved in the test shall run for 2 (two) hours at full load prior to the start of the
test in order to achieve stable conditions in all engine components and external systems.



Because there can be major variations in the ambient conditions during the full test period, it is
important to split the full test period into shorter hourly test periods. These hourly test periods
are then used to calculate the average of the full test. Please note that under no circumstances
should an average of the ambient conditions prevailing over the full test period be used for the
adjustment.



For accuracy of the test it is important that all measurement readings are taken simultaneously.
This can be best achieved by a cordless communication system.



The required measurements are done on an hourly basis and the readings recorded on a form. The
period can differ somewhat from one hour without affecting the accuracy of the test. The electrical
power is calculated from the produced electrical energy during each test period. The actual
electrical power and actual fuel consumed is naturally the sum of all hourly test periods.



The guaranteed electrical power and heat rate for each hourly test period is adjusted for the
ambient conditions prevailing and measured at the start of each hourly test period.

The final guaranteed power and heat rate during the full test, is the average of the adjusted
powers and the average of the recalculated heat rates, which are calculated separately for each
hourly test period.



The point of measurement depends on the agreement between the Contractor and Owner.



Power factor during the test shall be equal to or above 0,8. No corrections will be made for power
factors higher than 0,8.



Only equipment required for normal operation of the plant shall be running during the test. Any
redundant equipment shall be shut down. A list detailing which consumers are connected during the
test is included in section 6.



The substitute reference conditions are described in Exhibit B — Performance Guarantees / Figures.





	4.2	 	Adjustment of electrical power for ambient conditions




A Diesel engine will react on the ambient conditions in a very complicated manner. The ISO 15550
and ISO 3046 standards give a uniformed way to adjust performance from one condition to another.
The adjustment is always done via reference conditions that can be either the standard reference
conditions as stipulated in ISO 15550:2002 clause 5 or the substitute reference conditions declared
by the engine manufacturer.



The formulas below are according to ISO 3046.



Exponent values are from ISO 3046-1:2002 (E), Table 2 for

Engine type: Diesel engines and dual fuel compression-ignition engines operating on liquid fuel,
Conditions: Turbocharged with charge air cooling, Low and medium speed four-stroke engines, Formula reference: D



Exponent values are: m = 0,7           n = 1,2           s = 1




 









 








			
	
	 	Doc. Classification:

DocID: WDAAA245063      Revision: c.9      6(11)










The Energy is measured using PMU (Power Monitoring Measuring Unit) or a separate EMU(Energy
Measuring Unit) depending on the point of measurement. The Power is then calculated from the Energy
for each test period. These are then used to calculate the average power for the Electrical Power
Test and also for the Heat rate test, if being done concurrently.




P = Ep / tt




 









 








			
		 	Doc. Classification:

DocID: WDAAA245063      Revision: c.9      7(11)
	 
		 	







Where Ep = Eg or Emv or Ehv dependent on the agreed
point of measurement.



Emv = Eg — Eo and Ehv = Emv — Esu





	4.3	 	Measurement tolerances in electrical power test




The measurement tolerances will cause a measurement uncertainty in the measured electrical power.
The components involved are the measuring transformers and the power measuring unit, and in some
special cases only the energy measuring unit. The typical tolerance will be in the range of ± 0,3 %
to 1,0 %.



Tolerance usage is according to ISO 3046-3:2002 (E), clause 4.4.4









4.4 Electrical Power




The electrical power is between








The test is successfully passed if Pmax > Pguaranteed



The contractor is entitled to a possible bonus if Pmin > Pguaranteed 



If Pguaranteed is between Pmin and Pmax, neither penalty nor
bonus will apply.




 









 








			
	
	 	Doc. Classification:

DocID: WDAAA245063      Revision: c.9      8(11)







	5	 	Heat rate test






	5.1	 	General




The Heat Rate Test is preferably done concurrently with the Electrical Power Test.



The engines involved in the test shall run for 2 (two) hours at full load prior to the start of the
test in order to achieve stable conditions in all engine components and external systems.



Because there can be major variations in the ambient conditions during the full test period, it is
important to split the full test period into shorter hourly test periods. These hourly test periods
are then used to calculate the average of the full test. Please note that under no circumstances
should an average of the ambient conditions prevailing over the full test period be used for the
adjustment.



For accuracy of the test it is important that all measurement readings are taken simultaneously.
This can be best achieved by a cordless communication system.



The required measurements are done on an hourly basis and the readings recorded on a form. The
period can differ somewhat from one hour without affecting the accuracy of the test. The electrical
power is calculated from the produced electrical energy during each test period. 


The guaranteed
electrical power and heat rate for each hourly test period is adjusted for the ambient conditions
prevailing and measured at the start of each hourly test period.



The final guaranteed power and heat rate during the full test, is the average of the adjusted
powers and the average of the recalculated heat rates, which are calculated separately for each
hourly test period.



The point of measurement depends on the agreement between the Contractor and Owner.



Fuel samples are taken before and after the test. If samples are taken during the test, then the
amount of samples and spillage is to be deducted from the measured fuel consumption. Two samples
are taken at each sampling time. Both samples are sealed and signed, one is kept as a reference and
the other is sent to an independent laboratory for analysis.



The analysis should cover all the items stipulated in the fuel specification in agreement between
the contractor and owner. The laboratory report shall include LHV and the tolerance on the LHV. The
average LHV of the samples is used in all calculations.



Power factor during the test shall be equal to or above 0,8. No corrections will be made for power
factors higher than 0,8.



Only equipment required for normal operation of the plant shall be running during the test. Any
redundant equipment shall be shut down. A list detailing which consumers are connected during the
test is included in section 6.




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	The standard reference conditions are :
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Ambient air barometric pressure
	 	 	=	 	 	 	100 kPa
	Ambient air temperature
	 	 	=	 	 	 	25 C	 
	LT Coolant temperature
	 	 	=	 	 	 	25 C	 







	5.2	 	Recalculation of heat rate for ambient conditions




A Diesel engine will react on the ambient conditions in a very complicated manner. The ISO 15550
and ISO 3046 standards give a uniformed way to adjust performance from one condition to another.
The adjustment is always done via standard reference conditions as stipulated in ISO 15550:2002
clause 5.




 









 








			
	
	 	Doc. Classification:

DocID: WDAAA245063      Revision: c.9      9(11)





The formulas below are according to ISO 3046 and the exponent values are from ISO 3046-1:2002 (E),
Table 2 for



Engine type: Diesel engines and dual fuel compression-ignition engines operating on liquid fuel,
Conditions: Turbocharged with charge air cooling, Low and medium speed four-stroke engines, Formula
reference: D



Exponent values are: m = 0, 7           n = 1, 2           s = 1









 









 








			
	
	 	Doc. Classification:

DocID: WDAAA245063      Revision: c.9      10(11)












	5.3	 	Measuring tolerances in Heat Rate test




Tolerance usage according to ( ISO 3046-3:1995(E), 4.4.4 )










	5.4	 	Heat Rate




The heat rate is between








The test is successfully passed if rmin
< rguaranteed. 



The contractor is entitled to a possible bonus if rmax
< rguaranteed. 



If rguaranteed is between rmin
 and rmax , neither penalty nor
bonus will apply.





 











 





Doc. Classification:




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	DocID: WDAAA245063
	 	Revision: c.9
	 	11(11)






5.5 List of auxiliary equipment operational status during tests



Auto Mode: Equipment is running continuously or intermittently, governed by the plant control
system



Shut down: Equipment is not running



This list needs to be specified depending on scope of supply.




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	System	 	Equipment	 	Auto Mode	 	Shut down
	Cooling System
	 	Radiators	 	X	 	 
	Cooling System
	 	Pre-heater unit	 	 	 	X
	Fuel System
	 	Fuel unloading pump	 	 	 	X
	Fuel System
	 	HFO Transfer pump unit	 	X	 	 
	Fuel System
	 	HFO feeder pump unit	 	X	 	 
	Fuel System
	 	Booster unit	 	X	 	 
	Fuel System
	 	LFO Unloading pump unit	 	 	 	X
	Fuel System
	 	LFO feeder pump unit	 	X	 	 
	Fuel System
	 	HFO separator module	 	X	 	 
	Lube oil System
	 	Pre-lube pump unit	 	 	 	X
	Lube oil System
	 	Lube oil transfer pump unit	 	 	 	X
	Lube oil System
	 	Lube oil Separator	 	X	 	 
	Air System
	 	Starting air compressor	 	 	 	X
	Air System
	 	Working air compressor	 	 	 	X
	Charge air System
	 	Charge air filter	 	X	 	 
	Plant
	 	Control and Monitoring	 	X	 	 
	Plant
	 	Lighting	 	X	 	 
	Plant
	 	Ventilation	 	X	 	 
	Plant
	 	Workshop	 	 	 	X
	Plant
	 	Overhead crane	 	 	 	X
	Plant
	 	Laboratory	 	 	 	X
	Steam system
	 	Feed water pump unit	 	 	 	X
	Steam system
	 	Circulation pump	 	 	 	X
	....
	 	....	 	 	 	 
	....
	 	....	 	 	 	 





 









 






















Power Plants







Doc.
Classification: Confidential




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Title:

	 	3. Lubricating oil consumption test
	 	Doc.ID:
	 	DAAB184367
	 

	 	 	 	Revision:
	 	b.6
	Author:

	 	JNO005/ 20-Aug-2008
	 	Status:
	 	Draft
	Draft by:

	 	Kenneth Engblom / 24-Nov-2008
	 	Pages:
	 	1 (2)
	Project:

	 	-	 	 	 	 
	Description:

	 	Lubricating Oil Consumption Test	 	 	 	 
	Type:

	 	Guideline	 	 	 	 











	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	1	Objective
	 	 	1	 
	 	2	Symbols
	 	 	1	 
	 	3	Definitions
	 	 	1	 
	 	4	Duration
	 	 	2	 
	 	5	Lube Oil Consumption Measurements
	 	 	2	 







	1	 	Objective
	 
	 	 	The objective of this performance test is to measure the lube oil consumption of the
engines.
	 
	2	 	Symbols





	 	 	 	 	 
	SYMBOL	 	DESCRIPTION	 	UNIT
	tt

	 	Duration of test
	 	h
	V

	 	Volume of lube oil
	 	m3
	clo

	 	Lube oil consumption
	 	kg/h
	mlo

	 	Mass of lube oil
	 	kg
	r

	 	Density of lube oil
	 	kg/m3
	b

	 	Expansion co-efficient
	 	—







	3	 	Definitions
	 
	 	 	Density of lubricating oil changes as a function of temperature. This must be taken into
account when measuring lubricating oil consumption. Lubricating oil density is normally given at 15
oC temperature and the product specific value can be found from the Product Data Sheet of the
lubricating oil in question. Following formula is used when calculating lubricating oil density at
different temperature.
	 
	 	 	





 









 






Doc. Classification: Confidential




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	DocID: DAAB184367
	 	Revision: b.6
	 	 	 	2(2)







	 	 	
	 
	4	 	Duration
	 
	 	 	The lube oil consumption test will be run during a minimum 48 h period.
	 
	5	 	Lube Oil Consumption Measurements
	 
	 	 	If possible its recommended to run other tests before this test to have the engine running
hours as high as possible. 100 running hours or more will give more reliable lube oil
consumption figures.
	 
	 	 	The engines should be run at a minimum of 85 % of maximum site power during the test.
	 
	 	 	The lube oil separator should not run during the Lube Oil consumption test, because the
Lube Oil consumption guarantee is based on the Engine consumption only, otherwise the oil
discharged by the separator would be included in the engine oil consumption.
However the maximum recommended time for running without Separator and new Lube Oil is 48
Hours on Heavy Fuel Oil. If longer Lube Oil test intervals is required, the Lube Oil test
must be done running on LFO, to prevent that the oil quality deteriorates below limits.
	 
	 	 	The temperature of the oil and the amount of air bubbles in the oil will affect the
readings. In order to improve the accuracy of the measurements the conditions at the
beginning and end of the test should be kept similar. The engine should run for a minimum
of two hours at minimum 85 % load before the first reading is taken. The reading is taken
20 min after the engine has been stopped according to the normal shut down procedure. The
final reading is similarly taken 20 min
after the engine has stopped after the test. All pumps and separators in the lube oil
system will be stopped at the same time as the engine.
	 
	 	 	The level of oil will be recorded before and after the test with the dipstick in the engine
oil sump. The Lube Oil consumption is calculated based on the differences on the oil level.
The consumed oil amount is a function of the dipstick level difference and can be found as
a reference document to the project specific test procedures.





 









 






















Power Plants







Doc. Classification: Confidential




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Title:

	 	4. Stack Emissions Test
	 	Doc.ID:
	 	DAAB195899

	 

	 	 	 	Revision:
	 	b.10
	Author:

	 	A Suominen / K Reunamo/ 20-elo-2008
	 	Status:
	 	Draft

	Draft by:

	 	Kenneth Engblom / 27-Mar-2009
	 	Pages:
	 	1 (4)
	Project:

	 	-	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Description:

	 	Stack Emission Test	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Type:

	 	Guideline	 	 	 	 	 	 











	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	1	Objective
	 	 	1	 
	 	2	Testing Procedures and Conditions
	 	 	1	 
	 	3	Measurement Methods
	 	 	2	 
	 	4	Calibration
	 	 	3	 
	 	5	Uncertainty Assessment and Acceptance
	 	 	4	 






1 Objective



The objective of the Stack Emission Test is to verify compliance with the Stack Emissions Guarantee
set forth in the Agreement.



2 Testing Procedures and Conditions



The emission performance figures provided in the Stack Emission Guarantee are valid for the
emission measurement methods and standards specified in the emission guarantee document. This
document specifies testing procedures and additional requirements to be followed during the tests
in order for the stack emission guarantees to be valid.



Some measurement methods and standards allow different variations of how the measurements are
performed for example depending on application. If the Stack Emission Guarantees or this document
specifies the use of a specific variation to the method, this recommendation needs to be strictly
adhered to. Any other variations of the method or use of an alternative method must be agreed
mutually between both parties.



Compliance with the Stack Emission Guarantee will be demonstrated as far as practicable
concurrently with the other performance tests of the Plant. Similar engines running on same
conditions have same emission performance. In plants having multiple engines appropriate amount of
engines will be tested and plant average stack emission will be calculated based on these
measurements. This calculated plant average emission will be seen sufficient for demonstrating the
fulfilment of Stack Emissions Guarantee. An accredited, preferably third party, measurement
consultant will be assigned to carry out the measurements and to issue a Stack Emission Test
report.



The flue gas stack emission measurements will be performed at 100% engine power at stable running
of the Engine if not otherwise mutually agreed. Prior to start of the flue gas emission (stack)
measurements, the Engine shall be operated for a minimum of two hours at 100% load in order to
obtain steady state conditions. Contractor shall have the
right to inspect the Engines to be tested prior to the test and conduct corrective adjustments,
repairs, etc., if needed.




 









 








Doc. Classification: Confidential




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	DocID: DAAB195899
	 	Revision: b.10
	 	 	 	2(4)





In the flue gas (stack) emission measurements, sufficiently long sampling periods and a sufficient
number of samples shall be taken in order to get statistically representative results. Based on
Wärtsilä experience, the following minimum requirements apply:





	 	o	 	Gaseous components (analyser procedures): Emissions are calculated based on a minimum
averaging time of 60 minutes. The period can differ somewhat from one hour without affecting
the accuracy of the test.
	 
	 	o	 	Gaseous components (discrete sampling): The emissions are calculated based on the average of
minimum three samples. A minimum sampling time of 30 minutes per sample is recommended. Note
that some methods may necessitate shorter sampling times. In such cases, the sampling times
shall be checked case by case.
	 
	 	o	 	Particle emissions: The particle emissions are calculated based on the average of minimum
three samples. For heavy fuel oil a minimum sampling time per sample of 30 minutes is
recommended. For light fuel oil 60 minutes is recommended, while for gas fired engines a
minimum sampling time of 90 minutes is recommended.




Longer sampling times might be needed, if required by the measurement method or if variations in
the measured concentrations are expected. Longer sampling times are also recommended if the
verification of the Guarantee requires accurate determination of very low concentrations.



The analysers typically report the emissions at actual conditions, such as for example ppm-v, at
actual oxygen, wet. The measurement results have to be corrected to the same reference
conditions (e.g. mg/Nm3. at 15 % O2, dry) where the Stack Emission
Guarantees are specified
before evaluation of compliance with the Guarantees can be made. These calculations are performed
by the independent consultant. The measurement report shall include both the corrected emission and
the uncorrected emission data including help variables such as oxygen and humidity used for
correcting to reference conditions. At request the consultant will prepare a preliminary report /
standard recording form at site.



Other data which is to be recorded during emission tests include fuel data, ambient conditions
(temperature, humidity) and engine data (at minimum engine load during the test). Taking of the
fuel samples is usually coordinated with other performance tests. This data is shall be appended to
the measurement report




3 Measurement Methods



The measurement methods and standards to be used are specified in combination with the stack
emission guarantees. In this chapter basic measurement principles for most typical emission
species are provided, as well as additional requirements that need to be followed in order for the
stack emission guarantees to be valid and in order to have reliable measurement results. In case
the measurement methods have not been specified in the stack emission guarantees, verification of
the emission guarantees shall be performed according to the below recommendations.




 









 








Doc. Classification: Confidential




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	DocID: DAAB195899
	 	Revision: b.10
	 	3(4)





The chemiluminescence analyser as described in the US EPA Method 7E and in other principally
similar methods and standards will be used for nitrogen oxides (NOx) analyses.



Calculation method as described for example in the ISO CD 8178-1: 1996 (E) standard (chapter
7.4.3.7) will be used to determine of SO2 emissions. Determination of SO2
emissions from fuel composition using a combustion balance will provide more accurate data compared
to direct measurements. Fuel samples (minimum 1 litre each) will be taken during the test period
and analysed in an accredited laboratory. Direct measurements are
only recommended in cases where the
SO2 emissions are controlled using “secondary technology”.



Note that the SO2 emissions from gaseous fuels are typically so low that determination
of SO2 emissions is not relevant. If determination is required, e.g. for legislative
reasons, it is recommended to use a theoretical calculation based on a combustion balance also for
gas engines.



The concentration of particulate matter (as dry dust) will be determined by a manual gravimetric
method as described in the ISO 9096:2003(E) and in other principally similar standards. Many
measurement methods and standards for particles provide procedures for both in-stack and out-stack
sampling of particles. It is important to note that the two variations will provide different
results as a result of the temperature dependence of particle emissions. Therefore, the emissions
guarantees are valid only for the procedure specified in the Stack Emission Guarantees. Unless
specified differently in the Guarantees, the following apply:





	 	o	 	If the flue gas temperature exceeds 160 °C in the point of PM sampling, an in-stack filter
shall be used for collecting the PM samples.
	 
	 	o	 	In case the flue gas temperature is equal to or less than 160 °C at the point of PM sampling,
a heated out-stack filter shall be applied.




For PM measurement of the flue gas from engines burning sulphur containing fuels, the filter
material to be used for sampling must be inert enough. Quartz fibre is a recommended filter
material. Glass fibre filters must not be used.



The particle emissions in the exhaust gas after a gas engine are generally on a low level and are
therefore typically not verified.



Note that the weighing of the PM samples typically will take place at a laboratory outside the job
site and hence no PM measurement results are available at the completion of the Stack Emission
Test.



4 Calibration



Analyzers for measuring gaseous components shall be calibrated to ensure accurate measurements. The
calibration of the analysers shall be carried out using certified calibration gas.



As a minimum, one span gas (high-range gas) having a concentration near the measured
concentration shall be used for each component. The zero gas can be purified ambient air or
N2. The impurity concentration shall be less than 0.25 % of the span in the zero gas.
The O2 analyser





 









 








Doc. Classification: Confidential




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	DocID: DAAB195899
	 	Revision: b.10
	 	4(4)





will be
calibrated using a calibration gas, such as N2 and ambient air. N2 is needed in setting the zero point and ambient air for
setting the span.



The analysers for the gaseous components will be calibrated daily at the Job Site. Analysers shall
be calibrated prior to commencing the measurements as well as after the measurements. The setting
of the zero and span points shall be performed according to the emission measurement methods and
standards. Unless otherwise specified by the measurement method or standards, the following
recommendations shall apply:





	 	o	 	Instrument calibration drift of 2-5 % of calibration gas concentration: the results shall be
corrected using the determined drift figures.
	 
	 	o	 	If instrument calibration drift of more than 5 % of calibration gas concentration is
determined, the reason for the drift shall be determined and the tests shall be re-performed.




Pitot tubes, thermal elements and manometers shall be calibrated before the shipment to the Job
Site. The traceable calibration certificates for this equipment as well as for the calibration
gases will be made available. The analytical balance, which is used in the laboratory for weighing
the PM samples, shall be traceably calibrated. The relevant calibration certificates and
calibration gas certificates shall be appended to the measurement report.



5 Uncertainty Assessment and Acceptance



Emission measurements involve significant measurement uncertainties. Therefore, the uncertainties
need to be quantified and accounted for in a predefined way.



Uncertainties originate from the whole measurement chain including sampling point, sampling line,
analyser tolerance, fuel heating value, density and fuel flow measurement. The document published
by the WECC (Western European Calibration Co-operation) DOC.19 — 1990 “Guidelines for the
Expression of the Uncertainty of Measurements in Calibration” gives detailed guidelines on
calculating and assessing uncertainties. Measurement uncertainties shall be evaluated and reported
by the measurement consultant carrying out the measurements.



Assessment of the fulfilment of Flue Gas Emission Guarantee shall be made according to Section 6.2
of the VDI 2048 document “Uncertainties of measurement during acceptance tests on energy-conversion
and power plants”. If the measured value minus the uncertainty is equal to or lower than the
guaranteed value, as set forth in the
Agreement, the Stack Emissions Guarantee shall be deemed as demonstrated and fulfilled.




 









 








EXHIBIT D — MODEL ADVANCE PAYMENT GUARANTEE



[Letterhead of the Guarantor (a Financial Institution i.e. bank or insurance company)
nominated by the Supplier and acceptable to the Buyer



Please note that all text within < > are intended to be replaced with the
information indicated within those brackets in the final version of the Guarantee.




ADVANCE PAYMENT GUARANTEE




To: <Name and address of Beneficiary/Buyer>





	1.	 	We refer to the supply contract No.
<                                       
 > dated
<                                       
 > (hereinafter
referred to as “the Contract”) signed between your corporation <Company name and
address> (hereinafter referred to as “the Buyer”) and <Name and address of Wärtsilä
Company> (hereinafter referred to as “the “the Supplier”) for supply and delivery of
equipment for power plant, as more specifically determined in the Contract (hereinafter
referred to as “the Goods”) for the total contract price of EUR <Price in figures>
(say
<                                       
                     > only) (hereinafter referred to as “the Contract Price”).
	 
	2.	 	In consideration of your agreeing to pay in advance an amount of EUR <Amount in
figures> (say
<                                       
                                       
  > only) (hereinafter referred to as
“the Advance Payment”) representing <              > %
(<                                      

 > percent) of the
Contract Price to the Supplier, and in consideration of you having agreed to accept this
Guarantee covering Supplier’s fulfilment of its contractual obligations towards you, we
<the bank>, being the Guarantor under this Guarantee, hereby irrevocably and
unconditionally undertake to pay you, without any notice, reference or recourse to the
Supplier or to any other person or entity, on receipt of your first written demand
(hereinafter referred to as “the Demand”), any sum or sums up to an aggregate maximum
amount up to but not exceeding EUR <Guarantee Amount> (say
<                                       
                     > only); provided that any such Demand shall be
accompanied by your duly signed statement stating:






	 	i)	 	that the Supplier is in breach of its obligation(s) under the underlying Contract; and
	 
	 	ii)	 	the respect in which the Supplier is in breach and that the claimed amount for the
described breach is due and payable by the Supplier in terms of the Contract, and, that you
have given a notice of the breach to the Supplier according to the Contract and still the
Supplier has not performed its obligations in accordance with the Contract.






	 	 	For the purpose of identification and authentication, the Buyer’s claim and the
accompanied document(s) shall have to be presented to the Guarantor through the intermediary
of Buyer’s Banker confirming that the signatures thereon are those of the authorised
signatories of the Buyer.
	 
	3.	 	We further agree that notwithstanding any claims, demands or objections by Supplier, any
amount(s) claimed in the aggregate within <insert Guarantee Amount> notified by you
as due and payable by Supplier in accordance with the terms of the Contract shall be
accepted by us as conclusive evidence of the




 









 










[Letterhead of the Guarantor (a Financial Institution i.e. bank or insurance company)
nominated by the Supplier and acceptable to the Buyer





	 	   	claimed amount being due and payable by us under this Guarantee without you needing
otherwise to prove or show ground or reason for your demand of the sum specified therein.
	 
	4.	 	We shall be entitled and obliged to rely and shall rely upon your demand presented
hereunder and shall be under no duty to nor shall we inquire into any circumstances
relating to any demand. We hereby waive any right we may have of first requiring the
Buyer to pursue its legal remedies against Supplier.
	 
	5.	 	It is a condition for payment of any claim under this Guarantee that the Advance Payment
of Euro <Amount in figures> (say
<                                       
                     >) has been
received by the Supplier to its account number <account number> with <Supplier’s
Designated Bank>, in <City, Country> (Swift Code/BIC: <Swift Code/BIC of
Supplier’s Designated Bank>).
	 
	7.	 	Upon our receipt from the Supplier of copies of invoices and delivery documents,
indicating the value of delivered goods, the present guarantee shall be reduced, against
receipt of such documents as conclusive evidence, by < advance payment in percent of
equipment price> % of the gross invoice value for each set of these documents.
	 
	8.	 	This Guarantee shall remain in full force until:






	   	i)	 	our (Guarantor’s) receipt of, from the Supplier, executed copy of the Substantial Completion
Certificate,; or
	 
	 	ii)	 	<dd.mm.yyyy>1;or
	 
	 	iii)	 	this advance payment guarantee is returned to the
Guarantor by the Buyer; or
	 
	 	iv)	 	payment by the Guarantor to the Buyer of the whole of the sum.






	 	 	whichever is the earlier (the “Expiry Date”).
	 
	 	 	Consequently any claim thereof should be made and received by the above Expiry Date at
the latest. Should we receive no claim from you by that date our liability will cease “ipso
facto” and the present letter of Guarantee, whether returned to us or not, will definitely
become null and void.
	 
	9.	 	Multiple drawings and claims may be made by you under this Guarantee.
	 
	10.	 	We hereby agree that any part of the Contract may be amended, renewed, extended, modified,
compromised, released or discharged by mutual agreement between you and the Supplierwithout in
any way impairing or affecting our liabilities hereunder without notice to us and without the
necessity for any additional endorsement, consent or guarantee by us, provided, however that
the sum guaranteed shall not be decreased or increased.
	 
	11.	 	Any reference in this Guarantee to any contract, agreement, document or any other
instrument is for ease of reference only.
	 
	12.	 	This guarantee is personal to you and not assignable. The beneficiary may not assign /
transfer any benefit of this guarantee without our written consent which we will not
unreasonably withhold or delay







 




			
	1	 	The expiration date expressed in form of a calendar date shall be set to the
date 60 days after, in the contract stipulated, delivery date.




Page 2 of
3









 






[Letterhead of the Guarantor (a Financial Institution i.e. bank or insurance company)
nominated by the Supplier and acceptable to the Buyer





	13.	 	Except insofar as otherwise expressly stated, this Guarantee is subject to the
Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, published as number 458 by the International Chamber
of Commerce, and as to matters not covered by URDG458 shall be governed and construed in
accordance with the laws of <the domicile country of the Guarantor> and all
disputes arising hereunder shall be finally settled by arbitration under the Rules of
Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce.








<the Guarantor>



Page 3 of 3











 





EXHIBIT E – MODEL PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE




Letterhead of Guarantor (a Financial Institution i.e. a bank or insurance company) nominated by the
Supplier and acceptable to the Buyer



Please note that all text within <  > are intended to be replaced with the information
indicated within those brackets in the final version of the Guarantee



PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE




To: <Name and address of Beneficiary/Buyer>





	1.	 	We refer to the supply contract No. [                    ] dated
[                    ](hereinafter referred to as “the
Contract”) signed between your corporation [_Company name
and address] (hereinafter referred to as “The Buyer”) and <Name and address of Wärtsilä Company> (hereinafter referred to as “the
Supplier”) for supply and delivery of equipment for power plant, as more specifically determined in
the Contract (hereinafter referred to as “the Goods”) for the total contract price of EUR[<Price
in figures>] (say                     only) (hereinafter referred to as “the Contract Price”).
	 
	2.	 	We <the Guarantor> hereby issue in your favour our performance security being irrevocable
guarantee for an amount up to but not exceeding <currency and amount> (say <currency and
amount in words>) (hereinafter referred to as
“Guarantee”) representing <______>%
(<___> percent) of the Contract value, covering Supplier’s fulfilment of its
obligations under the Contract. Any claims up to the above said aggregate shall be payable by us to
you on receipt of your first written demand and your written statement stating:






	 	(i)	 	that the Supplier is in breach of its obligation(s) under the underlying Contract;
	 
	 	(ii)	 	the respect in which the Supplier is in breach and that the claimed amount for the described
breach is due and payable by the Supplier in terms of the Contract, and, that you have given a
notice of the breach to the Supplier according to the Contract and still the Supplier has not
performed its obligations in accordance with the Contract; and






	 	 	For the purpose of identification and authentication, the Buyer’s claim and the accompanied
document(s) shall have to be presented to the Guarantor through the intermediary of Buyer’s Banker
confirming that the signatures thereon are those of the authorised signatories of the Buyer
	 
	3.	 	We further agree that notwithstanding any claims, demands or objections by Supplier, any
amount(s) claimed in the aggregate within [insert Guarantee Amount] notified by you as due and
payable by Supplier in accordance with the terms of the Contract shall be accepted by us as
conclusive evidence of the claimed amount being due and payable by us under this Guarantee without
you needing otherwise to prove or show ground or reason for your demand of the sum specified
therein.
	 
	4.	 	We shall be entitled and obliged to rely and shall rely upon your demand presented hereunder and
shall be under no duty to nor shall we inquire into any circumstances relating to any demand. We
hereby waive any right we may have of first requiring the Buyer to pursue its legal remedies
against Supplier and waive presentment, demand, protest or notice of any kind whatsoever.




 









 











Page 2 / 2




Letterhead of Guarantor (a Financial Institution i.e. a bank or insurance company) nominated by the
Supplier and acceptable to the Buyer




	5.	 	The maximum amount of this guarantee shall be adjusted, automatically, following our receipt
from the Supplier of a copy of the Buyer’s approved Performance Test Completion Certificate
purportedly signed by its authorized officer(s), in value so that the outstanding value of the
Guarantee equals Euro <insert % of contract price> (say:Euros ___) (the “Adjusted
Guaranteed Amount”).]






	6.	 	Not in use






	7.	 	This Guarantee will expire on the earlier of (the “Expiry Date”):






	 	(i)	 	30 days after the end of primary warranty period lapsing under the Contract [twelve (12)]
months from the issue of Performance Test Completion Certificate or 15 months from the Delivery in
accordance with clause 5.2(a), whichever first occur; or
	 
	 	(ii)	 	<dd.mm.yyyy> in Helsinki, Finland.1; or
	 
	 	iii)	 	this advance payment guarantee is returned to the Guarantor by the Buyer; or
	 
	 	iv)	 	payment by the Guarantor to the Buyer of the whole of the sum.






	 	 	Consequently any claim thereof should be made to us by the above Expiry Date at the latest. Should
we receive no claim from you by the Expiry Date our liability will cease “ipso facto” and the
present Guarantee will whether returned to us or not definitely become null and void.
	 
	8.	 	This Guarantee is personal to you and not assignable. The beneficiary may not assign / transfer
any benefit of this guarantee without our written consent which we will not unreasonably withhold
or delay
	 
	9.	 	Multiple drawings and claims may be made by you under this Guarantee.
	 
	10.	 	We hereby agree that any part of the Contract may be amended, renewed, extended, modified,
compromised, released or discharged by mutual agreement between you and the Supplier without in any
way impairing or affecting our liabilities hereunder without notice to us and without the necessity
for any additional endorsement, consent or guarantee by us, provided, however that the sum
guaranteed shall not be decreased or increased.
	 
	11.	 	Except insofar as otherwise expressly stated, this Guarantee is subject to Uniform Rules for
Demand Guarantees, published as number 458 by the International Chamber of Commerce, and as to
matters not covered by URDG458 shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of
[<the domicile country of the Guarantor>] and all disputes arising hereunder shall be finally
settled by arbitration under the Rules of Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce.





<the Guarantor>






 




			
	1	 	To be expressed as a calendar date, being 60 days after the projected date of end of
Warranty period 12 months from the date of the scheduled performance tests in accordance with
project time schedule




 









 










EXHIBIT F – Model Payment Guarantee




1. Model Payment Guarantee




 









 










			
	 	 	 
	Bank Guarantee
	 	











	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 

	 	 	 	 	 	G	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 






			
	To	 	FAVOUREE
 (‘Favouree’)

Security for obligations of

CLIENT

(Customer)





The Customer is required to provide security to the Favouree for the performance of obligations
under a contract for:








<<INSERT
DETAILS E.G. PAYMENT OF RENT FOR PREMISES AT XXXX/SATISFACTORY
COMPLETION OF BUILDING WORK AT XXXX/SATISFACTORY CONNECTION OF WATER/ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AT XXXX>>






Commonwealth Bank of Australia ABN 48 123 123 124 (‘Bank’) has agreed to provide this guarantee
which the Favouree has agreed to accept as the security.



The Bank unconditionally undertakes to pay on written demand any sum which may from time to time be
demanded by the Favouree to a maximum aggregate sum of



Guaranteed Amount (in words and figures)




	 	 	 	 	 
	<<INSERT AMOUNT IN WORDS>>
	 	$	0.00	 






This guarantee is to continue until one of the following events occur:




	 	•	 	the Bank receives written notification from the Favouree that this guarantee is no longer
required;
	 
	 	•	 	the return of this guarantee to the Bank;
	 
	 	•	 	payment to the Favouree by the Bank of the whole of the Guaranteed Amount or such lesser sum as
may be required by the Favouree;
	 
	 	•	 	the arrival of the Expiry Date namely #########, and no demand may be made on the Bank unless made
and delivered to the Bank prior to the Expiry Date.





Should the Favouree notify the Bank in writing that it requires payment to be made to it of the
whole or any part or parts of the Guaranteed Amount, it is unconditionally agreed that such payment
will be made to the Favouree forthwith without further reference to the Customer and
notwithstanding any notice given by the Customer to the Bank not to pay same. The Bank reserves the
right to require proof of identity of any person acting on behalf of the Favouree and to confirm
the authenticity of the written notification of the Favouree before making payment to the Favouree.



Provided always that the Bank may at any time without being required to do so pay to the Favouree
the Guaranteed Amount less any amount it may have already paid hereunder and thereupon the Bank’s
liability under this guarantee shall immediately cease .



The Benefit of this guarantee is personal and not capable of assignment but claims by the Favouree
may be paid at the Favouree’s direction to other persons.



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Dated at

	 	<<INSERT PLACE OF ISSUE>>
	 	 	 	<<DAY>>
	day of

	 	<<INSERT MONTH>>
	 	<<YEAR>>	 	 






For the

Commonwealth Bank of Australia

Premium Business Services

Institutional Lending Support

Level 5, 48 Martin Place Sydney NSW 2000




On Behalf Of

Manager, Bank Guarantees

Institutional Lending Support

Manager




Page 1 of 1








 









 








EXHIBIT G – DRAFT QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN




1. Quality plan / ITP, doc id; DBAB082233-7



2. Engine test protocol form



3. Alternator test report form



 









 








		
	 	 
	




- General



Power Plants
	 









	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Doc. Classification:		Confidential
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	Title:

	 	Quality plan / ITP for Power Supply Uppgrade, LGL
	 	DocID:
	 	DBAB082233
	 

	 	(extended scope)
	 	Revision:
	 	-.7
	 
	Author:

	 	Robert Witting / 09-Jul-2009
	 	Sheets:
	 	1
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	Draft by:

	 	Robert Witting / 14-Aug-2009
	 	Status:
	 	Draft
	 

	 	Benny Krohn / 25-Aug-2009	 	 	 	 
	 
	Project:

	 	P0900329 Lihir Power Barge	 	 	 	 
	 
	Description:

	 	Quality Assurance	 	 	 	 
	 
	Type:

	 	Quality Plan / ITP	 	 	 	 
	 











PROJECT




The Quality Plan is defining all major Quality assurance activities and responsibilities for the scope of supply related to the power 
plant
project with the aim of achieving customer confidence in the provided power plant delivery.




The Quality Plan is based on the Quality assurance system of Wärtsilä, and it is defined in the Quality Manual of Wärtsilä Power Plants.




Document Classification:

Confidential




Page 1/8









 








PROCEDURES FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE AND H&SE OF WÄRTSILÄ POWER PLANT SUPPLY




1. MANAGEMENT SYSTEM OF WÄRTSILÄ




Wärtsilä Finland Oy follows a Quality management system that has been assessed to conform to the
ISO 9001 standard and an Environmental management system that has been assessed to conform to the
ISO 14001 standard. Wärtsilä have also implement Occupational Health and Safety management system
OHSAS 18001, this will be certified during August 2009 . The management system is assessed
continuously by an external body, re-auditing the system twice a year.



2. WÄRTSILÄ POLICY FOR QUALITY, HEALTH & SAFETY AND THE ENVIRONMENT




Policy statement:



Our Power solutions and services meet or exceed the customers’ and other
stakeholders’ expectations being:



- Reliable and safe



- Efficient and environmentally sound



- Compliant with the applicable legal requirements and regulations.



We continually improve our performance and reduce adverse environmental impact, through objectives
set by management, to satisfy our customers and other stakeholders. Our business premises provide a
safe and healthy working environment for our employees and partners.



Our skilled organization acts as a responsible global citizen.



2. QUALITY ASSURANCE OF ENGINES




In accordance with ISO 9001 the Quality assurance is implemented into working methods ensuring that
the engine will reach the specified Quality demands in every aspect.



As an instrument for the Quality follow-up, an engine specific Quality plan is made. This plan
includes Quality demands and inspections to be made at different stages during the manufacturing
process. This is the standard procedure used by Wärtsilä in order to ensure the Quality level of
the products.



3. INSPECTION OF ENGINE MAIN COMPONENTS




The Quality assurance program includes factory certificate practise for main parts of Wärtsilä
engines. During the performance test these measurement reports, material certificates and pressure
test reports can be made available for customer’s review. All main components have their own serial
numbers, and thus the corresponding certificate and measurement report can be traced.



4. TEST RUN OF ENGINES




The Quality assurance program includes all preparations before test run; running-in, test run
procedures and checking/ calibration of the loading device. The delivery test run will be performed
according to the standard testing procedure if not otherwise stated in the contract.



5. QUALIFIED SUPPLIERS OF WÄRTSILÄ




Wärtsilä utilizes well Qualified vendors as engine part and auxiliary equipment manufacturers.
Supply contracts are made with most of the suppliers. Because of long term supplier co-operation,
well proven equipment is delivered.



Most of the suppliers delivering equipment and components to Wärtsilä Power Plants and Wärtsilä
Manufacturing have Quality management systems in accordance with the standard ISO 9001.



6. SUPPLIER ASSESSMENT PROCEDURES FOR WÄRTSILÄ POWER PLANTS




Quality integration file




The Quality integration file is the main tool used for guiding suppliers into the Wärtsilä Power
Plants way of working.



Feedback about findings are forwarded to the supplier using the following tools:



Claim vs. supplier




To systematically improve the Quality of the products and services of Wärtsilä Power Plants
suppliers, whenever motivated a claim vs. supplier is issued.



A claim vs. supplier can be issued based upon a customer complaint, on the initiative of the
project team, or as a result of a delivery inspection, made by Wärtsilä representative, at the
suppliers’ workshop.



Delivery inspection




When the product is ready for delivery a Wärtsilä representative will be given an opportunity to
check the conformance with the order specification at the supplier’s work shop.



Supplier audit




Based on the result of the supplier evaluation, claims, inspection result statistics, etc, audits
of suppliers of main equipment are carried out.



The supplier audits are prepared in advance. As a result supplier audit reports are made which are
distributed to the supplier and to concerned parties within Wärtsilä.



Supplier evaluation




The information from the mentioned tools is used when evaluating the suppliers’ performance.



Document Classification:

Confidential




Page 2/8









 








The information from the mentioned tools is used when evaluating the suppliers’ performance.



6. QUALITY ASSURANCE OF AUXILIARY UNITS




For units and equipment manufactured at the suppliers workshop, Wärtsilä Quality instructions and
guidelines are implemented. The documentation is stating the Quality level for the units in
question. For main auxiliary units a specific Quality plan / ITP is made. This plan includes the
Quality requirements to be met and inspections to be made.



7. TEST RUN OF AUXILIARY UNITS




Wärtsilä and the supplier develop unit specific delivery factory acceptance test and/or dispatch
inspection procedures. During the manufacturing random checks can be made by Wärtsilä. These checks
are performed based on the purchase orders, drawings and specifications.



Before the delivery, the supplier always performs the factory acceptance tests and/or dispatch
inspections, either on his own or together with a Wärtsilä representative.



This test run results in a factory test report, an inspection report or a certificate. These
documents will be delivered to the customer as a part of the final documentation for the plant.



8. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS




For serial manufactured equipment Wärtsilä accept vendors authorized factory acceptance test
procedures. Where the contract between Wärtsilä and the customer has specific requirements for
factory acceptance tests, these shall be agreed before the test program is finalized.



9. POWER PLANT ERECTION AND COMMISSIONING




The installation of the equipment is made in accordance with the drawings and installation
instructions given for the specific project in the installation file. Comprehensive commissioning
tests are carried out when the installation is completed. Prior to these tests, all pipe systems,
auxiliary units, electrical systems, equipment and EG-sets are adjusted and calibrated for proper
function. The commissioning is made to ensure the functionality and performance of each individual
equipment and the whole plant. These tests result in a commissioning file and the issuing of a
handing over certificate. Handing over documents are prepared as specified in the contract and
signed by both the client and Wärtsilä. Any open items will be listed in a punch list and a
schedule for the correction is made.



10. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL BEFORE START UP




The Quality of the work at site is followed up by the site manager and his supervisors. Quality
instructions, installation instructions and contract requirements are followed at site. Before
starting the installation work necessary documents are given to the client and to the
subcontractors at site. All equipment will be tested according to Wärtsilä standard procedures.



11. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL AFTER HANDING OVER




During the warranty period a person from the Wärtsilä Customer Assitance Centre is named as a
contact person for the customer. When the warranty period has expired, a contact person from the
Wärtsilä network company is named to serve the customer.



The contact person is regularly in touch with the customer making visits to the power plant and
discussing with the customer about preventive actions to maintain the Quality of the equipment. If
there occur any problems with the Quality of the equipment, the contact person ensures that the
supplier is involved to rectify the problem (according to Wärtsilä’s claim handling procedures).
The contact person encourages the customer by support to maintain the Quality of the equipment by
himself.



Document Classification:

Confidential




Page 3/8









 












INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN




							
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer name:
	 	Lihir Gold Mine
	 	Project name:
	 	Power Supply Uppgrade. LGL
	Project location:
	 	Papua New Guinea
	 	Project reference:
	 	P0900329






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Inspection code	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	Reference document/	 	 	Test Method/	 	 	 	 	 	Customer+	 	 	Record/	 	 	Remarks/
	Item	 	 	Equipment	 	 	Acceptance criteria	 	 	Checking criteria	 	 	Wärtsilä	 	 	Wärtsilä	 	 	Format	 	 	Notes
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A

	 	 	POWER GENERATION	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1

	 	 	GENERATING SET	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1.1

	 	 	ENGINE	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Factory acceptance test
	 	 	IOS, specifications and Wärtsilä FAT procedure Manufacturers procedures
	 	 	According to ISO 3046-1 standard
	 	 	H
	 	 	W
	 	 	Test run protocol
	 	 	sample attached
	 

	 	 	Final inspection and protection
	 	 	 
	 	 	Manufacturers procedures
	 	 	R
	 	 	 	 	 	Inspection records	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A1.2

	 	 	GENERATOR	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Routine test
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
routine test procedure
	 	 	Routine test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers routine test record
	 	 	sample attached
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2

	 	 	MECHANICAL AUXILIARY SYSTEMS	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.0

	 	 	AUXILIARY MODULES	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Engine auxiliary module
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Fuel oil filter
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Fuel booster pump
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Functional test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Return fuel pump
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Functional test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Return fuel tank
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Leakage test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Pre heating unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Thermostatic valves
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Pressure increasing pump
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Functional test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Steam heater
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Module control panel
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
FAT procedures
	 	 	Factory test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Exhaust gas module
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Low temperature expansion tank
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Leakage test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Charge air silencer
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop report	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Oil mist separator
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test, Functional test and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 






Document Classification:

Confidential




Page 4/8









 












INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN




							
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer name:
	 	Lihir Gold Mine
	 	Project name:
	 	Power Supply Uppgrade. LGL
	Project location:
	 	Papua New Guinea
	 	Project reference:
	 	P0900329






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Inspection code	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	Reference document/	 	 	Test Method/	 	 	 	 	 	Customer+	 	 	Record/	 	 	Remarks/
	Item	 	 	Equipment	 	 	Acceptance criteria	 	 	Checking criteria	 	 	Wärtsilä	 	 	Wärtsilä	 	 	Format	 	 	Notes
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.1

	 	 	FUEL SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.1.2

	 	 	HEAVY FUEL OIL SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Heavy fuel oil separator unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test, Functional test and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Heavy / light fuel oil feeder unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test, Functional test and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.2

	 	 	LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Lubricating oil separator unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test, Functional test and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Lubricating oil transfer pump unit (mobile)
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Lubricating oil transfer pump unit (stationary)
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.3

	 	 	COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Starting air bottle
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Starting air compressor unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test, Functional test and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Instrument air compressor unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test, Functional test and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.4

	 	 	COOLING SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Cooling radiator
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test, Functional test and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.5

	 	 	CHARGE AIR SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Charge air filter
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Tightness check and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop report	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.6

	 	 	EXHAUST SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Exhaust gas silencer
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop report	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.8

	 	 	STATION SUPPORT SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.8.1

	 	 	OILY WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Oily water transfer pump unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Oily water feed pump unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 






Document Classification:

Confidential




Page 5/8









 












INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN




							
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer name:
	 	Lihir Gold Mine
	 	Project name:
	 	Power Supply Uppgrade. LGL
	Project location:
	 	Papua New Guinea
	 	Project reference:
	 	P0900329






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Inspection code	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	Reference document/	 	 	Test Method/	 	 	 	 	 	Customer+	 	 	Record/	 	 	Remarks/
	Item	 	 	Equipment	 	 	Acceptance criteria	 	 	Checking criteria	 	 	Wärtsilä	 	 	Wärtsilä	 	 	Format	 	 	Notes
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Oily water treatment unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Sludge loading pump unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A2.8.2

	 	 	WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Water treatment unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Water booster unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A3

	 	 	ELECTRICAL SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A3.2

	 	 	STATION SUPPORT SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Station auxiliary transformer
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
FAT procedures
	 	 	Factory test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Black start unit
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
FAT procedures
	 	 	Factory test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Low voltage switchboard
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
FAT procedures
	 	 	Factory test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Frequency converter (for radiator)
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
FAT procedures
	 	 	Factory test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Engine auxiliary panel
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
FAT procedures
	 	 	Factory test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A3.3

	 	 	DC-SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	DC-system power plant control
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
FAT procedures
	 	 	Factory test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A4

	 	 	AUTOMATION SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A4.2

	 	 	CONTROL PANELS	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Central common control panel
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
FAT procedures
	 	 	Factory test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Central generating set control panel
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
FAT procedures
	 	 	Factory test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Local generating set control panel
	 	 	Drawings, specifications, IEC and Manufacturers
FAT procedures
	 	 	Factory test according to IEC and Visual
inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A5

	 	 	HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A5.1

	 	 	STEAM GENERATION SYSTEM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	A5.1.1

	 	 	STEAM GENERATION SYSTEM FOR FUEL HEATING	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 






Document Classification:

Confidential




Page 6/8









 










INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN




							
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer name:
	 	Lihir Gold Mine
	 	Project name:
	 	Power Supply Uppgrade. LGL
	Project location:
	 	Papua New Guinea
	 	Project reference:
	 	P0900329






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Inspection code	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	Reference document/	 	 	Test Method/	 	 	 	 	 	Customer+	 	 	Record/	 	 	Remarks/
	Item	 	 	Equipment	 	 	Acceptance criteria	 	 	Checking criteria	 	 	Wärtsilä	 	 	Wärtsilä	 	 	Format	 	 	Notes
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Exhaust gas boiler
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Heat recovery container
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test, Factory test and Visual
Inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Steam header
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Pressure test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B1

	 	 	HULL	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	TBA
	 	 	TBA
	 	 	TBA
	 	 	 	 	 	TBA
	 	 	The hull construction is made according
to the requirements of
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Classification society, minor modifications
of the layout
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	of the hull can be advised by Buyer, and
if the Supplier accepts, and the
modifications are not in conflict with the
requirements from the Classification
society, these modifications will
implemented.
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	B2

	 	 	CIVIL WORKS AND STRUCTURES	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Material for substructures
	 	 	Specifications and Manufacturers procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers certificate of
compliance	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Superstructures pre-fabrication
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
Procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Work shop certificate	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Ventilation units
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
Procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers certificate of
compliance	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Material for plumbing and sanitary installations
	 	 	Specifications and Manufacturers procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers certificate of
compliance	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Material for electrification
	 	 	Specifications, IEC and Manufacturers procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers certificate of
compliance	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Material for gas detection
	 	 	Specifications and Manufacturers procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers certificate of
compliance	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Material for fire detection
	 	 	Specifications and Manufacturers procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers certificate of
compliance	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Material for fire fighting system
	 	 	Specifications and Manufacturers procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers certificate of
compliance	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Cranes and hoists
	 	 	Specifications and Manufacturers procedures
	 	 	Factory test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Factory test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Air conditioning units
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers certificate of
compliance	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Oily water collection sump
	 	 	Drawings, specifications and Manufacturers
procedures
	 	 	Leakage test and Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers Test record	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Material for site works
	 	 	Specifications and Manufacturers procedures
	 	 	Visual inspection
	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Manufacturers certificate of
compliance	 	 	 





Document Classification:

Confidential




Page 7/8









 












INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN




							
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer name:
	 	Lihir Gold Mine
	 	Project name:
	 	Power Supply Uppgrade. LGL
	Project location:
	 	Papua New Guinea
	 	Project reference:
	 	P0900329






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Inspection code	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	Reference document/	 	 	Test Method/	 	 	 	 	 	Customer+	 	 	Record/	 	 	Remarks/
	Item	 	 	Equipment	 	 	Acceptance criteria	 	 	Checking criteria	 	 	Wärtsilä	 	 	Wärtsilä	 	 	Format	 	 	Notes
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	C

	 	 	ENGINEERING	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Tank diagram
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Tank diagram	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Lightweight survey
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Lightweight survey	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	Stability booklet
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	W
	 	 	 	 	 	Stability booklet	 	 	 






Inspection code definitions:





W = Witness point




The vendor has to inform Wärtsiläs project manager prior to the inspection/
test of the first unit in the serie. If the first unit in the serie is
approved, the witness point requirement is waived for the rest of the units
in the series. Work may proceed after the inspection date advised, whether
the witnessing authority attends or not. The witness points are to be
defined project specifically and are subject to the project manager’s
decision.




R= Review of quality record




H = Hold point




The vendor has to inform Wärtsiläs project manager prior to the
test/ inspection of the first unit in the serie. Work may proceed
after the witnessing authority has either undertaken the specified
inspection, first of series, or has informed the supplier that the
requirement is waived. If the first unit in the serie is approved,
the hold point requirement is waived for the rest of the units in
the series. The hold points are to be defined project specifically
and are subject to the project manager’s decision.



Additional notes:





- The project manager has the right to sharpen or change the requirements this document
witholds. The project managers decision is valid wether this document is revised or not.



Attachments:





- Quality system Certificate of Wärtsilä Finland Oy



Document Classification:

Confidential





Page 8/8











 










TEST PROTOCOL




	 	 	 
	Project:
	 	 
	 
	 	 
	Engine No.:
	 	 
	 
	 	 
	Engine Type:

	 	W20V32
	 
	 	 
	Date(s):
	 	 
	 
	 	 
	Third Party Inspection:
	 	 






 









 






	 	 	 
	

	 	Test protocol no

Report

Version: 3.0.0.2

Printed






Delivery Centre Vaasa




Installation Data




	 	 	 	 	 
	ENGINE DATA
	 	 	 	 
	Customer:
	 	 	 	 
	Type:
	 	 	 	W20V32
	Manufacturing number:
	 	 	 	 
	Cylinder bore [mm]:
	 	 	 	
	Piston stroke [mm]:
	 	 	 	
	Rated power [kW]:
	 	 	 	 
	Nominal power [kW]:
	 	 	 	 
	Nominal speed [rpm]:
	 	 	 	
	Direction of rotation:
	 	 	 	
	 
	 	 	 	 
	INSTALLATION
	 	 	 	 
	Type:
	 	 	 	 
	Name:
	 	 	 	 
	Number
	 	 	 	 
	LOADING /AVR
	 	o	 	Alternator, in house
	 
	 	o	 	Alternator, project (see specification below)
	 
	 	o	 	Water brake (see specification below)
	 
	 	o	 	AVR, in house
	 
	 	o	 	AVR, project
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Manufacturer:
	 	 	 	 
	Type:
	 	 	 	 
	Number:
	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 
	ENGINE COMPONENTS
	 	 	 	 
	Turbocharger:
	 	 	 	 
	Serial no.(s):
	 	 	 	 
	Air cooler:
	 	 	 	 
	Number(s):
	 	 	 	 
	Governor type:
	 	 	 	 
	Designation no:
	 	 	 	 
	Serial no.:
	 	 	 	 






FUEL




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Density at	 	Temp	 	Viscosity at	 	Temp	 	Lower Heating Value
	Quality	 	[kg / l]	 	[C°]	 	[mm2 / s]	 	[C°]	 	[MJ/kg]
	HFO
	 	 	 	 	 	 	15	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	50	 	 	 	 	 
	LFO
	 	 	 	 	 	 	15	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	40	 	 	 	 	 






	 
	LUBRICATING OIL

	Quality: Shell Argina T 40







 









 





	 	 	 
	

	 	Test protocol no

Report

Version: 3.0.0.2

Printed






Delivery Centre Vaasa




Test Program for




	 	 	 	 	 
	Order number:
	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Engine number:
	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Engine type:
	 	 	W20V32	 
	 
	 	 	 	 
	Test run date(s):
	 	 	 	 






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Engine	 	 	 	Load	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Time:	 	Dur:	 	Speed	 	Shaft load	 	power	 	 	 	power	 	 	 	Oper.	 	 
	Start	 	Stop	 	[min]	 	[rpm]	 	[%]	 	[kW]	 	h	 	[kW]	 	Fuel	 	data	 	Notice
	13:35

	 	13:40
	 	5
	 	750
	 	0
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO
	 	 	 	Verification of lube oil pressure shutdown.
	13:40
	 	13:55
	 	15
	 	750
	 	0
	 	25
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO	 	 	 	 
	13:55
	 	14:10
	 	15
	 	750
	 	25
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO	 	 	 	 
	14:10
	 	14:15
	 	5
	 	750
	 	0
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO	 	 	 	 
	14:15
	 	14:30
	 	15
	 	750
	 	0
	 	50
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO	 	 	 	 
	14:30
	 	14:50
	 	20
	 	750
	 	50
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO	 	 	 	 
	14:50
	 	14:55
	 	5
	 	750
	 	0
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO	 	 	 	 
	14:55
	 	15:10
	 	15
	 	750
	 	0
	 	75
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO	 	 	 	 
	15:10
	 	15:30
	 	20
	 	750
	 	75
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO	 	 	 	 
	15:30
	 	15:35
	 	5
	 	750
	 	0
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO	 	 	 	 
	15:35
	 	16:20
	 	45
	 	750
	 	60
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	HFO
	 	X	 	 
	16:20
	 	17:05
	 	45
	 	750
	 	85
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	HFO
	 	X	 	 
	18:35
	 	19:20
	 	45
	 	750
	 	100
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	HFO
	 	X	 	 
	19:20
	 	20:05
	 	45
	 	750
	 	100
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	LFO
	 	X	 	 





Check of overspeed devices.




 









 








	 	 	 
	

	 	Test Protocol No.

Report

Version: 3.0.0.3

Printed






Delivery Centre Vaasa




  Operation Data




	 	 	 	 	 
	Test run date(s):
	 	 	07.01.2009	 






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Mode	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Loadpoint: Power/ Torque
	 	 	 	 	 	60	 	85	 	100	 	100	 	 
	Time
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Fuel
	 	 	 	 	 	HFO	 	HFO	 	HFO	 	LFO	 	 
	Ambient Data
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Total barometric pressure
	 	APT210	 	hPa	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Temperature of intake air
	 	ATE210	 	C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Relative humidity of intake air
	 	AHR210	 	%	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Alternator data
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Alternator efficiency
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Alternator power
	 	 	 	kW	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Alternator voltage, nominal
	 	 	 	V	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Alternator current, nominal
	 	 	 	A	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Engine Data
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	General Data
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Power
	 	 	 	kW	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Speed
	 	 	 	rpm	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Load indicator position
	 	GT178	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Fuel rack position, A-bank
	 	GT165	 	mm	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Fuel rack position, B-bank
	 	GT165-2	 	mm	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Charge air system
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Turbocharger speed, A-bank
	 	SE518	 	rpm	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Turbocharger speed, B-bank
	 	SE528	 	rpm	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Charge air pressure
	 	PT601	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Charge air temp, in air receiver
	 	TE601	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exhaust gas system
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder A1
	 	TE5011A	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder A2
	 	TE5021A	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder A3
	 	TE5031A	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder A4
	 	TE5041A	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder A5
	 	TE5051A	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder A6
	 	TE5061A	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder A7
	 	TE5071A	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder A8
	 	TE5081A	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder A9
	 	TE5091A	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder A10
	 	TE5101A	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Mean value
	 	 	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder B1
	 	TE5011B	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder B2
	 	TE5021B	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder B3
	 	TE5031B	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder B4
	 	TE5041B	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder B5
	 	TE5051B	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder B6
	 	TE5061B	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder B7
	 	TE5071B	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder B8
	 	TE5081B	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder B9
	 	TE5091B	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp, cylinder B10
	 	TE5101B	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Mean value
	 	 	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp. bef. TC, A-bank
	 	TE511	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Exh. gas temp. bef. TC, B-bank
	 	TE521	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Cylinder pressure
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder A1
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder A2
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder A3
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder A4
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder A5
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder A6
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder A7
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder A8
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder A9
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder A10
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Mean value
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder B1
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder B2
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder B3
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
















 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Test Protocol No.

Report

Version: 3.0.0.3

Printed 

	 	PAAE138971

RA_058.QRP


09.01.2009






Delivery Centre Vaasa




Operation Data




	 	 	 	 	 
	Test run date(s):
	 	 	  07.01.2009	 






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Mode	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Loadpoint: Power/ Torque
	 	 	 	 	 	60	 	85	 	100	 	100	 	 
	Time
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Fuel
	 	 	 	 	 	HFO	 	HFO	 	HFO	 	LFO	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder B4
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder B5
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder B6
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder B7
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder B8
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder B9
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Firing pressure, cylinder B10
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Mean value
	 	 	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Installation data
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	HT-water pressure
	 	PT401	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	LT-water pressure
	 	PT471	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Lub. oil pressure
	 	PT201	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Fuel oil pressure
	 	PT101	 	bar	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	HT-water temp, bef. engine
	 	TE401	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	HT-water temp. aft. engine
	 	TE402	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	LT-water temp. bef. CAC
	 	TE471	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	LT-water temp. aft. LOG
	 	TE482	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Lub. oil temp. bef. LOG
	 	TE231	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Lub. oil temp. aft. LOC
	 	TE232	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Fuel oil temperature
	 	TE101	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearings
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 0
	 	TE700	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 1
	 	TE701	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 2
	 	TE702	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 3
	 	TE703	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 4
	 	TE704	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 5
	 	TE705	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 6
	 	TE706	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 7
	 	TE707	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 8
	 	TE708	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 9
	 	TE709	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 10
	 	TE710	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Main bearing temp, bearing 11
	 	TE711	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Mean value
	 	 	 	°C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Extra Measurements
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 






 









 






	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Test protocol no

Report

Version: 3.0.0.2

Printed
	 	PAAE138971

RA_0591.QRP


09.01.2009






Delivery Centre Vaasa




	 	 	 
	   ADJUSTMENT OF STOP SWITCHES:

	 	Meas.
	Alarm for low prelubrication oil pressure (bar)
	 	 
	Stop for low lubrication oil pressure (bar)
	 	 
	Engine overspeed device 1 (rpm)
	 	 
	Engine overspeed device 2 (rpm)
	 	 






	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	Meas.
	ADJUSTMENT OF FUEL PUMPS:

	 	Work value for the fuel rack (mm)	 	 
	 

	 	Safety device released, the fuel rack (mm)	 	 
	 

	 	Stop value for the fuel rack (mm)	 	 
	 

	 	No load value for the fuel rack (mm)	 	 
	 

	 	No load value for governor	 	 






average




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 
	 	 	 	A	 	 	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	3	 	 	 	 	4	 	 	 	 	5	 	 	 	 	6	 	 	 	 	7	 	 	 	 	8	 	 	 	 	9	 	 	 	 	10	 	 
	 	Del. comm. before TDC
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 
	 	 	 	B	 	 	 	 	1	 	 	 	 	2	 	 	 	 	3	 	 	 	 	4	 	 	 	 	5	 	 	 	 	6	 	 	 	 	7	 	 	 	 	8	 	 	 	 	9	 	 	 	 	10	 	 
	 	Del. comm. before TDC
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 





	 	 	 
	PRESENT AT THE TEST RUN
	 	 
	WÄRTSILÄ Finland Oy

	 	Customer(s)






	 	 	 
	Wärtsilä Finland Oy     
	 	 
	Vaasa Factory W 32     
	 	 
	 


	 	 
	Test Run Manager, Delivery Centre Vaasa
	 	 






Third Party Inspection














 





	 	 	 	 	 
	

	 	Test protocol no

Report

Version: 3.0.0.2

Printed
	 	PAAE138971

RA_060.QRP


09.01.2009






Delivery Centre Vaasa




Crankshaft Measurements









HOT ENGINE

Room temperature when values were measured [°C]:

Initials:

Engine running continuosly before indicating [h]:

The time between stop and indicating [min]:

Temperature of lubricating oil [°C]:

Temperature of cooling water before engine [°C]:




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	Cylinder	 
	 	Gauge	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	Position	 	 	1	 	 	2	 	 	3	 	 	4	 	 	5	 	 	6	 	 	7	 	 	8	 	 	9	 	 	10	 
	 	Rear side top Takasivu ylhäällä
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	Rear side Takasivulla
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	Bottom Alhaalla
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	Operating side KäyttösivulIa
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	Operating side top Käyttösivu ylhäällä
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 





Deviations 1/100 mm




COLD ENGINE




Measurements of crankshaft alignment made in main assembly

Room temperature when values were measured [°C]: 21 °C

Initials:
                                         
                                    PK




	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	Cylinder	 	 
	 	Guage	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	Position	 	 	1	 	 	 	2	 	 	 	3	 	 	 	4	 	 	 	5	 	 	 	6	 	 	 	7	 	 	 	8	 	 	 	9	 	 	 	10	 	 
	 	Rear side top Takasivu ylhäällä
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	Rear side Takasivulla
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	Bottom Alhaalla
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	Operating side Käyöttdsivulla
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	Operating side top Käyttösivu ylhäällä
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 





Deviations 1/100 mm

















 





	 	 	 	 	 
	
	 	Test protocol no	 	PAAE138971
	 	Report	 	RA_061.QRP
	 	Version: 3.0.0.2	 	 
	 	Printed	 	09.01.2009






Delivery Centre Vaasa




Inspection of the Wärtsilä Engine




Project:

Order number:

Engine type:

Engine number:

Classification society:

Test run date(s)




Inspection date:



It has been agreed that the following openings and inspections are to be carried out at the
delivery test run attended by the buyer and / or the representative of the classification society.




	 	 	 	 	 
	Inspections:	 	 	 	Results:
	Big end bearing No.
	 	B4	 	OK
	Main bearing No.
	 	7	 	OK
	Thrust bearing
	 	Yes	 	OK
	Opening of covers
	 	Yes	 	OK






Additional information:



The following corrections should be made before delivery:




	 	 	 
	WÄRTSILÄ Finland Oy

	 	Customer(s)






Wärtsilä Finland Oy

Vaasa Factory W 32



 



[ILLEGIBLE] Test Run Manager, Delivery Centre Vaasa




Third Party Inspection




[ILLEGIBLE]




 









 





	 	 	 	 	 
	
	 	Test protocol no	 	PAAE138971
	 	Report	 	RA_062.QRP
	 	Version: 3.0.0.3	 	 
	 	Printed	 	09.01.2009






Delivery Centre Vaasa




Fuel Oil Consumption According to ISO 15550




	 	 	 
	Engine number:
	 	 
	Project:
	 	 
	Order number:
	 	 
	Engine type:

	 	W20V32
	Output/100% [kW]:
	 	 
	Speed [rpm]:
	 	 
	Test run date(s):
	 	 






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	K

	 	=
	 	ratio of indicated power
	 	s
	 	=
	 	1 exponent
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	a

	 	=
	 	power adjustment factor
	 	Mek
	 	=
	 	mechanical efficiency
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Px

	 	=
	 	barometric pressure during test [hPa]
	 	Qtest
	 	=
	 	lower heating value of the fuel oil during test [MJ/kg]
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Pra

	 	=
	 	standard reference barometric pressure [1000 hPa]
	 	Qiso 
	 	=
	 	lower heating value of the fuel oil (ISO)
[MJ / kg]
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	m

	 	=
	 	0,7 exponent
	 	Be
	 	=
	 	fuel oil consumption on test bed [g / kWh]
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Tra

	 	=
	 	reference air temperature [298 K]
	 	BISO
	 	=
	 	fuel oil consumption according to ISO [g
/ kWh]
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Tx

	 	=
	 	air temperature during test [K]
	 	M
	 	=
	 	measured fuel quantity [g]
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	n

	 	=
	 	1,2 exponent
	 	MLS
	 	=
	 	flow of clean leak fuel [g / s]
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Tcr

	 	=
	 	reference charge air coolant temperature [298 K]
	 	P
	 	=
	 	output [kW]
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Tcx

	 	=
	 	charge air coolant temperature during test [K]
	 	S
	 	=
	 	time [s]
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	EDP
	 	=
	 	engine driven pumps [g / kWh] (calculated
with or without EDP according to the
contract)
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
		 	






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	Air	 	Air	 	Coolant	 	Meas.fuel	 	 	 	Meas. con-	 	Clean	 	Eng.drlven	 	 	 	 
	Test	 	Load	 	 	 	 	 	Power	 	press.	 	temp	 	temp	 	amount	 	Mean	 	sumption	 	leak fuel	 	pumps	 	Be	 	Biso
	no	 	%	 	Speed	 	Fuel	 	kW	 	hPa	 	°c	 	°C	 	kg	 	times	 	kg / h	 	kg / h	 	g / kWh	 	g / kWh	 	g / kWh
	1
	 	100	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 






Lower heating value during test [MJ/kg]:

Lower heating value (ISO) [MJ/kg]:

Mechanical efficiency:





 











 





					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 






Test report for synchronous machines



Customer

Order reference



Project



Machine

Work nr:

Serial nr



Date




	 
	Approved on the behalf of manufacturer	 	 	ABB Oy
	 	 	 	 	Machines
	 	 	 	 	Final Testing





ABB Oy, Machines




	 	 	 	 	 
	Visiting Address

	 	Postal Address
	 	Telefax(Group)
	Strömbergintie 1 B

	 	P.O.Box 186
	 	+358 10 22 22330
	00380 HELSINKI

	 	FI-00381 Helsinki
	 	Telefax(Test floor)
	 

	 	FINLAND
	 	+358 10 22 23692
















 








					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 2
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A





RATINGS




	 	 	 
	Standards

	 	Classification society
	Insulation class

	 	Mounting
	Temperature class

	 	Protection class
	Ambient temp. max

	 	Duty






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Usage
	 	Conn
	 	Sn/Pn[kVA]
	 	Un [V]
	 	In [A]
	 	p.f.
	 	f [Hz]
	 	Um [V]
	 	Im [A]
	 	Direction
	 	n [rpm]






Table of contents / Test Program





	 	1)	 	Visual inspection
	 
	 	2)	 	Air gap measurement and bearing clearance
	 
	 	3)	 	Insulation resistances before tests
	 
	 	4)	 	Resistance measurement of windings and elements
	 
	 	5)	 	First running
	 
	 	6)	 	Direction of rotation, checking of phase sequence
	 
	 	7)	 	No-load point
	 
	 	8)	 	Short-circuit point
	 
	 	9)	 	No-load and short circuit curve, U1 = f(Im) and I1 = f(Im)
	 
	 	10)	 	Tests with regulator
	 
	 	11)	 	Overspeed test
	 
	 	12)	 	Vibration measurement after overspeed
	 
	 	13)	 	High voltage test
	 
	 	14)	 	Insulation resistances with Polarization index





Appendices: 1) Tests with regulator_Basic settings














 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 3
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A









	 	1)	 	Visual inspection





	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Version
	 	Notes
	 

	 	 A	 	 






	 	2)	 	Air gap measurement and bearing clearance





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	Airgap
	 	 	 	Bearing clearance
	 

	 	 	 	Min [mm]
	 	Max [mm]
	 	[mm]
	 

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 	 	D
	 

	 	Exciter
	 	 	 	 	 	N.D







	 	3)	 	Insulation resistances before tests






T =



	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Winding	 	R [Mohm]	 	U [V]	 	t1 [s]
	Stator
	 	 	 	 	 	 	1000	 	 	 	60	 
	Rotor
	 	 	 	 	 	 	1000	 	 	 	60	 
	Exciter
	 	 	 	 	 	 	1000	 	 	 	 	 
	Auxiliaries
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Space heater
	 	 	 	 	 	 	500	 	 	 	 	 
	Temperature detectors
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Stator
	 	 	 	 	 	 	500	 	 	 	 	 
	Bearing
	 	 	 	 	 	 	500	 	 	 	 	 







	 	4)	 	Resistance measurement of windings and elements





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Resistances of windings
	 

	 	T = 20 °C	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 

	 	Armature windings
	 	Ruv [ohm]
	 	Ruw [ohm]
	 	Rvw [ohm]	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Stator	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Rotor	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Exciter	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Stator	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Rotor:	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 4
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Resistances of detectors and space heaters
	 

	 	T =	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Terminal box	 	Terminals	 	Position	 	R [ohm]	 	Detector
	B3A

	 	1HE1 — 1HE2
	 	Space heater	 	 	 	 
	B3A

	 	2HE1 — 2HE2
	 	Space heater	 	 	 	 
	B3A

	 	1R1 — 1R2
	 	Stator winding U
	 	 	 	Pt-100
	B3A

	 	2R1 — 2R2
	 	Stator winding V
	 	 	 	Pt-100
	B3A

	 	3R1 — 3R2
	 	Stator winding W
	 	 	 	Pt-100
	B3A

	 	4R1 — 4R2
	 	Stator winding U (spare)
	 	 	 	Pt-100
	B3A

	 	5R1 — 5R2
	 	Stator winding V (spare)
	 	 	 	Pt-100
	B3A

	 	6R1 — 6R2
	 	Stator winding W (spare)
	 	 	 	Pt-100
	B3A

	 	30R1 — 30R2
	 	Bearing D-end
	 	 	 	Pt-100
	B3A

	 	40R1 — 40R2
	 	Bearing N.D-end
	 	 	 	Pt-100







	 	5)	 	First running






Notes




	 	6)	 	Direction of rotation, checking of phase sequence






Result




	 	7)	 	No-load point





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	n [rpm]
	 	T [°C]
	 	U1 [V]
	 	Im [A]
	 	 






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Voltage balances
	 

	 	Stator
	 	Uuv [V]
	 	Uuw [V]
	 	Uvw [V]
	 	 
	 

	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 






	 	8)	 	Short-circuit point





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	n [rpm]
	 	T [°C]
	 	I1 [A]
	 	Im [A]
	 	 






	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Current balances
	 

	 	Stator
	 	Iu [A]
	 	Iv [A]
	 	Iw [A]	 	 
	 

	 	1	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 








	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 5
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A









	 	9)	 	No-load and short circuit curve, U1 = f(Im) and I1 = f(Im)









	Ratings
U1 = I1 = n =
No-load curve
T = n =
Im [A] U1 [p.u.]
Short-circuit curve
T = n =
Im [A] I1 [p.u.]















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 








	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 6
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A






	 	10)	 	Tests with regulator





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Version
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Position	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Manufacturer	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Type	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Serial nr	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Drawing nr	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Sustained short-circuit test
	 

	 	I1, max =	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Im, max =	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	n, min =	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	ECL-10(Pos nr) =	 	Terminals	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	 	 	4 – 5
	 	5 – 6
	 	6 – 7
	 	7 – 8
	 	9 – 10
	 	10 – 11
	 	11 – 12
	 	12 – 13
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Other settings
	 

	 	Remanence voltage, U =	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Voltage transformer	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Auxliary voltage, Uaux =	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Pulse Width of UM	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Direction of Permanent Magnet	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	Voltage build-up and regulation at no-load





















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 7
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A







	 	11)	 	Overspeed test






n =                          t =




	 	12)	 	Vibration measurement after overspeed





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Bearing position
	 	U [V]
	 	I [A]
	 	n [rpm]
	 	Horizontal
	 	Vertical
	 	Axial
	 	Unit
	 	 
















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 








	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 8
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A









	 	13)	 	High voltage test





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Winding
	 	U [V]
	 	t [s]
	 	f [Hz]
	 	 
	 

	 	Stator	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Rotor	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Exciter	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Auxiliaries	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Space heater	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Temperature detectors	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Stator	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Bearing	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 







	 	14)	 	Insulation resistances with Polarization index





	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	T =	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Winding
	 	R [Mohm]
	 	U [V]
	 	t [s]
	 	R2 [Mohm]
	 	t2 [s]
	 	 R/R2
	 
	 

	 	Rotor	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Exciter	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Auxiliaries	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Space	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	heater	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Temperature detectors	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Stator	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 

	 	Bearing	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A1/1
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A







	 	1)	 	Tests with regulator_Basic settings














 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 







	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A1/2
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A






















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 









	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A1/3
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A



















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 








	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A1/4
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A

















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 








	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A1/5
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A

















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 








	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A1/6
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A

















 






					
	
	 	TEST REPORT
	 	 








	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	Customer

	 	Machine
	 	 	 	 Page
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 15
	Order reference

	 	Work nr:
	 	Serial nr
	 	 Revision
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A
	Project

	 	Approved
	 	 	 	 Report rev:
	 

	 	 	 	 	 	 A







End of report




	 	 	 
	Test bay
	 	 
	Author
	 	 
	 

	 	 Printed: 16.7.2009
	Number of pages 15
	 	 
	 

	 	 2.1/18















 








EXHIBIT H – DRAFT DELIVERY SCHEDULE AND MILESTONE CERTIFICATE



1. Draft delivery schedule



2. Milestone Certificate














 





MILESTONE CERTIFICATE



With reference to the Supply Contract dated • [date] between Wärtsilä Finland Oy.
(“Supplier”) and                     . (“Buyer”) for the power project in                     , Supplier
hereby certifies to Buyer that it has achieved the following milestone event in
accordance with the terms of the Contract and is therefore entitled to the assocaited
milestone payment as provided in clause 4.3 c) of the Contract:




     Milestone no       and Milestone event                                         



          IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Supplier has executed and delivered this Milestone
Certificate through its duly authorised representative this       day of                     ,
                    



WÄRTSILÄ FINLAND OY

By:

Title:




     Shipyard or installation contractor hereby certifies that the above referred to
milestone has been achieved



     IN WITNESS WHEREOF, shipyard or installation contractor executed and delivered
this certification that the milestone has been achieved through its duly authorised
representative this       day of                     ,                     


LEGAL NAME OF SHIPYARD or INSTALLATION

CONTRACTOR

By:

Title:




 









 








EXHIBIT I — PERFORMANCE TEST COMPLETION

CERTIFICATE




PERFORMANCE TEST COMPLETION CERTIFICATE



With reference to the Supply Contract dated • [date] between Wärtsilä Finland Oy.
(“Supplier”) and                     . (“Buyer”) for the power project in                     , Supplier
hereby certifies to Buyer that:




     1. the Performance Test has been completed in accordance with the Contract and the
Performance Test Guidelines and the report detailing the results of such tests is
attached hereto as Annex A — Test protocol;



     2. based on the results of the Performance Test consisting of Electrical Power
test and Heat rate test and Lube oil consumption test and _other tests                    ,
Supplier has for each specific guarantee either [ achieved the performance guarantees
]

or

[calculated the amount of liquidated damages payable to Buyer ]

or

[calculated the bonus to be received from Buyer ]


The
guarantees are described in Exhibit B — Performance
figures/guarantees


The calculations are described in Exhibit C — Performance test guidelines


The amounts of any such liquidated damages / bonuses are according to article 8 of this
Contract.




     3. Performance Test completion is achieved in accordance with the provisions
of the Contract.



          IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Supplier has executed and delivered this Performance Test
Completion Certificate through its duly authorised representative this       day of
                    ,                     



WÄRTSILÄ FINLAND OY

By:

Title:




     Buyer hereby notifies Supplier that it does not dispute Supplier’s calculation of
Performance Guarantees as set out above and that, as of date written above, the Power
Plant has satisfied the requirements for Performance Test completion.



 









 





EXHIBIT I — PERFORMANCE TEST COMPLETION

CERTIFICATE




     IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Buyer has executed and delivered this acceptance of Performance
Test completion through its duly authorised representative this       day of
                    ,                     


LEGAL NAME OF BUYER

By:

Title:




ANNEX A



A test protocol detailing results of tests




ANNEX B



Calculations and amounts of Liquidated Damages / Bonuses / Neither or




 









 








EXHIBIT J — SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

CERTIFICATE




SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATE




     With reference to the Supply Contract dated • [date] between Wärtsilä Finland Oy.
(“Supplier”) and
                    . (“Buyer”) for the power project in                     , Supplier
hereby certifies to Buyer that:



     1. Subject to any identified minor defects (as shown in the attached punch list) the
Plant is in conformity with the Technical Specifications and Scope of Supply;



     2. the Plant is constructed according to the Supplier’s instructions and
guidelines;



     3. the Plant can be started safely;



and




     4. the Plant is ready for Commissioning



          IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Supplier has executed and delivered this Substantial
Completion Certificate through its duly authorised representative this       day of
                    ,                     



WÄRTSILÄ FINLAND OY

By:

Title:




     Buyer hereby notifies Supplier that, as of [the date], the Plant has satisfied the
requirements for Substantial Completion in accordance with the terms of the Contract.



     IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Buyer has executed and delivered this acceptance of Substantial
Completion through its duly authorised representative this       day of                     ,
                    


LEGAL NAME OF OWNER

By:

Title: